(HONOURS) 工商管理(榮譽)學士 Programme Definitive Document

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (HONOURS)

工商管理(榮譽)學士

Programme Definitive Document

February 2019

Contents

Page 1 Basic Information of the Programme 3

2 Programme Objectives and Intended Learning Outcomes 4

3 Programme Delivery Model 8

4 Programme design and Structure 9

5 Admission Requirements 18

6 Assessment and Progression Regulations 21

7 Graduation Requirements 23

Appendix: Course Outlines

1. Basic Information of the Programme

Title of Programme Bachelor of Business Administration (Honours) (English and Chinese) 工商管理(榮譽)學士

Exit Award Bachelor of Business Administration (Honours) (English and Chinese) 工商管理(榮譽)學士

QF Level Level 5 Intermediate Exit Award Not applicable Award Granting Body Tung Wah College (TWC) 東華學院 Hosting School School of Business

Mode of Delivery and Full-time 4 Years Programme Length Primary Area of Study Area 5: Business & Management, General /Training Other Area of Study / Area 9: Economics, Accountancy, Finance & Investment Training Name(s) of Major 1. Financial Services 2. Health Services Management 3. Marketing 4. Professional Accountancy Programme Length of Maximum number of years: 6 Exit Award Minimum number of years: 4 Number of notional learning hours: 5,400 Number of QF credit: 540 Contact hours required for the above QF credits: 1,680 hours plus examinations Ratios of contact hours to self-study hours for various learning and teaching activities: 1:2

Minimum Number of Credit Number of TWC credits required for students of Year 1 Entry Requirement to graduate: 120

Number of Enrolment(s) One enrolment per year

Programme 1 September 2016 Commencement Date Address of Teaching Venue No. 31 Wylie Road, Homantin, Kowloon; and No. 90A & 90B, Shantung street, Mongkok, Kowloon

2 Programme Objectives and intended Learning Outcomes

2.1 Programme Objectives

2.1.1 TWC’s BBA(Hons) programme aims at equipping students with the generic skills, business insights, and professional knowledge necessary to develop a professional career in the profit or non-profit sector. More specifically, TWC’s BBA(Hons) programme has following objectives:

(i) Develop students’ critical and creative thinking as well as analytical and problem solving skills; (ii) Enhance students’ interpersonal skills, including teamwork and communication skills; (iii) Expand students’ understanding and appreciation of other cultures and environments; (iv) Provide students with experiential learning opportunities to facilitate integration of theory and practice in the business world.

2.2 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (PILOs)

2.2.1 Upon completion of the programme, students will be able to achieve the learning outcomes as follows:

PILO1 Construct and transform learning from general education and generic studies as solid foundation in meeting the requirements and challenges of the fast-changing knowledge-based economy.

PILO2 Use a wide range of Chinese and English communication skills, good social and interpersonal skills to promote effective business communication and management.

PILO3 Display an awareness and understanding of the community value of non-profit organisations in terms of their mission, culture and overall impact and significance in Hong Kong.

PILO4 Apply the general business knowledge gained to make ethical decision for the practice in one or more areas of business, for career development and continuous education, and for the pursuit of advanced knowledge.

PILO5 Demonstrate the commitment and abilities for independent life-long learning.

PILO6 Utilize critical and creative thinking to analyse and solve business problems in handling business issues.

PILO7 Use a range of information technology and processing skills to support learning, communication and work performance in the business world.

PILO8 Exercise global perspectives and multicultural sense at both personal and professional levels, to meet the challenges of an increasingly globalized world.

PILO9 Apply relevant knowledge and skills in the management of for-profit and non- profit organizations.

PILO10 Apply theoretical knowledge and analytical skills to the real word through experiential learning to gain practical exposure.

2.2.2 In addition, students of each of the four majors will be able to achieve the respective major specific learning outcomes as follows:

Professional Accountancy Major

ACY-ILO1 Understand fundamental issues relating to the regulatory environment for financial reporting and taxation in Hong Kong, the mainland China, and relevant major economies in the world.

ACy-ILO2 Apply professional accounting-related theories and practical skills to provide information for management decisions.

ACY-ILO3 Analyse accounting and related business information using multidisciplinary knowledge, skills, and technology.

ACY-ILO4 Make sensible and intelligent judgment and decisions based on the analysis of a combination of accounting and business-related information.

ACY-ILO5 Possess the communication and presentation skills required for entry-level accountants and business professionals.

ACY-ILO6 Identify and resolve ethical issues arising in accounting or business settings.

Financial Services Major

FIN-ILO1 Perform quantitative analysis of a wide range of economic and financial issues or factors to form market view.

FIN-ILO2 Apply finance and economics concepts and analytical skills in resolving financial problems, and pursue independent learning in the finance discipline.

FIN-ILO3 Apply the practical knowledge and skills that acquired from experiential learning activities, such as internship, mentorship, projects and hands-on laboratory sessions, to solve real-world problems.

FIN-ILO4 Demonstrate an understanding of the operation of local as well as global financial markets and economy, and be able to analyse and predict their changes and impacts.

FIN-ILO5 Demonstrate a fundamental understanding of the operations of various financial institutions including non-profit organisations, as well as the products they develop or assets they hold.

FIN-ILO6 Formulate and implement investment strategies or product development strategies.

FIN-ILO7 Demonstrate effective communication skills in conveying economic or financial analyses and addressing the needs of customers.

Marketing Major

MKT-ILO1 Command a range of specialised marketing skills that are applicable in the business world.

MKT-ILO2 Demonstrate the ability to develop market intelligence through acquisition of basic research skills.

MKT-ILO3 Apply a range of IT solutions to enhance marketing communication and performance.

MKT-ILO4 Formulate creative and practical marketing solutions.

MKT-ILO5 Demonstrate awareness of the impacts of marketing on individual, culture, ethics, and society in the context of China and global markets.

MKT-ILO6 Evaluate marketing decisions and formulate marketing strategies to support the operations of for-profit and/or non-profit organisations.

Health Services Management (HSM) Major

HSM-ILO1 Perform qualitative and quantitative analysis of economic, financial, accounting, and managerial principles, factors, and issues to formulate professional views and work practices in health and healthcare organisations, with special reference to profit orientation, external effects, information, risk, and public good and social enterprise characteristics of health and healthcare in the modern industrial society.

HSM-ILO2 Apply economic, financial, accounting, and managerial ideas, principles, and analytical skills to resolve problems in health services management, and pursue independent learning and human capital enhancement in health and healthcare employment.

HSM-ILO3 Apply the practical knowledge and skills acquired from experiential learning activities, such as mentorship, projects, and hands-on simulation

sessions, to understand and solve real-world problems in health services management.

HSM-ILO4 Demonstrate an understanding of the fundamental operations of health and healthcare organisations, with special reference to external effects, information, risk, public good and social enterprise characteristics, health insurance, for-profit and non-profit institutions such as hospitals and managed care organisations, the products and services supplied, and the assets held.

HSM-ILO5 Demonstrate an understanding of operations in the local, regional, and global markets for health and healthcare products and services, and the ability to analyse and predict changes and to assess their economic and social impact.

HSM-ILO6 Design and implement strategies to manage health and healthcare product and service innovation, development, and marketing.

HSM-ILO7 Demonstrate effective communication skills in conveying the outcomes of economic, financial, accounting, and managerial analysis in the demand and supply of health and healthcare products and services, particularly in addressing the needs and requirements of users and consumers and the implications for public policy.

3 Programme Delivery Model

3.1 Medium of Instruction Policy

3.1.1 The programme follows the language policy of TWC and adopts English as the medium of instruction. Learning materials will be in English except for the Chinese Language courses.

3.2 Learning and Teaching Methodology at Programme Level

3.2.1 The programme adopts a teaching style appropriate for tertiary education. Lectures, seminars, tutorials, role play and problem-based learning will be scheduled whenever appropriate.

Lecture

3.2.2 Lectures will be conducted in large groups as an efficient method of presenting new didactic materials. A diverse range of activities, such as case study, brainstorming, and open-ended discussion and teamwork exercises will be integrated into the lectures to make them interactive and more conducive to learning.

Tutorial

3.2.3 Tutorials offer students opportunities to clarify concepts learned, to discuss related subject matter and to share experience. The tutorial groups may vary in size depending on the physical setting and the nature of the subject matter to be discussed. Larger groups may be arranged for discussion of issues familiar to the students; while smaller groups may be more appropriate for intensive exploration of particular topics. Small buzz groups could be organized within large tutorial groups to enhance interaction.

4. Programme Design and Structure

4.1 Principles Guiding the Design of the Programme

4.1.1 The BBA(Hons) programme is a four-year full-time programme. The Programme has 4 majors: Financial Services, Health Services Management, Marketing, and Professional Accountancy. Students can choose a major in Year 2 and take the respective major courses in the Programme.

4.1.2 Each academic year comprises two semesters of fourteen weeks each. Students will normally enroll for ten credit-bearing courses each year before graduation. Each course typically consists of three credits. Students are expected to spend two times the number of contact hours in revision and self-study.

4.1.3 The structure of the programme aims at providing a solid foundation of generic knowledge including quantitative skills, languages and general education (GE) courses before progressing to major courses. Course allocation of the programme is as follows:

Discipline core courses (business core courses) 15 courses 45 credits Major courses (major core and major elective 13 courses 39 credits courses) Language courses 6 courses 18 credits General Education (GE) courses 6 courses 18 credits

4.1.4 The programme consists of 15 discipline core courses which are mandatory and are required by all Majors. These courses form the backbone of the programme and aim at equipping students with business insight. The core courses include:

 ACY1011 Financial Accounting  ACY1012 Managerial Accounting  ACY2301 Legal Environment of Business  BUS1203 Business Communication and Case Analysis  BUS2202 Business Statistics  BUS3203 Business Ethics  ECN1002 Microeconomics  ECN1003 Macroeconomics  FIN1002 Business Finance 9

 MGT1001 Introduction to Management  MGT2214 to Management of NPOs  MKT2001 Marketing Principles  MGT3111 Management Information Systems  MGT3131 Operations Management  MGT4111 Strategic Management

Programme Structure

PROFESSIONAL ACCOUNTANCY MAJOR

Nature of Notional Year (Yr) Studies Core or TWC Contact Exam Self-Study Learning QF Credits* Semester Course (Discipline/ Elective Credits Hours Hours Hours Hours (=NLH/10) (Sem) Major/ (NLH) GE/Lang) YEAR 1 GEN1001 Developing English Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 Language Skills CHI1002 Applied Chinese (14 weeks) Language or CHI1006 Basic Core Chinese 3 42 3 90 135 14 Chinese (for non-Chinese speaking students only) GEN1007 College Mathematics Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 ECN1002 Microeconomics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY1011 Financial Accounting Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 1 GEN2006 Enhancing Academic Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 2 English Skills GEN2005 Information Technology & Multimedia Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 Applications ECN1003 Macroeconomics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY1012 Managerial Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Accounting MGT1001 Introduction to Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Management Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 2 GEN2010 English for Business Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 Contexts BUS2202 Business Statistics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 FIN1002 Business Finance Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 MKT2001 Marketing Principles Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY3101 Corporate Financial Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Reporting I Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 2 GEN1304 The Development Sem 2 and Operation of Non-profit Core GE 3 42 0 84 126 13 Organizations HSS1003 Introduction to Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 Psychology ACY2301 Legal Environment Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 of Business BUS3203 Business Ethics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY3102 Corporate Financial Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Reporting II Sub-total 15 210 12 444 666 YEAR 3 GEN3003 Business Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 Communication in English MGT2214 Management of Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 NPOs ACY4101 Advanced Financial Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Reporting ACY3801 Accounting Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Information Systems 11

Nature of Notional Year (Yr) Studies Core or TWC Contact Exam Self-Study Learning QF Credits* Semester Course (Discipline/ Elective Credits Hours Hours Hours Hours (=NLH/10) (Sem) Major/ (NLH) GE/Lang) ACY3201 Accounting for Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Management Decisions Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 3 MGT3111 Management Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 2 Information Systems ACY3401 Taxation Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY4501 Auditing Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 BUS1203 Business Communication and Case Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Analysis HSS1001 Sociology Today Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 4 FIN4121 Corporate Finance Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 GE Elective Elective GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 MGT3131 Operations Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Management ACY4401 Advanced Taxation Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY4502 Advanced Auditing Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 4 MGT4111 Strategic Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 2 Management ACY4301 Company Law Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY4601 Financial Statement Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Analysis GEN3004 Report Writing Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY4102 Financial Reporting & Management for Non-profit Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Organizations Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 TOTAL 120 1,680 117 3,594 5,391 540

* QF credit value at each row has been rounded off in respect to the notional learning hours.

FINANCIAL SERVICES MAJOR

Nature of Notional Year (Yr) Studies Core or TWC Contact Exam Self-Study Learning QF Credits* Semester Course (Discipline/ Elective Credits Hours Hours Hours Hours (=NLH/10) (Sem) Major/ (NLH) GE/Lang) YEAR 1 GEN1001 Developing English Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 Language Skills CHI1002 Applied Chinese (14 weeks) Language or CHI1006 Basic Core Chinese 3 42 3 90 135 14 Chinese (for non-Chinese speaking students only) GEN1007 College Mathematics Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 ECN1002 Microeconomics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY1011 Financial Accounting Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 1 GEN2006 Enhancing Academic Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 2 English Skills GEN2005 Information Technology & Multimedia Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 Applications ECN1003 Macroeconomics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY1012 Managerial Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Accounting MGT1001 Introduction to Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Management Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 2 GEN2010 English for Business Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 Contexts BUS2202 Business Statistics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 FIN1002 Business Finance Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 MKT2001 Marketing Principles Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 ECN3221 Money and Banking Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 2 GEN1304 The Development Sem 2 and Operation of Non-profit Core GE 3 42 0 84 126 13 Organizations HSS1003 Introduction to Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 Psychology ACY2301 Legal Environment Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 of Business BUS3203 Business Ethics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 FIN3121 Financial Markets and Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Financial Products Sub-total 15 210 12 444 666 YEAR 3 GEN3003 Business Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 Communication in English MGT2214 Management of Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 NPOs ECN4231 Introduction to Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Econometrics FIN3122 Investment Analysis Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 and Portfolio Management FIN4134 Wealth Management Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 and Financial Planning Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675

Nature of Notional Year (Yr) Studies Core or TWC Contact Exam Self-Study Learning QF Credits* Semester Course (Discipline/ Elective Credits Hours Hours Hours Hours (=NLH/10) (Sem) Major/ (NLH) GE/Lang) YEAR 3 HSS1001 Sociology Today Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 2 MGT3111 Management Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Information Systems FIN4137 Risk Management and Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Insurance FIN4133 Fixed Income Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Securities Analysis BUS1203 Business Communication and Case Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Analysis Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 4 Financial Major Elective 1 Elective Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 FIN4136 Taxation and Tax Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Planning MGT3131 Operations Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Management FIN4121 Corporate Finance Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 GE Elective Elective GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 4 MGT4111 Strategic Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 2 Management ACY4601 Financial Statement Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Analysis ACY4102 Financial Reporting & Management for Non-profit Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Organizations GEN3004 Report Writing Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Financial Services Major Elective Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Elective 2 Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 TOTAL 120 1,680 117 3,594 5,391 540

* QF credit value at each row has been rounded off in respect to the notional learning hours.

MARKETING MAJOR

Nature of Notional Year (Yr) Studies Core or TWC Contact Exam Self-Study Learning QF Credits* Semester Course (Discipline Elective Credits Hours Hours Hours Hours (=NLH/10) (Sem) /Major/ (NLH) GE/Lang) YEAR 1 GEN1001 Developing English Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 Language Skills CHI1002 Applied Chinese (14 weeks) Language or CHI1006 Basic Core Chinese 3 42 3 90 135 14 Chinese (for non-Chinese speaking students only) GEN1007 College Mathematics Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 ECN1002 Microeconomics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY1011 Financial Accounting Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 1 GEN2006 Enhancing Academic Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 2 English Skills GEN2005 Information Technology & Multimedia Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 Applications ECN1003 Macroeconomics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY1012 Managerial Accounting Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 MGT1001 Introduction to Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Management Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 2 GEN2010 English for Business Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 Contexts BUS2202 Business Statistics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 FIN1002 Business Finance Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 MKT2001 Marketing Principles Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 MKT3221 Consumer Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Behaviour Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 2 GEN1304 The Development and Sem 2 Operation of Non-profit Core GE 3 42 0 84 126 13 Organizations HSS1003 Introduction to Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 Psychology ACY2301 Legal Environment of Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Business BUS3203 Business Ethics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 MKT3223 Integrated Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Marketing Communication Sub-total 15 210 12 444 666 YEAR 3 GEN3003 Business Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 Communication in English MGT2214 Management of NPOs Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 MKT3222 Marketing Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Research MKT4223 Sales and Retail Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Management MKT4232 Advertising and Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Event Management Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675

Nature of Notional Year (Yr) Studies Core or TWC Contact Exam Self-Study Learning QF Credits* Semester Course (Discipline Elective Credits Hours Hours Hours Hours (=NLH/10) (Sem) /Major/ (NLH) GE/Lang) YEAR 3 MGT3111 Management Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 2 Information Systems HSS1001 Sociology Today Elective GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 BUS1203 Business Communication and Case Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Analysis MKT3231 Management and Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Marketing of Services MGT3005 e-Business and e- Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Marketing Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 4 MKT4231 Brand Management Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 GE Elective Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 MGT3131 Operations Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Management MKT4206 Marketing and Fund-raising for Non-profit Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Organizations MGT4131 China Business Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 4 MGT4111 Strategic Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 2 Management MKT4221 International Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Marketing Marketing Major Elective 1 Elective Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 GEN3004 Report Writing Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Marketing Major Elective 2 Elective Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 TOTAL 120 1,680 117 3,594 5,391 540

* QF credit value at each row has been rounded off in respect to the notional learning hours.

HEALTH SERVICES MANAGEMENT MAJOR

Nature of Notional Year (Yr) Studies Core or TWC Contact Exam Self-Study Learning QF Credits* Semester Course (Discipline/ Elective Credits Hours Hours Hours Hours (=NLH/10) (Sem) Major/ (NLH) GE/Lang) YEAR 1 GEN1001 Developing English Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 Language Skills CHI1002 Applied Chinese (14 weeks) Language or CHI1006 Basic Core Chinese 3 42 3 90 135 14 Chinese (for non-Chinese speaking students only) GEN1007 College Mathematics Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 ECN1002 Microeconomics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY1011 Financial Accounting Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 1 GEN2006 Enhancing Academic Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 2 English Skills GEN2005 Information Technology & Multimedia Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 Applications ECN1003 Macroeconomics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 ACY1012 Managerial Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Accounting MGT1001 Introduction to Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Management Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 2 GEN2010 English for Business Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 Contexts BUS2202 Business Statistics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 FIN1002 Business Finance Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 MKT2001 Marketing Principles Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 HSM2002 Introduction to Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Health Services Management Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 2 GEN1304 The Development Sem 2 and Operation of Non-profit Core GE 3 42 0 84 126 13 Organizations HSS1003 Introduction to Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 Psychology ACY2301 Legal Environment Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 of Business BUS3203 Business Ethics Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 HSM2004 Introduction to Healthcare Economics & Health Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Financing Sub-total 15 210 12 444 666 YEAR 3 GEN3003 Business Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 1 Communication in English MGT2214 Management of Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 NPOs HSM2003 Health Policies and Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Healthcare Systems NUR3002 Ethical and Legal Core Major 3 45 0 90 135 14 Aspects of Healthcare

Nature of Notional Year (Yr) Studies Core or TWC Contact Exam Self-Study Learning QF Credits* Semester Course (Discipline/ Elective Credits Hours Hours Hours Hours (=NLH/10) (Sem) Major/ (NLH) GE/Lang) HSM3003 Healthcare Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Information Systems Sub-total 15 213 12 450 675 YEAR 3 MGT3111 Management Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 2 Information Systems HSS1001 Sociology Today Core GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 HSM3004 Human Resources Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Management in Healthcare HSM4002 Healthcare Financial Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Management BUS1203 Business Communication and Case Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Analysis Sub-total 15 210 15 450 675 YEAR 4 NUR1022 Public Health Core Major 3 45 0 90 135 14 Sem 1 GE Elective Elective GE 3 42 3 90 135 14 MGT3131 Operations Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Management HSM4001 Healthcare Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Operations Management HSM4003 Quality Assurance and Risk Management in Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Healthcare Sub-total 15 213 12 450 675 YEAR 4 MGT4111 Strategic Core Discipline 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sem 2 Management NUR3004 Health Management and Social Care of Older People Core Major 3 45 0 90 135 14 and Their Families MED3012 Epidemiology Core Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 GEN3004 Report Writing Core English 3 42 3 90 135 14 HSM Major Elective Elective Major 3 42 3 90 135 14 Sub-total 15 213 12 450 675 TOTAL 120 1,689 108 3,594 5,391 540

* QF credit value at each row has been rounded off in respect to the notional learning hours.

5. Admission Requirements

5.1 Minimum Entrance Requirements

Admission to Year 1 of TWC Degree Programme

5.1.1 TWC has the following general admission requirements. For Year 1 entry, the applicant should meet one of the following requirements:

(i) Have obtained Level 3 for Chinese Language* and English Language and Level 2 for Mathematics and Liberal Studies plus one Elective/Applied Learning Subject at Level 2 (“3322+2”) in HKDSE; OR (ii) Have passes in AS Use of English and AS Chinese Language & Culture plus one AL subject/two AS subjects in HKALE and five passes in HKCEE including Chinese Language and English Language; OR (iii) Have passes in AS Use of English and AS Chinese Language & Culture plus one AL subject/two AS subjects in HKALE and Level 2 for Chinese Language and English Language plus passes in three other subjects in HKCEE; OR (iv) Have obtained a minimum score of 28 in International Baccalaureate Diploma and fulfilled the English requirement as stated underneath: a. Grade 4 or better in the Higher Level English Language (B Syllabus); or b. Grade 5 or better in the Standard Level English Language (B Syllabus); or c. Grade 4 or better in the Higher or Standard Level English Language (A1 or A2 Syllabus); or d. Grade 4 or better in the Standard Level English - Text and Performance; or e. Grade 4 or better in the Standard Level English - Literature and Performance (A1 syllabus); OR (v) Equivalent qualifications; OR (vi) Mature students at 25 years old or above with a minimum of 3 years relevant working experience.

Remarks: *An “Attained” and an “Attained with Distinction” in HKDSE Applied Learning Chinese are accepted to in place of the HKDSE Chinese Language for the admission of the Programme for non-Chinese speaking applicants.

5.1.2 In addition to meeting the general entrance requirements of TWC, preference will be given to students who have better performance in mathematics subject for admission to BBA(Hons) programme.

Admission to Year 3 of the BBA(Hons) programme

5.1.3 The admission requirements to Year 3 of the BBA(Hons) programme are as follows: (i) Have completed an Associate Degree Programme (AD) or Higher Diploma Programme (HD) of the relevant subject / discipline; OR (ii) Equivalent qualifications.

5.1.4 Students admitted to Year 3 of the programme may be required to satisfactorily complete some bridging courses. The bridging courses can be Discipline courses or General Education courses offered in the first two years of the curriculum. In the case of the bridging courses being pre-requisites of some Year 3 courses, students will be required to complete the pre-requisites courses before they are allowed to take those courses. In this case, students may not be able to complete the programme in two years.

5.2 Admission Policy

Non-Standard Entry Route to Year 1

5.2.3 Students who cannot meet the above admission requirements might be admitted on academic probation as non-standard entrants if the following criteria are met:

(i) Have obtained one Level 3 and one Level 2 for the two Core language subjects (i.e. Chinese Language and English Language) and Level 2 for Mathematics, Liberal Studies and an Elective/Applied Learning Subject (“3222+2” or “2322+2”) in HKDSE; OR (ii) Have obtained Level 3 for Chinese Language and English Language and two Level 2 and one Level 1 for Mathematics, Liberal Studies and an Elective/Applied Learning Subject (“3321+2” or “3312+2” or “3322+1”) in HKDSE; OR (iii) Have a pass in AS Use of English or AS Chinese Language & Culture plus one AL subject/two AS subjects in HKALE and five passes in HKCEE including Chinese Language and English Language; OR (iv) Have a pass in AS Use of English or AS Chinese Language & Culture plus one AL subject/two AS subjects in HKALE and Level 2 for Chinese Language and English Language plus passes in three other subjects in HKCEE.

Academic Probation Upon Admission

5.2.4 A maximum of 5% of the students can be admitted through non-standard entry. Those admitted through the non-standard entry route will be on academic probation and be allowed to register as regular students on the conditions that they have:

(i) attained a cumulative GPA of 2.0 or above at the end of the first academic year; AND/OR

(ii) satisfactorily completed intensive remedial courses for the HKDSE Core Subject in which the admitted students did not obtain a Level 2 result at the time of admission; AND/OR

(iii) satisfactorily fulfilled any conditions set by the programme when admitted.

The College reserves the right to de-register the studies if the students fail to achieve any of the above which are set as their admission conditions.

5.2.5 To provide academic assistance to students who need to make improvement on their academic performance before it is too late, all TWC students will be provided with Student Academic Advisor who will review with students on their study approaches and offer ways to improve students’ study techniques.

Exemption and Advanced Standing

5.2.6 A student may enter the Programme with advanced standing and be exempted from taking certain course(s) if his/her previous qualifications are recognized by the College as of direct relevance, at the appropriate level, and of the appropriate breadth and depth.

5.2.7 Credits earned from previous studies should remain valid at the time when the student applies for course exemption/ credit transfer. Students are required to replace the exempted courses with other courses to make up for the units being exempted. The validity period of course credits earned is 8 years from the year of attainment.

Under normal circumstances, a student will not be granted a credit transfer for more than 50% of the total credit units of the Programme. For credit transfer from programmes offered by TWC, a maximum of not more than 65% of the credit requirement for award can be transferred. Course exemption/ credit transfer are recorded without inclusion in grade point average calculations.

6. Assessment and Progression Regulations

6.1 Assessment Policy

6.1.1 The design of assessment is an integral part of curriculum development. By an outcome-based framework, an integrative approach is adopted to ensure that assessment methods are aligned with intended learning outcomes, learning and teaching content and activities, and assessment.

6.1.2 The prime purpose of assessment in TWC academic programme is to enable students to demonstrate that they have met the aims of the programme, have achieved the learning outcome of the programme, have fulfilled the requirements of each course, have achieved the standard appropriate to the award and have attained the competencies prescribed by the Generic Level Descriptors at specific levels of the Qualifications Framework (QF).

6.1.3 The objectives of assessment used by TWC are twofold:

(a) Assessment for Learning: As an integral part of the learning and teaching process, assessment for learning informs learning and teaching. It is designed to diagnose students’ strengths and weaknesses so that they can work to improve their performance, and it assists teachers in their future lesson planning. Through assessment for learning, students will be provided with regular and timely feedback on their learning progress, and on areas to be improved, so that they know what it is that they have to improve and are provided guidance on how to set about doing this. Assessment for learning will be undertaken on a continuous basis in TWC in the form, such as coursework, reflective journals, laboratory work, field work and investigative projects.

(b) Assessment of Learning: Assessment of learning serves the main purpose for the determination of grades and awards. It enables students to demonstrate that they have met the intended learning outcomes of each course, fulfilled requirements of the programmes and achieved the standard appropriate to the awards. Assessment of learning is conducted at important intervals, e.g. at the end of a course and at the end of a programme. Assessment of this sort generally takes the form of an examination or the submission of a final project.

6.2 Forms and Types of Assessment

Forms of Assessment

6.2.1 Assessment can include any one or any combination, of the following forms, according to the nature of the course. They include strategies such as attendance and participation in class written work, research reports, tests, examinations, reflective journals, case studies, presentations portfolios, evaluation reports, and any other form appropriate to a specific course.

6.2.2 As TWC puts a strong emphasis on outcome-based learning and teaching and experiential learning, assessments will be designed in such a way that students are asked to reflect, review and integrate their learning to demonstrate their level of competences and how they learn through the process. Such assessment strategies can test and enhance the integrative abilities of the students which are both essential as assessment for learning and assessment of learning.

Types of Assessment

6.2.3 Assessment can be conducted by one, or a combination, of the following three types of assessment, as and when appropriate:

(i) Assessment Conducted by College academic staff – this type of assessment can be in the form of observation, tests, examinations, and through setting written assignments, oral presentations, projects and evaluation reports in the clinical practicums, etc.

(ii) Student’s Self Evaluation – through engaging in self-evaluation, students can learn how to review their performance, diagnose strengths and weaknesses, and how to build on the former and address the latter. This type of assessment can be incorporated into presentation and critique sessions, and can be used in tutorials, laboratories and clinical sessions as well as in reflective journals.

(iii) Peer Evaluation – is also an important tool for developing an understanding of the use of appropriate criteria when evaluating performance, and for helping others to improve. This type of assessment can be incorporated into group assignments, presentation and critique sessions and can be adopted in laboratory and studio sessions.

6.3 Assessment Components

The following table shows the assessment components of the courses of the Programme.

Assessment Components of the BBA Programme Continuous Assessment Written Assignment/ Written Final Project/ Course Code Course Title Case Study/ Test/ Debate Others Exam Presentation Reflective Quiz (%) (%) (%) (%) Report (%) (%) DISCIPLINE CORE COURSES GEN3203 Business Ethics 50 10 40 GEN2202 Business Statistics 10 20 10 60 GEN1203 Business Communication and Case 10 30 10 50 Analysis ACY1101 Introduction to Financial 20 30 50 Accounting ACY1201 Introduction to Managerial 30 20 50 Accounting ECN1212 Introduction to Macroeconomics 10 20 10 60 ECN1211 Introduction to Microeconomics 20 30 20 30 FIN1001 Introduction to Finance 20 30 15 5 30 MGT1001 Introduction to Management 25 15 10 50 MKT2211 Introduction to Marketing 30 10 10 50 MGT2212 Introduction to Management of 40 10 50 NPOs ACY2301 Legal Environment of Business 20 10 10 10 50 MGT3111 Management Information Systems 20 30 50 MGT3131 Operations Management 20 20 60 MGT4111 Strategic Management 50 10 40 MAJOR CORE COURSES Professional Accountancy Major ACY3101 Corporate Financial Reporting I 25 25 50 ACY3102 Corporate Financial Reporting II 25 25 50 ACY3201 Accounting for Management 10 10 20 10 50 Decisions ACY3801 Accounting Information Systems 30 20 10 40 ACY4501 Auditing 10 15 15 10 50 ACY3401 Taxation 10 10 30 10 50 ACY4101 Advanced Financial Reporting 15 30 5 50 ACY4502 Advanced Auditing 10 15 15 10 50 ACY4401 Advanced Taxation 15 5 20 10 50 ACY4301 Company Law 20 20 10 50 FIN4121 Corporate Finance 10 30 20 10 30 ACY4601 Financial Statement Analysis 5 20 20 5 50 Financial Services Major FIN4121 Corporate Finance 10 30 20 10 30 FIN3121 Financial Markets and Financial 20 30 15 5 30 Products FIN4139 Financial Management of Non- 10 30 20 10 30 profit Organizations 24

Continuous Assessment Written Assignment/ Written Final Project/ Course Code Course Title Case Study/ Test/ Debate Others Exam Presentation Reflective Quiz (%) (%) (%) (%) Report (%) (%) ACY4601 Financial Statement Analysis 5 20 20 5 50 FIN4133 Fixed Income Securities Analysis 30 20 10 40 ECN4231 Introduction to Econometrics 10 20 20 10 40 FIN3122 Investment Analysis and Portfolio 15 25 20 10 30 Management ECN3221 Money and Banking 10 20 20 10 40 FIN4137 Risk Management and Insurance 30 30 10 30 FIN4136 Taxation and Tax Planning 10 20 20 10 40 FIN4134 Wealth Management and Financial 20 30 10 10 30 Planning Marketing Major MKT4232 Advertising and Event 30 20 10 40 Management MKT4231 Brand Management 30 20 50 MGT4131 China Business 10 30 10 10 40 MKT3221 Consumer Behaviour 20 20 10 50 MGT3005 e-Business and e-Marketing 20 40 10 30 MKT3223 Integrated Marketing 25 25 20 30 Communication MKT4221 International Marketing 40 20 40 MKT3231 Management and Marketing of 40 10 10 40 Services MKT3222 Marketing Research 35 15 10 40 MKT4223 Sales and Retail Management 10 15 20 15 40 MKT4222 Strategic Marketing 40 20 40 Health Services Management (HSM) Major) NUR3002 Ethical and Legal Aspects in 10 30 60 Healthcare NUR3004 Health Management and Social 30 40 30 Care of Older People and Their Families HSM2003 Health Policies and Healthcare 10 30 20 40 Systems HSM3003 Healthcare Information Systems 30 20 50 HSM4001 Healthcare Operations 30 20 50 Management HSM4002 Healthcare Financial Management 10 30 20 40 HSM3004 Human Resources Management in 30 20 50 Healthcare HSM2004 Introduction to Healthcare 10 30 20 40 Economics & Health Financing HSM2002 Introduction to Health Services 10 30 20 40 Management NUR1022 Public Health 50 50 MED3012 Epidemiology 20 40 40 25

Continuous Assessment Written Assignment/ Written Final Project/ Course Code Course Title Case Study/ Test/ Debate Others Exam Presentation Reflective Quiz (%) (%) (%) (%) Report (%) (%) HSM4003 Quality Assurance and Risk 30 20 50 Management in Healthcare MAJOR ELECTIVE COURSES Professional Accountancy Major ACY3802 Accounting and Regulatory 20 20 10 50 Framework in Mainland China ACY4703 Accounting for Non-profit 20 20 10 50 Organizations and Corporate Social Reporting ECN4233 Hong Kong and China Economies 10 20 20 10 40 ECN3221 Money and Banking 10 20 20 10 40 Financial Services Major ACY3101 Corporate Financial Reporting I 25 25 50 FIN4138 Hong Kong and China Financial 20 40 10 10 20 Markets FIN4132 Derivative Analysis 20 30 10 40 FIN4135 Employee Compensation and 20 20 10 50 Estate Management ECN2001 International Business 20 40 10 30 Marketing Major MKT4201 Innovation Management and New 20 40 40 Product Development ECN2001 International Business 20 40 10 30 MKT4202 Introduction to Public Relations 20 40 40 MKT4203 Retail Merchandising and Retail 20 40 40 Operations Management MKT4204 Strategic Retail Management 20 40 40 MKT4205 Strategic Sales Management 20 40 40 Health Services Management (HSM) Major) MKT3221 Consumer Behaviour 20 20 10 50 MKT3222 Marketing Research 35 15 10 40 REQUIRED LANGUAGE COURSES GEN1002 or Applied Chinese Language or 20 20 10 50 GEN1006 Basic Chinese (for non-Chinese speaking students only) GEN1001 Developing English Language 30, 40 30 Skills (Speaking Assignment) GEN2006 Enhancing Academic English 50 50 Skills GEN2010 English for Business Contexts 40 10 10 40 GEN3003 Business Communication in 40 30 30 English

Continuous Assessment Written Assignment/ Written Final Project/ Course Code Course Title Case Study/ Test/ Debate Others Exam Presentation Reflective Quiz (%) (%) (%) (%) Report (%) (%) GEN3004 Report Writing 20 30 10 40 (Reflecti ons) REQUIRED GENERAL EDUCATION (GE) COURSES GEN1007 College Mathematics 30 20 50 GEN2005 Information Technology and 30 40 30 Multimedia Applications (Science & Technology Area) HSS1003 Introduction to Psychology (Social 20 10 30 40 and Human Development Area) HSS1001 Sociology Today (Social and 10 30 20 40 Human Development Area) GEN1305 China and the World (Arts, Culture 40 20 40 and Society Area) GENXXXX Elective (Elect any one from the remaining GE course list)

6.4 Grading Scheme

6.4.1 “F” is a course failure grade, whilst all others (“D” to “A+”) are course passing grades. No credit will be earned if a course is failed.

6.4.2 Letter grades are used in the results slips and transcripts to indicate the results of assessment. A numeral grade point is assigned to each course grade as follows:

Grade Grade Point A 4.0 A- 3.7 B+ 3.3 B 3.0 B- 2.7 C+ 2.3 C 2.0

C- 1.7 D+ 1.3 D 1.0 F 0.0

6.4.3 The award for passing of a course is based on outcome-based assessment criteria. Students who achieve the intended learning outcomes by the specific learning criteria of the course will be granted the relevant grade/ grade point.

6.4.4 The maximum grade point average (GPA) is capped at 4.0.

6.5 Academic Probation on Progression

6.5.1 Students who meet the minimum entry requirements but fail to attain Semester Grade Point Average (sGPA) of 2.0 or above in a semester shall be put on academic probation on progression in the subsequent semester.

6.5.2 The purpose is to remind and help students who need additional assistance to make improvement in order to fulfil the GPA requirement for graduation. These students will be required to seek academic consultation from the Student Academic Advisors (SAAs).

6.5.3 A student on academic probation may be required to take a reduced load, with his/her performance being reviewed at the end of the semester of the probation. If the student has attained a GPA of 2.0 or above in the semester of the probation, the academic probation shall be lifted; otherwise, academic probation shall continue to apply in the next semester unless he/she is required to de-register from his/her studies or has completed all graduation requirements.

6.5.4 Students who fail to attain sGPA of 2.0 or above for two consecutive semesters will be de-registered from their studies of the academic programme.

Academic Consultation

6.5.5 TWC will alert students who need academic assistance at an early stage. Students who fail to obtain a cumulative GPA (cGPA) of 2.0 (this covers the group of students on academic probation on progression) will be required to seek academic consultation. These 28

consultations are provided by SAAs who will review with students their current study approaches and plans and offer ways to improve students’ study techniques.

De-registration of Studies on Academic Grounds

6.5.6 A student shall be required to de-register from his/her studies on academic grounds at the College: (i) If he/she fails to meet the condition(s) stipulated in the offer letter issued at the time he/she applied for admission to the College; OR (ii) If he/she is put on academic probation for two consecutive semesters; OR (iii) If he/she fails to complete the graduation requirements within the maximum duration of candidature.

7. Graduation Requirements

7.1 To be considered for the award of Bachelor of Business Administration (Honours) a student shall: (i) Have completed the minimum required credit units as prescribed for the programme with a graduation GPA (gGPA) of at least 2.0; (ii) Have achieved grade point of 1.0 or above in all courses in the programme; (iii) Have completed the Work-integrated Programme and Community Service programme as required by the programme; and (iv) Have attained a valid score of 6.0 in IELTS or equivalent. (Student would be considered as having fulfilled the requirement if they have obtained a valid score in IELTS or equivalent at the commencement of the programme.)

7.2 Classification of Awards

7.2.1 A student who satisfies the conditions for graduation shall be awarded a Bachelor degree with one of the following classifications:

Graduation Grade Point Average Classification (gGPA) First Class Honours # 3.5 or above Second Class Honours Upper Division 3.0 or above, below 3.5 Second Class Honours Lower Division 2.7 or above, below 3.0 Third Class Honours 2.3 or above, below 2.7 Pass 2.0 or above, below 2.3

# For students admitted in or after 2014/15, a valid score of 6.5 or above in IELTS will be required for consideration of the First Class Honours.

Appendix

Course Outlines

Course Outlines for Bachelor of Business Administration (Honours)

1 ACY1011 Financial Accounting 2 ACY1012 Managerial Accounting 3 ACY2301 Legal Environment of Business 4 ACY3101 Corporate Financial Reporting I 5 ACY3102 Corporate Financial Reporting II 6 ACY3201 Accounting for Management Decisions 7 ACY3401 Taxation 8 ACY3801 Accounting Information Systems 9 ACY4101 Advanced Financial Reporting 10 ACY4102 Financial Reporting and Management for Non-profit Organizations 11 ACY4301 Company Law 12 ACY4401 Advanced Taxation 13 ACY4501 Auditing 14 ACY4502 Advanced Auditing 15 ACY4601 Financial Statement Analysis 16 BUS1203 Business Communication and Case Analysis 17 BUS2202 Business Statistics 18 BUS3203 Business Ethics 19 ECN1002 Microeconomics 20 ECN1003 Macroeconomics 21 ECN2001 International Business 22 ECN3221 Money and Banking 23 ECN4231 Introduction to Econometrics 24 FIN1002 Business Finance 25 FIN3121 Financial Markets and Financial Products 26 FIN3122 Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management 27 FIN4121 Corporate Finance 28 FIN4132 Derivatives Analysis 29 FIN4133 Fixed Income Securities Analysis 30 FIN4134 Wealth Management and Financial Planning 31 FIN4136 Taxation and Tax Planning 32 FIN4137 Risk Management and Insurance 33 FIN4138 Hong Kong and China Financial Markets 34 GEN1001 Developing English Language Skills 35 GEN1002 Applied Chinese Language 36 GEN1006 Basic Chinese 37 GEN1007 College Mathematics 38 GEN1304 The Development and Operation of Non-profit Organizations 39 GEN2005 Information Technologies and Multimedia Applications 40 GEN2006 Enhancing Academic English Skills 41 GEN2010 English for Business Contexts

42 GEN3003 Business Communication in English 43 GEN3004 Report Writing 44 HSM2002 Introduction to Health Services Management 45 HSM2003 Health Policies and Healthcare Systems 46 HSM2004 Introduction to Healthcare Economics & Health Financing 47 HSM3003 Healthcare Information Systems 48 HSM3004 Human Resources Management in Healthcare 49 HSM4001 Healthcare Operations Management 50 HSM4002 Healthcare Financial Management 51 HSM4003 Quality Assurance and Risk Management in Healthcare 52 HSS1001 Sociology Today 53 HSS1003 Introduction to Psychology 54 MED3012 Epidemiology 55 MGT1001 Introduction to Management 56 MGT2214 Management of Non-profit Organizations 57 MGT3005 e-Business and e-Marketing 58 MGT3111 Management Information Systems 59 MGT3131 Operations Management 60 MGT4111 Strategic Management 61 MGT4131 China Business 62 MKT2001 Marketing Principles 63 MKT3221 Consumer Behavior 64 MKT3222 Marketing Research 65 MKT3223 Integrated Marketing Communication 66 MKT3231 Management and Marketing of Services 67 MKT4201 Innovation Management and New Product Development 68 MKT4202 Introduction to Public Relations 69 MKT4203 Retail Merchandising and Retail Operations Management 70 MKT4204 Strategic Retail Management 71 MKT4205 Strategic Sales Management 72 MKT4206 Marketing and Fund-raising for Non-Profit Organizations 73 MKT4221 International Marketing 74 MKT4222 Strategic Marketing 75 MKT4223 Sales and Retail Management 76 MKT4231 Brand Management 77 MKT4232 Advertising and Event Management 78 NUR1002 Public Health 79 NUR3002 Ethical and Legal Aspects of Healthcare 80 NUR3004 Health Management and Social Care of Older People and Their Families

1 Course Description Form

Course Code ACY1011 Course Title Financial Accounting Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives This course aims to provide students with a basic understanding of financial accounting principles, processes and the underlying theories. To develop students’ ability to prepare financial information, basic concepts and methods for measuring profits and the values of assets, liabilities and owners’ equity using Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) will be introduced.

Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Describe the function and building blocks of financial accounting. Learning (b) Discuss ethical considerations involved in accounting and business. Outcomes (c) Describe the Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) and (CILOs) explain the accounting principles and concepts. (d) Describe accrual accounting, the recording process and the adjusting process. (e) Work through the accounting cycle and prepare the statement of comprehensive income, the statement of changes in equity and the statement of financial position. (f) Comprehend the nature of and basic accounting methods for cash, receivable and short-term investment; merchandise inventory, cost of goods sold and gross profit; plant assets, intangible assets and related expense; current and long-term liabilities; and stockholders’ equity. (g) Explain the use of different financial statements.

CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)   (e)   (f)   (g)  

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)   (b)  (c)    (d)  

(e)     (f)    (g)  

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b) (c)  (d)  (e)  (f)   (g)

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d) (e) (f)    (g)  

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b) (c)  (d)  (e)  (f)   (g)

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ Accounting is the language of business. This course is designed to familiarize Indicative students how accounting information functions and used in business Syllabus organisations and in the economy as a whole. Specifically, the course is designed to equip students with the knowledge and skill set to prepare a simple set of financial statements, learn how profits and asset values are measured, and most importantly how to use the information for investment, credit and some management decisions.

Indicative Syllabus 1. An introduction of the functions and building blocks of financial accounting. 1.1. The demand for accounting information

1.2. The accounting principles and concepts 1.3. The accounting equation 1.4. Major financial statements and their relationships with operating, investing and financing activities 1.5. Ethical consideration in accounting and business 1.6. Standard of professional conduct of accountants 2. Accounting information, accrual accounting and the financial statements. 2.1. The business cycle 2.2. Accrual-basis accounting versus cash-basis accounting 2.3. The adjustment process 2.4. The trial balance 2.5. Preparing the financial statements from the adjusted trial balance 2.6. Financial statements basics for entrepreneurs 3. Internal control and managing cash. 3.1. Using the bank account as a control device 3.2. Internal control over cash receipts and cash payments 3.3. Using a budget to manage cash 3.4. Bank reconciliation 4. Receivables and short-term investments. 4.1. Short-term investments 4.2. Accounts and notes receivables 4.3. Accounting for uncollectible accounts 4.4. Reporting receivables and short-term investments transactions 5. Merchandise inventory, cost of goods sold and gross profit. 5.1. Accounting for inventory 5.2. Inventory costing methods 5.3. Internal control over inventory 5.4. Reporting inventory transactions 6. Plant assets, intangible assets and related expenses. 6.1. Types of assets 6.2. Measuring the cost of a plant asset 6.3. Capital expenditures versus revenue expenditures 6.4. Measuring depreciation of plant assets 6.5. Accounting for intangible assets and amortization 6.6. Reporting plant asset transactions 7. Current and long-term liabilities. 7.1. Current liabilities of known amount 7.2. Current liabilities that must be estimated 7.3. Contingent liabilities 7.4. Long-term debt 7.5. Accounting for bonds payable 7.6. Other long-term liabilities 7.7. Reporting liabilities 8. Stockholders’ equity. 8.1. Classes of stock 8.2. Issuing stock 8.3. Reporting stockholders’ equity transactions 9. Statement of Cash Flows 9.1 Formatting statement of cash flows 9.2 Preparing statement of cash flows

9.2.1 Indirect method for cash flows from operating activities 9.2.2 Cash flows from investing activities 9.2.3 Cash flows from financing activities 10 Financial Statement Analysis 10.1 Comparative financial statement analysis 10.2 Use of ratios to assess risk and profitability

Learning & Participation in classroom activities, quizzes and assignments Teaching Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during Methodology the lectures and tutorials, ask questions when they arise, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, work on in-class exercises during the tutorials and submit assignment when it is required. Assessment Methods in Specific % Course intended learning outcomes Alignment assessment weighting to be assessed with Course methods/tasks Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) Learning 1. Participation and 10%        Outcomes quizzes 2. Assignments 15%        3. Test 25%    4. Final 50%       Examination Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Class participation Students will be required to participate in class/group discussions for a chosen topic in each both lectures and tutorials. This will help students become aware of their learning progress, develop their critical thinking, analytical, and communication skills.

Quizzes To monitor progress of student learning, short quizzes from time to time will be used.

Assignments Students will be assigned short problems related to topics covered in class. These short problems can be used to assess students’ learning progress. In particular, their ability in applying concepts and theories to solve financial accounting issues can be assessed through working on short problems.

Mid-term test Students will be required to write a test in the midst of a semester. This test serves the two purposes of assessment: assessment of learning and assessment for learning. Students will become aware of their learning progress, their strengths and weaknesses in different topics of the course.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Spiceland, J.D., Thomas, W. and Herrmann, D. (2016) Financial References Accounting, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill.

Reference 1. www.hkicpa.org (Members’ Handbook Volume II: Financial Reporting Standards) 2. Weygandt, J. J., Kieso, D. E., & Kimmel, P. D. (2014). Financial accounting, 9th Edition, Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.

Updated on 29 August 2018 Included in BBA and BBA(EM) programmes.

Course Description Form Course Code ACY1012 Course Title Managerial Accounting Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite ACY1011 Financial Accounting Objectives 1. Expound the basic ideas, concepts, techniques and tools of management accounting. 2. Equip students with basic knowledge to generate management accounting information for internal reporting and management decision making purposes. 3. Train students to prepare management accounting information for profit planning and cost management purposes. 4. Explain codes of ethical conduct for management accountants.

Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Understand and apply relevant concepts and techniques to produce cost Learning information for management decisions in organisational planning and Outcomes control. (CILOs) (b) Identify and analyseanalyse means to create value in goods and services using appropriate costing methods and management accounting techniques. (c) Apply alternative solutions for management problems using cost and management accounting tools. (d) Evaluate and make judgment for ethical issues from a management accounting perspective.

CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)   (d) 

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)    (c)   (d)   

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)   (b)  (c)   (d) 

I s

C O MK-ILOs

1 2 3 4 5 6

(a)  (b)  (c)  (d) 

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course provides students with the concepts and techniques of cost and Indicative managerial accounting, with emphasis on product costing systems and on the Syllabus uses of management accounting information by managers in planning, controlling, and decisions making. Major topics include cost concepts, budgeting, product costing systems, relevant information for business decisions, performance measurement, and an overview of contemporary issues in management accounting.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Managerial accounting and business environment 1.1. Planning and control systems 1.2. Strategic decisions and management accountant 1.3. Key management accounting guidelines professional ethics 2. Basic concepts and techniques of cost management systems 2.1. Cost terminology 2.2. Direct cost and indirect cost 2.3. Variable cost and fixed cost 2.4. Inventory costs and period costs 3. Job costing 3.1. Actual costing and normal costing systems 3.2. The use of normal job-costing system in manufacturing companies 3.3. Budgeted indirect costs and end-of-period adjustment 4. Process costing 4.1. Comparison of job costing and process costing 4.2. Basic assumptions in process costing 4.3. Process costing: weighted average method vs. FIFO method 5. Activity-based costing (ABC)and activity-based management (ABM) 5.1. Broad averaging of a simple costing and its consequences 5.2. Refining a costing system: ABC 5.3. Implementing ABC 5.4. ABC in service and merchandising companies 6. Cost behavior and cost estimation 6.1. General issues in estimating cost functions 6.2. Cost estimation methods 6.3. Cost drivers and activity-based costing 7. Cost-volume-profit analysis 7.1. Cost-volume-profit assumptions and terminology 7.2. Breakeven point and target income 7.3. Using CVP analysis for decision making 8. Budgeting, activity-based budgeting, and standard costing 8.1. Budgets and budgeting cycle

8.2. Advantages of budgets 8.3. Developing an operation budget 8.4. Kaizen budgeting and activity-based budget 8.5. Budgeting and responsibility accounting 8.6. Introduction to budgeting for not-for-profit organisations 8.7. Budgeting for entrepreneurs 9. Variable costing and absorption costing 9.1. Inventory costing for manufacturing companies 9.2. Variable costing and absorption costing 9.3. Alternative inventory- costing methods 9.4. Capacity level 10. Responsibility accounting, performance evaluation, quality and just-in- time (JIT) 10.1. Segment reporting and profitability analysis 10.2. Quality and cost of quality 10.3. Evaluating quality performance 10.4. JIT inventory management and JIT production 11. Relevant cost for business decisions 11.1. Information and decision process 11.2. The concept of relevance 11.3. One-time only special order decisions 11.4. Make-versus-buy decisions 11.5. Product-mix decisions 11.6. Customer-profitability, activity-based costing, and relevant costs 11.7. Irrelevance of past costs and equipment-replacement decisions

Learning & Participation in classroom activities, quizzes and assignments Teaching Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during Methodology the lectures and tutorials, ask questions when they arise, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, work on in-class exercises during the tutorials and submit Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course Intended Learning (a) (b) (c) (d) Outcomes 1. Participation quizzes 10%     2. Assignments 15%     3. Test 25%    4. Final Examination 50%     Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Class participation Students will be required to participate in class/group discussions for a chosen topic in each class, to stay focused during the lectures and tutorials and ask questions when they arise. This will help students become aware of their learning progress, develop their critical thinking, analytical, and communication skills.

Quizzes To monitor progress of student learning, short quizzes from time to time will be used.

Assignments Students will be assigned short problems related to topics covered in class. These short problems can be used to assess students’ learning progress. In particular, their ability in applying theories to solve hypothetical managerial accounting issues can be assessed through working on short problems.

Test Students will be required to write a test in the midst of a semester. This test serves the two purposes of assessment: assessment of learning and assessment for learning. Students will become aware of their learning progress, their strengths and weaknesses in different topics of the course.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Garrison, R.H., Noreen, E.W., and Brewer P.C. (2018). Managerial References Accounting, 16th edition. New York, NY: McGraw Hill.

Reference Jerry J. Weygandt, Paul D. Kimmel, Donald E. Kieso. 2018. Managerial Accounting: Tools for Business Decision Making, 8th Edition. Wiley.

Updated on 29 August 2018 Included in BBA and BBA(EM) programmes.

3 Course Description Form Course Code ACY2301 Course Title Legal Environment of Business Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives 1. Provide an overview of Hong Kong’s legal system. 2. Explain the basic concepts and principles of business law in Hong Kong. 3. Equip students with basic knowledge to analyse and resolve legal and ethical problems in the business context. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Explain the main sources of Hong Kong law, the doctrine of judicial Learning precedent, the court system, and the various methods of dispute Outcomes resolution. (CILOs) (b) Discuss and apply the law relating to contract, torts, employment, agency, and the sale of goods, with special reference to the business field. (c) Demonstrate the ability to solve business-related legal problems by analyzing case law and legislation. (d) Realize the importance of ethical responsibility on the part of accountants, auditors, and business administrators, and the consequences of breaching ethical standards. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)   (d)  

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)   (b)    (c)    (d)    

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)   (d)  

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)    (d)  

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course introduces the general concepts and principles of business law in Indicative Hong Kong, and helps prepare students for more advanced related subjects Syllabus such as Company Law. The instruction begins with a survey of Hong Kong’s legal system. It then proceeds to topics deemed to be important to the resolution of legal issues in business. These topics include contract law, employment law, tort law, agency law, and the laws relating to sale of goods. The ethical responsibility of accountants, auditors, and business administrators are then discussed. In particular, individuals will be instructed in the consequences of professional negligence. The remainder of the course covers case laws and legislation.

Indicative Syllabus 1. The Hong Kong Legal System (Legal environment and key roles of external regulatory bodies) 1.1 Introducing yourself and teaming up with others 1.2 The system of courts and the administration of justice 1.3 Doctrine of precedent 1.4 Rules of statutory interpretation 1.5 The work of solicitors and barristers 2. The Hong Kong Legal System and Contracts: Formation 2.1 Teaching and case law techniques exercise 3. Contracts: Formation and Invalidity 4. Contracts: Invalidity and Performance (abolition of the doctrine of ultra vires and its legacy) 5. Specific Contracts: Sale of Goods 6. Specific Contracts: Sale of Goods and Agency 7. Specific Contracts: Agency and Employment 8. Specific Contracts: Employment 9. Contracts: General Principles and Types 10. Torts: Classification and Negligence 11. Torts: Negligence and Professional Liability 1. Ethics and Social Responsibility Learning & Lectures Teaching The course contents are systematically delivered in the form of lectures. Methodology Lectures will be mainly devoted to explain and illustrate concepts and theories in law.

Tutorials Tutorials will be dedicated to group discussion, experience sharing, case studies, and presentation. Active participation is expected. Daily experience (such as press clippings) will be blended with legal concepts and principles in resolving managerial challenges in the business world.

Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) Learning 1. Class participation and 10%     Outcomes discussion 2. Assignments 20%    3. Presentation 10%     4. Test 10%     5. Examination 50%     Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Class Participation and discussion Students will be required to participate in class/group discussions for a chosen topic in each class. To actively participate in the class discussion, students are required to prepare and read the assigned book chapters or similar text in other materials of same level in advance. This will help students become aware of their learning progress, develop their critical thinking, analytical, and communication skills.

Assignments and Presentation Students will be required to work on short cases related to topics covered in class. These short cases can be used to assess students’ learning progress. In particular, students apply law principles to business law cases and present arguments and conclusions.

Test Students will be required to take a test in the midst of a semester. This test serves the two purposes of assessment: assessment of learning and assessment for learning. It covers chapters and materials being discussed in the classes. The questions can be in the format of case studies, essay or both. It accounts for 10% of the total course marks.

Final Examination There will be a 3-hour final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It covers all chapters and materials being discussed in the classes. The questions can be in the format of case studies, essay, or both. It accounts for 50% of the total course marks. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve legal problems and real-world legal issues related to businesses. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs.

Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and 1. Srivastava, D.K. (2017). Business Law in Hong Kong, 5th Edition. Sweet References & Maxwell

References 1. Ho, C. M. and Tong, E.B.W. (2014). PBE Paper IV: Business Law and Taxation. Hong Kong Institute of Accredited Accounting Technicians. Pearson. 2. Stott, V. (2010). Introduction to Hong Kong Business Law, 4th edition. Singapore: Pearson Education South Asia.

Updated on 25 06 2018 Included in BBA and BBA(EM) programmes.

Course Description Form Course Code ACY3101 Course Title Corporate Financial Reporting I Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite ACY1011 Financial Accounting Objectives 1. Expound the framework, principles, policies and practice of financial reporting. 2. Enhance students’ ability to analyse financial information in a critical manner. 3. Enhance students’ understanding of financial reporting by providing a comprehensive discussion on the concepts and techniques that are employed to measure revenue and assets. 4. Train students to employ appropriate accounting techniques to solve complex accounting problems. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Demonstrate an understanding about the conceptual framework of Learning financial reporting and the accounting process. Outcomes (b) Identify and apply generally accepted accounting principles to record (CILOs) transactions and prepare financial statements. (c) Show the competency in applying the appropriate accounting concepts and policies to complex accounting issues. (d) Analyse financial information from a variety of sources and contexts. (e) Evaluate the current practice and development in the accounting field.

CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major-

CILOs ILOs (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)    (e)   

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)     (b)     (c)     (d)     (e)   

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)   (d)   (e) 

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ A series of two financial accounting courses at the intermediate level is Indicative designed to equip students with the necessary skills and professional Syllabus competence for preparing and reporting financial accounting information, and enable them to identify and resolve complex accounting issues in the rapid changing business environment. It focuses on the foundations of financial accounting and includes a critical analysis of the generally accepted accounting principles, concepts and theory. Corporate Financial Reporting I is the first of this course sequence. It begins with an introduction about the conceptual framework of financial reporting and a review of the accounting cycle. It is followed by a detailed analysis of the three main financial statements – Income Statement, Balance Sheet and Statement of Cash Flows. The measurement and reporting of important asset items such as cash, receivables, inventories, and property, plant and equipment are then thoroughly discussed. In-depth coverage of other accounting issues such as liabilities and equity accounts will be covered in Corporate Financial Reporting II.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Environment and Theoretical Structure of Financial Accounting (Chapter 1) 1.1. Economic environment and financial reporting 1.2. Development of accounting standards (HKFRS, IFRS) 1.3. Conceptual Framework 1.4. Ethics in Accounting 2. Review of the Accounting Process (Chapter 2) 2.1. Accounting Process and the Preparation of Financial Statement for a Small Firm (A Review Exercise) 3. The Balance Sheet and Financial Disclosure (Chapter 3) 3.1. The Balance Sheet 3.2. Financial Disclosure 3.3. Risk Analysis 4. The Income Statement and Statement of Cash Flows (Chapter 4) 4.1. The Income Statement and Comprehensive Income 4.1.1. Income from continued operations 4.1.2. Earnings quality 4.1.3. Separately reported incomes 4.1.4. Accounting changes 4.1.5. Earnings per share disclosure 4.1.6. Comprehensive income 4.2. The Statement of Cash Flows 4.2.1. Usefulness of the SCF 4.2.2. Classifying cash flows 5. Income Measurement and Profitability Analysis (Chapter 5) 5.1. Revenue Recognition 5.1.1. product revenue, 5.1.2. service revenue, 5.1.3. installment sales, 5.1.4. right of returns, 5.1.5. consignment sales 5.1.6. long-term construction contracts 5.2. Profitability Analysis 6. Cash and Receivables (Chapter 7) 6.1. Cash and internal control for cash 6.2. Accounts receivable (uncollectible, valuation) 6.3. Financing with receivables 7. Inventories: Measurement (Chapter 8) 7.1. Recording and measuring inventory

7.2. Perpetual and periodic inventory systems 7.3. What is included in inventory 7.4. Inventory cost flow assumptions 8. Inventories: Additional Issues (Chapter 9) 8.1. Reporting inventory 8.2. Inventory estimation techniques 8.3. Change in inventory methods 8.4. Inventory errors 9. Property, Plant and Equipment, Investment Property, and Intangible Assets: Acquisition and Disposition (Chapter 10) 9.1. Valuation at Acquisition 9.2. Dispositions and Exchanges 9.3. Self-Constructed Assets and R&D 10. Property, Plant and Equipment, Investment Property, and Intangible Assets: Utilization and Impairment (Chapter 11) 10.1. Depreciation, Depletion, and Amortization 10.2. Additional issues 10.2.1. Partial-period depreciation 10.2.2. Change in estimates 10.2.3. Change in depreciation methods 10.2.4. Error correction 10.2.5. Impairment of values 10.2.6. Assets to be sold 10.3. Subsequent expenditures

Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills of financial accounting as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Tutorial Students are divided into smaller groups of 15 students each. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Case studies Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. They also provide an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as Intended appropriate) Learning (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Outcomes 1. Participation, quizzes 25%      and assignments 2. Mid-term Test 25%     3. Final Examination 50%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Participation, quizzes and assignments Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during the lectures and tutorials, ask questions when they arise, actively participate in

and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials.

Mid-term Test and Final Examination Quizzes, mid-term Test, and final examination may be in the form of multiple- choice questions, short essay questions, and long problems that involve numeric data. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Spiceland, J.David., Sepe, James.F., Nelson, Mark.W., Tam, Pearl., References Low, Bernardine, and Low, Kin-Yew (2018). Intermediate Accounting, IFRS edition. Global edition 2. New York: McGraw Hill.

2. Lam, Nelson and Lau Peter (2018) Intermediate Financial Reporting - An IFRS Perspective, 3rd edition, Pilot Publishing Hong Kong

References: 1. www.hkicpa.org (Members’ Handbook Volume II: Financial Reporting Standards ).

Updated on 12 07 2018 Included in BBA programme.

5 Course Description Form Course Code ACY3102 Course Title Corporate Financial Reporting II Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite ACY3101 Corporate Financial Reporting I Objectives 1. Expound the framework, principles, policies and practice of financial reporting. 2. Enhance students’ ability to analyse financial information in a critical manner. 3. Enhance students’ understanding of financial reporting by providing a comprehensive discussion on the concepts and techniques that are employed to measure revenue and assets. 4. Train students to employ appropriate accounting techniques to solve complex accounting problems. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Demonstrate an understanding about the conceptual framework of Learning financial reporting and the accounting process. Outcomes (b) Identify and apply generally accepted accounting principles to record (CILOs) transactions and prepare financial statements. (c) Show the competency in applying the appropriate accounting concepts and policies to complex accounting issues. (d) Analyse financial information from a variety of sources and contexts. (e) Evaluate the current practice and development in the accounting field.

CILOs in Alignment PILOs

with PILOs s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major- CILO ILOs (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)    (e)   

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)     (b)     (c)     (d)     (e)   

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)   (d)   (e) 

Indicative Syllabus 1. Investments 1.1. Investment Lacks Significant Influence 1.2. Investment Has Significant Influence 1.3. Equity method 1.4. Comparison between Fair Value Method and Equity Method 2. Current Liabilities and Contingencies 2.1. Current liabilities 2.2. Contingencies 3. Bonds and Long-Term Notes 3.1. Bonds 3.2. Long-term notes 3.3. Early retirement of debts 3.4. Convertible bonds 4. Leases 4.1. Accounting by the lessor and lessee 4.2. Bargain purchase options and residual value 4.3. Other lease accounting issues 4.4. Sale-leaseback 5. Accounting for Income Taxes 5.1. Deferred tax assets 5.2. Deferred tax liabilities 5.3. Tax rate considerations 5.4. Multiple temporary differences 5.5. Taxes loss carryforward/carryback 5.6. Financial statement presentation 6. Pension and Other Postretirement Benefits 6.1. The nature of pension plans 6.2. Defined benefit obligation and assets 6.3. Determining defined benefit cost

6.4. Reporting issues 7. Shareholders’ equity 7.1. The nature of shareholders’ equity 7.2. Issued capital 7.3. Retained earnings 8. Share-based Compensation and Earnings Per Share 8.1. Share-based compensation: share award, share options, share purchase plan 8.2. Earnings per share: basic EPS, diluted EPS, antidilutive securities 8.3. Additional EPS issues 9. Accounting Changes and Error Corrections 9.1. Accounting changes 9.2. Correction of accounting errors 10. The Statement of Cash Flows Revisited 10.1. The contents and value of the statement of cash flows 10.2. Preparing an SCF: The direct method of reporting the operating cash flows 10.3. Preparing an SCF: The indirect method of reporting the operating cash flows

Case studies Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. They also provide an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as Intended Learning appropriate) Outcomes (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) 1. Participation and 10%      quizzes 2. Assignments 15%      3. Mid-term Test 25%     4. Final Examination 50%      Total 100 %

Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Spiceland, J.D., Sepe, J.F., Nelson, M.W. (2018). Intermediate Accounting, References IFRS 2nd edition. New York: McGraw Hill.

References: 1. Lam, Nelson and Lau, Peter (2018) Intermediate Financial Reporting: An IFRS Perspective. 3rd Edition. McGraw Hill

2. www.hkicpa.org (Members’ Handbook Volume II: Financial Reporting Standards ).

Updated on 12 07 2018 Included in BBA programme.

6 Course Description Form Course Code ACY3201 Course Title Accounting for Management Decisions Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite ACY1012 Managerial Accounting Objectives 1. Enhance students’ understanding of management accounting concepts, tools and techniques by providing an in-depth discussion on advanced topics from the management accounting discipline. 2. Improve students’ ability to generate and analyse management accounting information. 3. Develop students’ ability to employ management accounting information in area of aspects such as planning, performance evaluation, managerial control, and decision making. 4. Discuss the ethical responsibilities of management accountants. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Apply and critically compare the cost classification, accumulation, and Learning allocation approaches and techniques. Outcomes (b) Evaluate the considerations and issues in cost and management accounting (CILOs) system design. (c) Identify and prepare cost information for planning, control, and evaluation decisions. (d) Develop critical thinking, analytical skills and ethical awareness in the management accounting context. (e) Present management accounting information and decisions in an effective manner both orally and in writing. CILOs in Alignment PILOs

with PILOs s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major- CILO ILOs (a)  (b)   (c)   (d)   (e)  

AC-ILOs

s 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILO (a)     (b)    (c)     (d)    (e)    

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course examines the use of cost information for planning, control, and Indicative decision making, and the applications of management control systems in Syllabus strategy implementation and performance evaluation. Major topics include flexible budgets, variance analysis, capital budgeting, management control systems, balanced scorecard, transfer pricing, performance measurements and compensation, and cost information for pricing and inventory management.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Capital budgeting and cost analysis (Chapter 21) 1.1. Stages of capital budgeting 1.2. Discounted cash flow

1.3. Evaluating managers and goal-congruence issues 1.4. Relevance and discounted cash flow analysis 1.5. Strategic considerations in capital budgeting 2. Flexible budgets, standard costs, cost variance analysis (Chapter 7-8) 2.1. Master budgets and flexible budgets 2.2. Standard costing 2.3. Cost variance analysis 2.4. Variance analysis 3. Regression analysis of cost behavior (Chapter 10) 3.1. Basic and examples of cost functions 3.2. Identify cost drivers is 3.3. Estimating a cost function using quantitative analysis 3.4. Nonlinearity and cost functions 4. Sales variance analysis and customer profitability analysis (Chapter 14) 4.1. Customer revenues and customer costs 4.2. Customer profitability profiles 4.3. Decomposition of sales-volume variances: sales-mix and sales- quantity variances 4.4. Decomposition of sales-quantity variances: Market-share and market- size variances 5. Cost allocation: joint costs (Chapter 15/16) 5.1. Joint-cost basics 5.2. Approaches to allocating joint costs 5.3. Irrelevance of joint costs for decision making 5.4. Accounting for byproduct 5.5. Allocating support department costs using single-rate and dual-rate method 5.6. Budgeted versus actual costs, and the choice of allocation base 5.7. Allocating costs of multiple support departments 5.8. Allocating common costs 6. Strategy, balanced scorecard, and strategic profitability analysis (Chapter 13) 6.1. Strategy implementation and balanced scorecard 6.2. Evaluating the success of strategy and implementation 6.3. Strategic analysis of changes in operating income in two successive years 6.4. Productivity measurement 7. Management control systems and transfer pricing (Chapter 22) 7.1. Management control systems (Decentralization/centralization) 7.2. Transfer pricing mechanism 7.3. Methods of transfer price 7.4. A general guideline for transfer-pricing 7.5. Multinational transfer pricing and tax considerations 8. Performance measurements, compensation, and multinational considerations (Chapter 23) 8.1. Financial and non-financial performance measures 8.2. Accounting-based measures for business units 8.3. Performance measurement in multinational companies 8.4. Performance measures at the individual activity level 8.5. Post-appraisal aduit of projects 8.6. Distinction between managers and organisation units 9. Inventory management, just-in-time and simplified costing methods (Chapter 20) 9.1. Inventory management in retail organisations 9.2. Estimating inventory-related relevant costs and their effects 9.3. Inventory management: just-in-time purchasing 9.4. Inventory management, MRP and JIT 10. Pricing decision and cost management (Chapter 12)

10.1. Major influences on pricing decisions 10.2. Costing and pricing for the long run 10.3. Costing and pricing for the short run 10.4. Target costing for target pricing 10.5. Cost-based pricing 10.6. Life-cycle product budgeting and costing 10.7. Considerations other than costs in pricing decisions

Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of the Methodology concepts and skills of management accounting as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills Tutorial During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Case studies Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % weighting Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as Intended appropriate) Learning (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Outcomes 1. Attendance and in-class 10%      Participation 2. Assignments 10%     3. Mini-case analysis and 10%     presentation 4. Tests 20%    5. Final Examination 50%    Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Attendance and in-class Participation Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during the lectures and tutorials, ask questions when they arise, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercise during the tutorials. Assignments and mini-case presentation Students apply managerial concepts of cost classification, to analyse problems. Students use their critical/analytical thinking skills to present their analysis of mini-case in writing. Tests and Final Examination Tests and Final Examinations may be in the form of multiple-choice questions, short essay questions, and long problems that involve numeric data. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours:

. Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Datar, S.M., and Rajan, M.V. (2018). Horngren’s Cost Accounting: A References Managerial Emphasis, 16th (global) edition. Pearson Education.

References Blocher, E, Stout, D., Juras, P., Smith, S. and Cokins, G. (2019). Cost Management: A Strategic Emphasis, 8th edition. McGraw Hill

Updated on 12 07 2018 Included in BBA programme.

7 Course Description Form Course Code ACY3401 Course Title Taxation Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives 1. Explain the fundamental principles of the Hong Kong tax system and the administration of the system. 2. Expound the knowledge of basic principles of property tax, salaries tax, profits tax, and personal assessment in Hong Kong. 3. Illustrate the application of the principles. 4. Discuss the professional and ethical considerations in tax planning. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Identify and explain the fundamental principles and concepts of the Hong Learning Kong taxation system. Outcomes (b) Apply relevant tax law principles to determine the tax liabilities for (CILOs) individuals, partnerships and corporations in Hong Kong. (c) Analyse practical tax problems and apply tax rules. (d) Evaluate legal arguments for tax cases and provide one’s own argument. (e) Describe taxation systems in Mainland China and the tax arrangement between Hong Kong and China. (f) Recognize and discuss current issues including tax planning, tax ethics. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major- ILOs CILOs (a)   (b)    (c)       (d)        (e)    (f)       

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)    (c)    (d)    (e)     (f)    

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course covers the laws and practice of Hong Kong taxation system. Indicative Students learn to apply tax law principles to determine tax liabilities for Syllabus individuals and businesses in Hong Kong. Practical tax problems and tax cases will be used throughout the course to provide the opportunity for analysis and discussion. Students will also be exposed to current issues such as tax ethics, tax planning and Hong Kong-Mainland tax arrangement.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Tax principles and overview of the Hong Kong tax system and tax administration 1.1. Definitions and classifications of taxes 1.2. Tax policy in Hong Kong

1.3. Features and scope of tax system 1.4. Tax principles and overview of the Hong Kong tax system and tax administration of tax in Hong Kong 2. Property tax 2.1. Scope of charge (chargeable property and owners of land and/or buildings) 2.2. Deductions under property tax 2.3. Computation of property tax 3. Salaries tax 3.1. Scope of charge 3.2. Hong Kong employment versus Non-Hong Kong employment 3.3. Assessable income 3.4. Expenses, deductions and allowances 3.5. Computation of salaries tax for individuals 4. Profits tax 4.1. Scope of charge 4.2. Assessable income 4.3. Deductible expenses 4.4. Computation of profits tax 4.5. Depreciation allowances 4.6. Special businesses 4.7. Cessation and post-cessation receipts and payments) 5. Partnership and personal assessment 5.1. Computation and allocation of partnership profits/losses 5.2. Election for personal assessment 5.3. Computation of tax under personal assessment / joint assessment 6. Stamp duty 6.1. Scope of charge (adjudication, assessment and administration) 6.2. Computation of stamp duty 7. Hong Kong-Mainland China tax arrangement 7.1. Introduction to the tax system in Mainland China 7.2. Hong Kong-Mainland tax arrangement 8. Current Issues 8.1. Anti-tax-avoidance legislation 8.2. Tax ethics Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills of taxation as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills.

Tutorial Students are divided into smaller groups of 15 students each. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Students are required to sit for quizzes at different stages. Case studies and Presentations Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. They also provide an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

Learning 1. Attendance and in- 10%       Outcomes class Participation 2. Presentation 10%       3. Mid-term Test 30%       4. Final Examination 50%       Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Attendance and in-class Participation Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during the lectures and tutorials, ask questions when they arise, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials.

Presentation on legal cases Students apply law principles to tax cases and present their arguments and conclusions. Mid-term Test and Final Examination Mid-term Test, and Final Examination may be in the form of multiple-choice questions, short essay questions, and long problems that involve numeric data. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Lee, Dora. (2016). Advanced Taxation in Hong Kong, 18th edition. Hong References Kong: Pearson.

Reference Hong Kong taxation and tax planning / Patrick Kin Wai Ho., 2014 Hong Kong : 13th Edition , Pilot Pub. Co

Updated on 15 June 2018 Included in BBA programme.

8 Course Description Form Course Code ACY3801 Course Title Accounting Information Systems Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives 1. Expound the fundamentals of accounting information system (AIS). 2. Develop students’ ability to apply information system in achieving accounting and auditing objectives. 3. Equip students with knowledge to identify and resolve basic accounting information system problems. 4. Encourage students to apply textbook knowledge to real world challenge. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Discuss the role of accounting information systems, the fundamental Learning internal control concepts, and the related professionalism & ethics. Outcomes (b) Apply basic techniques of systems modeling, including flow-charting (CILOs) and data flow diagramming. (c) Explain various business processes in accounting cycles as well as related internal controls. (d) Explain the fundamentals of computer crimes and information technology security. (e) Know the basic of e-business and enterprise resource planning systems. (f) Evaluate and audit the accounting information systems. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major-

CILOs ILOs (a)   (b)  (c)       (d)      (e)     (f)      

AC-ILOs

s 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILO (a)     (b)     (c)     (d)     (e)     (f)    

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ The course provides students with fundamentals of computerized accounting Indicative information systems. It enables students to use, model and evaluate Syllabus accounting information systems. It also enables students to acquire sufficient information technology skills and knowledge, on which to base the process of continuous professional development in their future accounting career.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction and basic concepts (Chapter 1, 2 & 16): 1.1. Role and purpose of accounting information systems (AIS) 1.2. Transaction processing in the AIS

1.3. Professionalism & ethics 2. Systems modeling techniques (Chapter 5-8): 2.1. Documentation techniques including flowcharting, data flow diagramming and REA data modeling 2.2. Information systems concepts 2.3. Systems development life cycle (selection, design, analysis, implementation and operation) 3. Control of AIS (Chapter 3, 4 & 11) 3.1. Information systems controls 3.2. Confidentiality, privacy and processing Integrity 3.3. Computer crime and Information technology security 4. Business processes (Chapter 12-14): 4.1. Sales and collection process and internal control 4.2. Acquisition and payment process and internal control 4.3. Other business processes and related internal control 4.4. Concept of “Big Data” and how this affects operation 5. Computer Lab – MYOB session 6. E-business and Enterprise Resource planning Systems (Chapter 10): 6.1. Impact on business processes 6.2. Application service providers 7. Auditing and Evaluating the AIS (Chapter 17): 7.1. Information systems audit and other types of audits 7.2. Evaluation of AIS controls

Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills of taxation as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Tutorial Students are divided into smaller groups of 15 students each. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Students are expected to attend a number of MYOB training sessions. Case studies Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. They also provide an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. In-class Participation 10%       Outcomes and Discussion 2. Project 20%     3. Mid-term Test 20%       4. Final Examination 50%       Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials.

Project Students apply accounting information system concepts to design accounting information system and produce financial statements using a well-known accounting software.

Mid-term Test and Final Examination Mid-term Test and Final Examination may be in the form of short essay questions, and long problems that involve numeric data.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Hurt, R.L. (2017). Accounting Information Systems: Basic Concepts and References Current Issues, 4th (international) edition. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Reference Marshall B. Romney, Paul J. Steinbart, (2018) Accounting Information Systems, 14th edition, global edition. Pearson

Updated on 29 August 2018 Included in BBA programme.

Course Description Form Course Code ACY4101 Course Title Advanced Financial Reporting Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite ACY3101 Corporate Financial Reporting I ACY3102 Corporate Financial Reporting II Objectives 1. Enhance students’ understanding of financial accounting concepts, standards and principles by providing an in-depth and intensive discussion on consolidation accounting plus overseas transactions. 2. Refine students’ skills to prepare consolidated financial statements in the local and international context. 3. Develop students’ ability to solve complex accounting problems. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Demonstrate an understanding towards the financial reporting Learning requirements of business combination and group reporting under the Outcomes international as well as the Hong Kong context. (CILOs) (b) Identify and resolve accounting issues of investments in associates, investments in joint ventures and foreign currency translation. (c) Apply the appropriate accounting standards to prepare and compile group financial statements. (d) Analyse the implications and rationales behind the various group accounting principles. (e) Evaluate the significance and development of the global financial reporting environment. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major-

CILOs ILOs (a)    (b)    (c)    (d)    (e)   

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)   (c)    (d)    (e)   

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course builds on the foundation laid in the previous financial reporting Indicative courses and deals with the more advanced aspects of financial accounting. It Syllabus focuses to familiarize students with the fundamental concepts of business combinations, group reporting with subsidiaries, investments in associates, investments in joint ventures and foreign currency translation in both the local and global context. Students will be equipped with the core technical capabilities to prepare and analyse financial reports of combined entities. By examining the rationales behind the various accounting principles, students are prepared to provide professional advice on issues related to group

accounting. The course also attempts to develop a global outlook on financial reporting and help students appreciate its current development.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Business Combination 1.1. Business Expansion and Forms of organisation 1.2. Inter-corporate acquisitions and investments in Other Entities 1.3. Business combination 1.4. Acquisition accounting 1.5. HKFRS 3 Business Combination Definitions 2. Consolidation Concepts and Procedures 2.1. Reporting Inter-corporate Investments and Consolidation of Wholly Owned with No Differential 2.2. The Reporting Entity and Consolidation and Consolidation of less- than-Wholly-Owned with No Differential 2.3. Consolidation of Wholly Owned Subsidiaries Acquired at More than Book Value 2.4. Consolidation of Less-than-Wholly-Owned Subsidiaries Acquired at More than Book Value 3. Intercompany Transfers 3.1. Intercompany Inventory Transactions 3.2. Intercompany Transfers of Services and Noncurrent Assets 4. Consolidated accounts: accounting for associates 4.1. equity method 4.2. consolidated adjustments (upstream/downstream transactions between the parent and associates) 5. Multinational Accounting: Foreign Currency Transactions and Financial Instruments 5.1. Foreign currency transactions: initial recognition, settlement before the period end, settlement after the period end 5.2. Recognition of exchange differences 6. Translation of Foreign Statements 6.1. Multinational Accounting: Issues in Financial Reporting and Translation of Foreign Entity Statements 7. Investments Joint arrangements (Joint Ventures and Joint Operations) 7.1. Major types of joint arrangements 7.2. Different methods of accounting for interests in joint ventures (HKFRS 11 Joint arrangement; HKAS 31 interests) 8. Formation, Operation, Changes 8.1. Partnerships: Formation, Operation, and Changes in Membership 8.2. Partnerships: Liquidation Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills in financial reporting. Case studies Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. Assignments Test and assignments help inform the students’ learning progress. They identify students’ strengths and weaknesses, and provide regular feedbacks on students’ learning progress, particularly on areas for improvement so that students could adjust their study skills/approaches as fit.

Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Class Participation and 5%      Outcomes Discussion 2. Assignments 15%     3. Mid-term Test 30%     4. Final Examination 50%     Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Attendance and in-class Participation Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during the lectures and tutorials, ask questions when they arise, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials. Assignment Students apply consolidation standards to prepare consolidated financial statements. Mid-term Test and Final Examination Mid-term Test, and Final Examination may be in the form of short essay questions, and long problems that involve numeric data. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Christensen, T.E., Cottrell, D.M. and Budd, C. (2019). Advanced References Financial Accounting (International edition). McGraw Hill.

2. Lam, Nelson, Yuen, K.P. and Kwong, J. (2016) Advanced Financial Reporting: An IFRS Perspective, McGraw Hill

Reference www.hkicpa.org (Members’ Handbook Volume II: Financial Reporting Standards ).

Updated on 12 July 2018 Included in BBA programme.

10 Course Description Form Course Code ACY4102 Course Title Financial Reporting and Management for Non-profit Organizations Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite FIN1002 Business Finance ACY1011 Financial Accounting MGT2214 Management of Non-profit Organizations Objectives 1. Introduce fundamental financial management principles and analytical tools. 2. Teach students to know how to manage the planning and budgeting process of NPOs and be able to develop financial management plan for a NPO. 3. Teach students to know how to analyse financial statements of NPOs, review the accounting and transaction recording process and be able to design strategies to improve financial performance through activities like fund raising and investment. 4. Introduce the fraud issues and concerns that faced by NPOs and be able to apply the principles of corporate governance framework to develop internal control and audit mechanism. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Understand fundamental financial management principles, such as how Learning resources are allocated to both short-term and long-term objectives, and Outcomes analytical tools and be able to apply them in financial planning of NPOs. (CILOs) (b) Understand how to manage the planning and budgeting process of NPOs and be able to develop financial management plan for a NPO. (c) Understand how to analyse financial statements of NPOs, review the accounting and transaction recording process and be able to design strategies to improve financial performance through activities like fund raising and investment. (d) Understand the fraud issues and concerns and be able to apply the principles of corporate governance framework to develop internal control and audit mechanism. CILOs in Alignment

PILOs with PILOs s

CILO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)      (b)      (c)      (d)     

Financial Services (FS)-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)   (b)    (c)    (d)  

Professional Accountancy (PA)-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 (a)   (b)    (c)    (d)     

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course focuses primarily on financial management in a wide variety of Indicative non-profit organisations. Some of these are organisations that rely primarily Syllabus on donor support through pledges, grants and endowments. Others rely on revenues generated through the provision of services. We will look at issues involved in budgeting, short-term and long-term obligations, financial analysis and internal controls.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Overview of the financial and legal structure of not-for-profit organisations and specialized terminology for not-for-profit organisations. 1.1. Distinguishing characteristics of Governmental and not-for-profit organisations 1.2. Sources of financial reporting standards for Not-for-Profit organisations 1.3. Financial reporting by Hong Kong Not-for-Profit Organisations 1.4. Hong Kong law reform commission paper on NPOs 2. Budgeting for non-profits, process, format, and focus, as well as cost and responsibility centers. 2.1. Budgeting (objectives of budgeting, budgeting process in as a local government) 2.2. Master budget and budget cycle 2.3. Behavior aspects of the budget process 2.4. Budget techniques (flexible budgeting; performance budgeting) 2.5. Zero-based budgeting 2.6. Forecasting (forecasting without the benefit of historical data) 3. Managing short term resources and obligations. 3.1. Working capital management 3.2. Short-term resources (cash, marketable securities, liquidity management, accounts receivable, inventory) 3.3. Short-term obligations 4. Capital budgeting and long-term financing. 4.1. Time value of money 4.2. Capital asset investment analysis 4.3. Cost and benefit analysis 4.4. Other techniques of capital budgeting 4.5. Equity financing 4.6. Long-term debt (long-term notes; mortgages; bonds; capital leases) 5. Accountability and control 5.1. Management control systems 5.2. Measures of performance (balanced scorecard; controlling quality; variance analysis) 5.3. Determination of causes of variances 6. Understanding the concept of accrual/fund accounting, and unique aspects of accounting for not-for-profit organisations and governments 6.1. Financial accounting concepts and practices relevant to non-profit organisations (Cash- vs accrual accounting; Fund accounting) 6.2. Fund accounting (types of funds, inter-fund transactions; current use of fund accounting ) 6.3. Government fund accounting (Governmental funds; proprietary funds; fiduciary funds) 7. Analysis and interpretation of financial statements and ratio analysis. 7.1. financial statement review 7.2. Notes that accompany financial statements (Significant accounting policies) 7.3. Ratio analysis

8. Internal controls and corporate governance, identification of fraud and theft, the audit process, and risk management. 8.1. Governance and independent audit for non-profit organisations 8.2. Financial audits by independent CPAs 8.3. Government auditing standards (types of audits and engagements, GAGAS financial audits, Ethics and independence) 8.4. Impact of SOX on Governments and not-for-profits 9. Green investment 9.1. Concept of green investment: green goods and products 9.2. Current flows and future needs of green investment 9.3. Green bonds Learning & Lectures Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of the Methodology fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited.

Tutorials Students are divided into smaller groups. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases.

Case Studies Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. They also provide an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills.

Projects and Presentation Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills to analyse issues faced by NPOs. Students will select a current issue relating to this course and discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as well as the related matters.

Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (a) (b) (c) (d) Intended 1. Class participation and 10%     Learning discussion Outcomes 2. Assignments 10%     3. Group Project 20%    4. Mid-term Test 20%     5. Final Examination 40%     Total 100 %

Assignments Students are given individual assignments to assess the use of not-profit organisation financial reporting frameworks and management concepts to explain and solve case problems.

Group Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills to real-life issues of NPOs. Students will form groups. Each group will conduct research and compare the differences of financial reporting, governance, fundraising and management between one Hong Kong NPO and one oversea NPO. Groups are not allowed to choose the same NPOs. Each group will present their findings in class.

Mid-term Test and Final Examination Test and examination are used to assess the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve NPOs’ problems and Issues. Mid-term test and final examination are in the form of journal entry questions, short essay questions and problems of case analyses. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Finkler, S.A., Calabrese, T., Putell, R. and Smith D.L.(2017). Financial References Management for Public, Health, and Not-for-Profit Organisations. 5th edition. Upper Saddle River NJ: Prentice Hall.

References 1. Reck, L. J., Lowensohn, S. and Wilson, E. R. (2012). Accounting for

Governmental and Nonprofit Entities, 16th edition. New York: McGraw Hill/Irwin

2. McLaughlin, Thomas A. (2016) Streetsmart Financial Basics for Non- profit Managers. 4th edition. John Wiley and Sons.

3. THE LAW REFORM COMMISSION OF HONG KONG CHARITIES SUB-COMMITTEE CONSULTATION PAPER – CHARITIES; http://www.hkreform.gov.hk/en/publications/charities.htm (June 2011)

4. THE LAW REFROM COMMISSION OF HONG KONG REPORT – CHARITIES; http://www.hkreform.gov.hk/en/publications/rcharities.htm (December 2013) (updated on 11 July 2017)

11 Course Description Form Course Code ACY4301 Course Title Company Law Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite ACY2301 Legal Environment of Business Objectives 1. Explain the characteristics of Hong Kong’s legal system. 2. Explain the basic principles of company law in Hong Kong. 3. Develop students’ ability to identify, analyse, and resolve legal and ethical problems in companies. 4. Increase students’ awareness of the impact of company law on managerial decision making. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Differentiate and interpret the laws governing the different forms of Learning business organisations in Hong Kong. Outcomes (b) Describe and evaluate the roles and responsibilities of company officers (CILOs) and the rights and remedies available to shareholders and creditors. (c) Identify and apply the laws and regulations on capital-raising by means of equity and/or debt financing. (d) Explain and implement necessary procedures in the event of corporate restructuring and insolvency. (e) Describe current company law reforms relevant to the corporate governance of listed companies. (f) Demonstrate the ability to analyse problem situations and formulate policy advice by applying the principles of company law. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

and Major- CILOs ILOs (a)    (b)  (c)  (d)   (e)    (f)  

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)   (b)     (c)    (d)    (e)     (f)   

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course aims to acquaint students with the fundamental legal principles Indicative underlying the incorporation, governance, and regulation of companies in Syllabus Hong Kong. Through the application of legal concepts in company law, individuals are trained to identify, analyse and resolve legal and ethical issues in companies. The instruction begins with an overview of the different forms of business organisations. It then proceeds to explore the process of company formation and the necessary documentation. The legal aspects of fund-raising through share and loan capital are also discussed. Particular emphasis is placed on company governance by examining the powers and duties of company officers and agents (the board of directors, company secretary, and auditor), as well as the rights and protection of shareholders and creditors. The lectures move on to study the legal issues related to company liquidation, takeovers, and amalgamations. Students are introduced to ongoing legal reforms in corporate governance.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Common forms of business organisations. Characteristics of a body corporate, sole trader, and partnership. The laws governing the different forms of business organisations. The limited liability company – distinguished from other types of business organisations 2. Legal personality and the nature of limited company. The consequences of separate legal personality. The relationship of legal personality (corporate personality) to limited liability and its implications in the business world. Common law and statutory exceptions to the doctrine of corporate personality 3. Formation and constitution of companies. Procedures in the formation of a registered company. Memorandum of association and articles of association. Legal effects of articles Alteration of articles Objection clauses and the contractual capacity of a company Statutory books, records and returns 4. Capital and financing of companies. Share capital of companies: classes, class rights, dividend (script dividend), dividend distribution rules, alteration. Issue of shares with and without prospectus The principle of maintenance of capital Buy back (the application of the Code on Share Buy-Backs) and redemption of shares Registration of shares, directors and directors’ shareholdings Registration of non-Hong Kong companies Loan capital of companies: types of debentures, secured and unsecured, fixed and floating charge. Shareholders and debenture holders. Application of the Transfer of Business (Protection of Creditors) Ordinance

Registration requirements for company charges. Priorities of different types of charges in company winding-up. Remedies of secured creditors and unsecured creditors 5. Management and administration of companies. Appointment, removal, powers and duties and authority of directors (disqualification order). Inside dealing Division of power between the board and general meeting Appointment, termination, role and duties of company secretaries and auditors. Professional negligence and the auditor (the duty and standard of care; breach of duty of care and damage; defenses) Annual general meeting and extraordinary general meeting. Members’ resolution Ordinary resolution and special resolution. Rules and procedures as to the voting rights of members (Quorum, proxy, voting). Rights and remedies available to creditors and shareholders (derivative action and unfair prejudice remedy). Corporate governance report as required by the Listing Rules Statutory requirements on the contents of a company’s financial statements (accounting related provisions of the Listing Rules) 6. Restructuring, receivership and liquidation. Codes governing takeovers and mergers (application of the Codes on Takeovers and Mergers and Share Buy-backs) Takeover by way of a scheme of arrangement or general offer Provisions on compulsory acquisition in the Companies Ordinance The Role of directors and accountants in a takeover Types of liquidation (Compulsory and voluntary). The role of liquidators. The appointment and removal of liquidators Power and duties of the liquidators Avoidance powers, e.g. unfair preference, extortionate transactions, fraudulent trading, etc. Actions against delinquent officers Proof of debt and priority Procedures for liquidation (just and equitable winding up). Appointment, powers, rights, duties, resignation, and removal of receivers. 7. Company law reform. Current issues in company law reform. Statutory requirement of listing rules (Code on corporate governance practices in listing rules ) 8. Key concepts and principles of bribery and corruption law in Hong Kong - Anti-money laundering legislation in Hong Kong - Counter-terrorist financing - Law against corruption

9. External regulatory bodies - The Hong Kong Monetary Authority - The Securities and Futures Commission - The Stock Exchange - The Financial Reporting Council - The Insurance Authority Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts of company law and the practical applications of such concepts. Tutorials Students are divided into smaller groups of 15 students each. During the tutorials, relevant examples are introduced to illustrate the concepts and techniques discussed during lectures. Students are encouraged to work through exercises problems with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in the discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Case studies Mini-cases at the end of textbook chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. These case studies allow students to function as teams, to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lectures. They also provide opportunities to sharpen the individual’s communication and presentation skills. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. Class Participation and 10%       Outcomes Discussion 2. Assignment 20%      3. Project 20%      4. Final Examination 50%       Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Attendance and Participation Students are expected to contribute on what they have learnt by sharing with others their idea and thinking in particular as a manager of an organisation. To actively participate in the class discussion, students are required to prepare and read the assigned book chapters or similar text in other materials of same level in advance.

Assignments and Project Students apply law principles to company law cases and present arguments and conclusions.

Final Examination

A 3-hour examination will be given at the term-end. It covers all chapters and materials being discussed in the class. The questions can be in the format of case studies, essay, or both. It accounts for 50% of the total course marks. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Stott, Venessa. (2015) Hong Kong Company Law, 4th edition. Hong Kong: References Longman.

Updated on 29 August 2018 Included in BBA programme.

12 Course Description Form Course Code ACY4401 Course Title Advanced Taxation Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite ACY3401 Taxation Objectives 1. Expound the more advanced aspects of the topics they learned in AC3124 Taxation, such as profits tax, salaries tax, and property tax. 2. Introduce students other advanced tax topics, such as double taxation relief, and tax for cross border business activities. 3. Equip students with better knowledge for tax planning, and discuss the professional and ethical issues in tax planning. 4. Discuss the contemporary issues in taxation. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Describe and apply current Hong Kong taxation law and practice, Learning particularly in the context of non-residents and overseas activities. Outcomes (b) Identify the main opportunities for international tax planning and explain (CILOs) and apply the main techniques involved. (c) Identify the main opportunities for further tax planning techniques in Hong Kong in relation to profits tax, salaries tax, property tax and stamp duty, and explain and apply the main techniques involved. (d) Describe, apply, and recognize the limitations of current Hong Kong anti- avoidance legislation. (e) Deal with ethical issues in tax practice; advise on tax administration, tax investigation and penalties. (f) Recognise, analyse and discuss further issues of current interest and debate in Hong Kong and overseas. CILOs in

Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

and Major- CILOs ILOs (a)     (b)     (c)    (d)     (e)    (f)     

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)     (b)    (c)    (d)    (e)     (f)   

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course extends students’ knowledge of the law and practice of Hong Indicative Kong taxation, particularly with respect to international issues. It applies Syllabus that knowledge to tax planning, both in a domestic and an international context. Further issues of current debate in taxation are addressed, in particular those involving tax ethics.

Indicative Syllabus 1. International aspects of current Hong Kong taxation law and practice 1.1. Territorial system of taxation; 1.2. Taxation of non-residents in Hong Kong; 1.3. Withholding taxes; apportionment of income and expenses. 2. International aspects of corporate tax planning 2.1. General concepts of tax planning; 2.2. International tax planning characteristics; 2.3. Tax havens and Hong Kong companies; 2.4. Transfer pricing and other income shifting techniques; 2.5. Taxation issues in direct foreign investment; double taxation and relief there from. 3. Other tax planning techniques in Hong Kong 3.1. Issues and techniques in tax planning with respect to 3.2. Profits tax 3.3. Salaries tax 3.4. Property tax and stamp duty 4. Anti- avoidance legislation 4.1. General and specific anti-avoidance legislation; 4.2. Fiscal Nullity; 4.3. IRD’s current practice; 4.4. Advance rulings 5. Ethics in tax practice; investigations and penalties 5.1. Tax avoidance and evasion; 5.2. Tax ethics; 5.3. Tax investigations; 5.4. Offences and penalties for tax evasion 6. Current issues in taxation 6.1. Recent trends, developments and issues in taxation in Hong Kong 6.2. Recent trends, developments and issues in taxation internationally.

Tutorials Students are divided into smaller groups. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the

lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases.

Case studies and Presentations Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lectures. They also provide an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. Class Participation and 10%       Outcomes Discussion 2. Assignment 15%       3. Presentation 5%       4. Mid-term Test 20%    5. Final Examination 50%       Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

In-class Participation and Discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials.

Assignment and Presentation In assignment, students apply tax planning techniques and personal assessment to solve the tax cases. Students apply law rule to tax cases and present their arguments and conclusions.

Mid-term Test and Final Examination Mid-term Test, and Final Examination may be in the form of short essay questions, and long problems that involve numeric data.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs.

Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Lee, D (2016). Advanced Taxation in Hong Kong, 18th edition. Hong Kong: References Pearson.

References 1. Macpherson, A. and Laird, G. Hong Kong Taxation: Law & Practice (2011-2012). Hong Kong: The Chinese University Press. 2. Ho, P. K. W. Hong Kong Taxation & Tax Planning, 11th edition. Hong Kong: PPC. 3. Hong Kong Master Tax Guide (latest edition). C.C.H. Asia Limited. 4. Departmental Interpretation and Practices Notes (DIPN). Hong Kong Inland Revenue Department., HKSAR website: www.ird.gov.hk 5. Hong Kong Board of Review Decisions. 6. HKSAR website: www.info.gov.hk/bor/eng/decision.htm 7. Hong Kong Tax Cases. The Government of HKSAR Printer and HKSAR website: www.judiciary.gov.hk. 8. Inland Revenue Ordinance and Inland Revenue Rules. HKSAR website: www.legislation.gov.hk/eng/home.htm, Chapter 112 9. Board of Review Decisions, The Government Printer: www.ird.gov.hk

Updated on 15 06 2018 Included in BBA programme.

13 Course Description Form Course Code ACY4501 Course Title Auditing Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives 1. Explain the framework and concepts of auditing. 2. Expound the use of auditing principles, standards, process, tools and techniques in auditing profession. 3. Improve students’ understanding of the role of auditing in risk management. 4. Develop students’ ability to think and analyse critically like auditing professionals. 5. Expound code of ethics for auditing professionals. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Discuss the role, the ethical and legal responsibilities of an independent Learning auditor. Outcomes (b) Explain basic audit concepts and techniques. (CILOs) (c) Apply basic audit concepts and techniques to the audit of internal control, transaction cycles, and financial statement account balances. (d) Evaluate conditions for the issuance of various types of audit report. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

and Major- CILOs ILOs (a)  (b)   (c)    (d)  

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)     (b)    (c)     (d)   

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course provides students with a basic understanding of auditing Indicative functions, different stages of the audit process, and the regulatory Syllabus requirements as set by the Hong Kong Institute of Certified Public Accountants (HKICPA), with a focus on professional ethics.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Overview of audit and audit standards 1.1 Audit and assurance services and statutory requirements 1.2 The role of auditor in corporate governance 1.3 Economic demand for auditor 1.4 Audit standards (Hong Kong)

2. Independent auditor’s professional ethics and legal liability 2.1 auditor’s responsibilities with regard to conflicts of interest and confidentiality 2.2 key principles under Code of ethics for professional accountants 2.3 Threats and safeguards to minimize threats under Code of ethics for professional accountants 3. Corporate governance framework 3.1. directors’ responsibilities and an auditor’s responsibilities 3.2. auditor’s communication with those charged with corporate governance 4. understand the entity (inherent risk and control risk) 5. audit sampling (audit sampling for tests of controls; audit sampling for tests of details of balances) 6. audit approach (risk-based auditing; top-down auditing; system-based auditing; systems audit; balance sheet approach; transaction cycle approach; directional testing) 7. Internal control framework and test of internal control 8. Audit planning (materiality) and analytical procedures; audit evidence; audit concepts; audit tests for internal control; audit tests for details: transactions and account balances; 9. Application of audit process to various business transactions cycles. 10. Preparation of audit reports 10.1 types of audit opinions (unqualified; qualified with except for paragraph, disclaimer; adverse) 11. elements of audit reports, key audit matters paragraphs

Project

Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills to analyse real-world issues. Students will select a current issue relating to this course with the instructor’s approval, and discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as well as the related matters. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) Learning 1. Class Participation and 10%     Outcomes Discussion 2. Assignment 10%    3. Project 15%     4. Mid-term Test 15%    5. Final Examination 50%     Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignment and Project Students will apply Hong Kong Auditing Standards on audit engagement acceptance and audit engagement planning and present their acceptance conclusions and audit plan.

Mid-term Test and Final Examination Mid-term Test and Final Examination may be in the form of short essay questions, and long problems that involve numeric data. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Whittington, O. Ray and Pany, Kurt (2019). Principles and Auditing & References Other Assurance Services 21st Edition. McGraw Hill

2. Lau, P. T. Y. and N. C. Y. Lam (2017). Auditing and Assurance in Hong Kong, 5th edition. Hong Kong: Pilot Publishing Company Limited.

Reference Arens, A.A., Elder, R.J., Beasley M.S. and Hogan, C.E. (2016). Auditing and Assurance Services: Global Edition (16E), Pearson Prentice Hall.

HKICPA member’s Handbook (Volume III Auditing and Assurance Standards) http://app1.hkicpa.org.hk/ebook/index.php

Updated on 04 07 2018 Included in BBA programme.

14 Course Description Form Course Code ACY4502 Course Title Advanced Auditing Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite ACY4501 Auditing Objectives 1. Provide an in-depth discussion on issues related to assurance and non- assurance services. 2. Enhance students’ understanding of the ethical, professional and legal considerations in audit and other assurance engagements. 3. Equip students with the knowledge to conduct audit work in a computerised environment. 4. Improve students’ critical thinking and communication skills. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Explain auditing issues related to conglomerates. Learning (b) Discuss critically the ethical, professional and legal considerations Outcomes involved in carrying out an audit. (CILOs) (c) Describe other assurance and non-assurance services. (d) Comprehend the objectives and requirements in assurance on non- financial information. (e) Explain how information technology affects audit process. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major-

CILOs ILOs (a)     (b)     (c)     (d)     (e)    

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)     (c)    (d)    (e)   

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course provides students with an in-depth understanding of auditing and Indicative assurance functions. Advanced topics including auditing issues related to Syllabus conglomerates, other assurance and non-assurance services, assurance on non-financial information and information technology based audit tools will be covered. Current development in auditing and corporate governance matters will be discussed throughout the course.

Indicative Syllabus

1. Auditing issues related to conglomerates: 1.1. group entities 1.2. related parties 1.3. reliance on other auditors and experts 2. Professional ethics and legal liability: 2.1. Ethical dilemmas 2.2. Special need for ethical conduct in Professions 2.3. Independence rule of conduct and interpretations 2.4. Other rules of conduct 2.5. Auditors’ legal liabilities and Enforcement 3. Other assurance and non-assurance services: 3.1. IPO 3.2. due diligence 3.3. agreed-upon procedures 3.4. review and compilation services 4. Assurance on non-financial information: 4.1. Internal audit 4.2. Operational audit 4.3. ISO audit 5. The impact of information technology on audit: 5.1. IT systems organisation and control 5.2. Auditing in an IT Environment Using CAATs 6. Current issues 6.1. Audit scandals and international cases 6.2. Corporate governance matters (corporate governance requirements) 7. Audit of Accounting estimates 7.1. fair value accounting estimates 7.2. opening balances 7.3. comparatives 8. Audit documentation 9. Subsequent events Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker(s) will be invited to share their knowledge in the field of Auditing with students.

Case studies and Presentations

Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. They also provide an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Class Participation and 10%      Outcomes Discussion 2. Assignment 10%      3. Presentation 15%   4. Mid-term Test 15%    5. Final Examination 50%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignment and Project Students will apply Hong Kong Auditing Standards and Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants on the ethical, professional and legal considerations involved in carrying out an audit (including effect of use of information technology).

Mid-term Test and Final Examination Mid-term Test and Final Examination may be in the form of short essay questions, and long problems that involve numeric data.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Whittington, O. Ray and Pany, Kurt (2019). Principles and Auditing & References Other Assurance Services 21st Edition. McGraw Hill

2. Lau, P. T. Y. and N. C. Y. Lam (2017). Auditing and Assurance in Hong Kong, 5th edition. Hong Kong: Pilot Publishing Company Limited.

Reference Arens, A.A., Elder, R.J., Beasley M.S. and Hogan, C.E. (2016). Auditing and Assurance Services: Global Edition (16E), Pearson Prentice Hall.

HKICPA member’s Handbook (Volume III Auditing and Assurance Standards) http://app1.hkicpa.org.hk/ebook/index.php

Updated on 29 August 2018 Included in BBA programme.

15 Course Description Form Course Code ACY4601 Course Title Financial Statement Analysis Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives 1. Equip students with the insights and analytic techniques to critically evaluate firms’ accounting policies, assess earnings quality, and make adjustments to given financial data when necessary. 2. Develop students’ ability to use financial analysis tools and appreciate the strength and weakness of such tools. 3. Train students to interpret, integrate and infer from the analysis results to evaluate a firm’s credit risk and equity value Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Develop a comprehensive framework for business analysis and valuation Learning by identifying and utilizing value relevant information provided in the Outcomes financial statements. (CILOs) (b) Analyse accounting policies, evaluate earnings quality and make necessary adjustments to financial statements. (c) Apply appropriate financial tools to perform critical analysis on firm’s profitability, liquidity, solvency and asset utilization. (d) Formulate sound financial decisions under context-specific settings by incorporating the strategic, accounting and financing activities of a business entity into the performance/valuation analysis. (e) Show the competency in writing a thorough, credible and professional financial statement analysis report. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

and Major- CILOs ILOs (a)   (b)   (c)  (d)  (e)  

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)   (c)    (d)    (e)   

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs

(a)  (b)   (c)   (d)  (e) 

Indicative Syllabus 1. Overview of Financial Statement Analysis 1.1. Business analysis 1.2. Basis of financial statement analysis 2. Financial Reporting and Analysis 2.1. Reporting environment 2.2. Accrual accounting 2.3. Fair value accounting 3. Analyzing Financing Activities 3.1. Liabilities 3.2. Leases 3.3. Postretirement benefits 3.4. Contingencies and commitments 3.5. Off-balance-sheet financing 3.6. Shareholders’ equity 4. Analyzing Investing Activities 4.1. Current assets 4.2. Investment securities 4.3. Derivative securities 4.4. Long-lived assets 4.5. Intangible assets 5. Analysing Operating Activities 5.1. Income measurement 5.2. Non-recurring items 5.3. Revenue and gain recognition 5.4. Deferred charges 6. Cash Flows Analysis 6.1. Statement of cash flows 6.2. Analysis implications of cash flows 6.3. Analysis of cash flows 6.4. Specialized cash flows ratios 7. Return on Invested Capital and Profitability Analysis

7.1. Importance and components of return on invested capital 7.2. Analyzing return on net operating assets 7.3. Analyzing return on common equity 8. Prospective Analysis 8.1. Projecting financial statements 8.2. Application of prospective analysis in the residual income valuation model 9. Credit Analysis 9.1. Liquidity, capital structure and solvency 10. Equity Analysis and Valuation 10.1. Earnings persistence 10.2. Earnings based equity valuation 10.3. Earning power and forecasting for valuation

Presentations Project provides the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills to analyse real-world issues. Students will select a current issue relating to this course with the instructor’s approval, and discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as well as the related matters. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Class Participation and 5%     Outcomes Discussion 2. Assignment 5%     3. Project and 20%      Presentation 4. Mid-term Test 20%     5. Final Examination 50%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

In-class Participation and Class Discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials.

Assignment Students need to submit the assignments relating to the principles on the analysis of financial statements.

Project and Presentation Students apply financial statement analysis techniques to financial statements and present their conclusions.

Mid-term Test and Final Examination Mid-term Test and Final Examination may be in the form of short essay questions and long problems that involve numeric data. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and K. R. Subramanyam and John J. Wild (2014). Financial Statement Analysis, References 11th edition. McGraw-Hill. (Supplemented with cases in the book from Fridson and Alvarez (2018) )

References 1. Fridson, M. and Alvarez. F. (2018) Financial Statement Analysis: A Practitioner’s Guide, 4th Edition. Wiley 2. www.hkicpa.org (Members’ Handbook Volume II: Financial Reporting Standards ).

Updated on 28 08 2018 Included in BBA programme.

16 Course Description Form Course Code BUS1203 Course Title Case Analysis and Communication in Business Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives 1. Strengthen both verbal and non-verbal communication skills of students. 2. Develop students’ analytical skills. 3. Prepare students for job interviews and formal presentations. 4. Improve students’ writing skills in a variety of business situations. 5. Increase students’ awareness in the increased difficulties and challenges encountered in cross-cultural communication.

Course Upon successful completion of this course, students should be able to: Intended a. Understand why business communication is important and how it can be Learning applied. Outcomes b. Determine the appropriate medium by which a message is sent. (CILOs) c. Communicate in different forms and interpret communication more effectively. d. Conduct qualitative analysis. e. Analyse the opportunities and challenges of intercultural communication. f. Identify possible sources of ‘noise’ and barriers to successful communication.

CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

and Major- CILOs ILOs (a)       (b)      (c)      (d)    (e)     (f)    

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)   (d)   (e)  (f) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a) 

(b)  (c)  (d)  (e)  (f) 

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)   (c)    (d)  (e)  (f)  

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e)  (f) 

Course 1. Understanding the foundations of business communication Synopsis/ 2. Mastering team skills & interpersonal communication Indicative 3. Planning & writing business messages Syllabus 4. Crafting brief messages 5. Preparing reports & oral presentations 6. Designing & delivering oral & online presentations 7. Writing employment messages & interviewing for jobs 8. The nature of intercultural communication 9. Case Analysis 10. Intercultural negotiation process & components

Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be mainly devoted to explain and illustrate concepts and theories Methodology in business communication.

Tutorial Tutorials will be dedicated to group discussion, experience sharing, case studies, and presentation. Active participation is expected. Daily experience (such as press clippings) will be blended with case analysis in resolving communication challenges in the business world.

Assessment Methods in Alignment

with Course Specific assessment % Course intended learning Intended methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed Learning (Please tick as appropriate) Outcomes (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) 1. Class participation 10       and discussion 2. Assignments 20       3. Tests and 40       Examinations 4. Projects and 30       presentations Total 100% Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Assignments Students are required to write individual assignments on selected topics in business communication. Examination There will be a final examination to assess students’ overall achievement for the course according to the related intended learning outcomes. Projects and presentations Each group of students will be required to conduct a project that focuses on the importance of business communication and case analysis.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lectures 28 Hrs. . Tutorials 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 56 Hrs. . Preparation for group presentations and individual 34 Hrs. reports Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook: and Locker, K.T. & Kaczmarek, S. K. (2014). Business Communication, References Building Critical Skills (Sixth Edition). McGraw Hill. Reference: 1. Thill, J. V. & Bovee, C. L. (2011). Excellence in business communication (9th ed.). NJ: Prentice Hall.

2. DeVito, J.A. (2015). Human Communication, The Basic Course (13th Ed.). Pearson. (updated on 27 September 2017)

17 Course Description Form Course Code BUS2202 Course Title Business Statistics Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite NIL Objectives 1. Introduce basic statistical concepts, logics and analytical tools. 2. Provide students with a general understanding of descriptive and inferential statistics, and the opportunity to apply them to examine business and economic data. 3. Enable students to conduct statistical estimation and hypothesis testing with statistical software. 4. Equip students with the skills to apply statistical concepts and analytical tools to analyse and handle real-world business issues. 5. Train students for presenting and exchanging statistical findings and views. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended a. Explain statistical concepts and use the analytical tools of descriptive and Learning inferential statistics. Outcomes b. Perform basic statistical estimation and analysis on business and economic (CILOs) data and interpret the results. c. Analyse business and economic data with statistical software and report the results. d. Apply statistical concepts and analytical skills to analyse real-world economic and business issues. e. Demonstrate such capabilities as problem-solving, critical thinking, and communication skills related to the statistics discipline. CILOs in Alignment PILOs

with PILOs s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major- CILO ILOs (a)   (b)     (c)       (d)     (e)      

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)   (d)  (e)  

FN-ILOs

s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILO (a)   (b)    (c)    (d)       (e)     

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs

(a)   (b)    (c)     (d)    (e)   

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)   (e)  

Course This course provides students with basic statistical concepts and analytical tools, Synopsis/ and the opportunity to apply them to analyse real-world business and economic Indicative data. Main topics include sampling methods, descriptive statistics, probability & Syllabus probability distributions, sampling distributions and confidence interval estimation, hypothesis testing, simple linear regression and correlation, time series analysis and applications in quality and production management. Students will learn how to perform basic analysis with statistical software in the laboratory sessions. Learning & Lectures Teaching Lectures will focus on the theoretical aspects of Statistics. They are designed to Methodology develop students’ understanding and knowledge of inferential statistics, and to strengthen students’ skills in data collection, data analysis and interpretations.

Laboratory Sessions A series of SPSS training workshops is given to familiarise students with the software. The purpose of these SPSS training workshops is to develop students’ data analytical and interpretation skills that are necessary for the group project. Students will have the opportunity to ask questions regarding the course materials and projects. Apart from SPSS exercises, students will need to complete other assignments and quizzes that cover probability computations and statistical inferences.

Project The project allows students to gain hands-on experience by applying the concepts and research skills learnt from lectures and tutorials, to a real-life scenario. Assessment Methods in Course intended learning Alignment Specific assessment % outcomes to be assessed with Course methods/tasks weighting (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Assignment 10%      Outcomes 2. Term Exam 20%     3. Group Project 20%      4. Final Examination 50%     Total 100 %

Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignment Students will be required to finish both SPSS-related assignments and tutorial exercises that cover probability calculation and data interpretation.

Group Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired in this course to a real-life situation. In this project, students have to 1) define a particular research question to be examined, 2) select an appropriate data collection method, 3) collect and analyse the data, and 4) perform appropriate statistical analysis and interpret the results.

Written Examinations In order for the responsible lecturer to address issues regarding students’ learning in an early stage, a mid-term examination (20%) will be conducted. A three-hour final examination is given at the end of semester. Students are expected to answer multiple-choice questions and essay questions. It accounts for 50% of the subject mark.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lectures 28 Hrs.

. Laboratory Session 14 Hrs.

Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 28 Hrs. . Preparation of presentations and assignment 62 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Lind, D. A., Marchal, W. G., and Wathen, S. A. (2014). Statistical technique in References business and economics, (16th ed.). New York: McGraw Hill.

References 1. Healy, J. (2014). Statistics: A tool for social research (10th Edition). Wadsworth. 2. Levine, D. M., Krehbiel, T. C., and Berenson, M. L. (2013). Business Statistics: A First Course, 6th Edition. Prentice-Hall.

(updated on 27 September 2017)

18 Course Description Form Course Code BUS3203 Course Title Business Ethics Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives 1. Understand the basic concepts of ethics in business and be able to identify in practice or recommend solutions to ethical implications primarily in business situations. 2. Identify ethical issues in real life simulations through case studies and provide feedback or advise on solutions in accordance with the principles learned during the course. 3. Understand the role of globalization in the economy and its respective impact in the ethical implications. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended a. Explain and discuss concepts and importance of morality, ethics, business ethics Learning and the ethical principles in business; Outcomes b. Discuss the roles of corporate culture, governance and leadership in influencing (CILOs) an organisation’s moral climate and behaviour; c. Evaluate and critique the ethical implications of varies business scenarios by applying relevant concepts and principles; d. Analyse and suggest practical advice to organisations to maintain and improve ethical standards in business.

CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)    (b)    (c)     (d)   

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a) (b) (c) (d) 

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c) 

100

(d) 

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a) (b) (c) (d) 

Course This course is to introduce ethical concepts and principles in various business aspects Synopsis/ which enable students to develop the skills of reasoning and analysis in making Indicative business decisions. It provides students a clearer sense on business ethics by Syllabus examining real world issues and scenarios. Moreover, it encourages students to examine their own ethical standards as individuals and enhances their ability to resolve the ethical dilemmas they face in their lives. This course provides the foundation for additional ethical business content provided in other business courses.

1. Introduction: 1.1. Ethical and unethical behavior at work; 1.2. Moral standard and business ethics; 1.3. Sources of ethical principles; 1.4. Challenges of ethical relativism; 1.5. Moral development; 1.6. Systematic moral reasoning; 1.7. Ethics and the law; 1.8. Arguments for and against business ethics; 1.9. Moral responsibility 2. Ethical Principles in Business: 2.1. Utilitarianism; 2.2. Rights and duties 2.3. Distributive justice; 2.4. Ethics of care, and 2.5. Virtue ethics 3. Corporate Culture, Governance, and Ethical Leadership: 3.1. Management goal and value 3.2. Establishment of internal code of ethics 3.3. Developing company culture and ethical climates 3.4. Whistle blowing issues 4. Ethics in the Marketplace: 4.1. Implications of corporate market power; 4.2. Antitrust issues; 4.3. Fair competition 5. Ethics in the Workplace: 5.1. Worker health and safety 5.2. Job security 5.3. Privacy 5.4. Equal opportunity 5.5. Fair labour practice 6. Ethics of Marketing: 6.1. Consumerism 6.2. Consumer rights 6.3. Contractual theory and moral duties to consumers 6.4. Product liability 6.5. Advertising ethics 6.6. Consumer privacy 7. Ethic issues related to investors and shareholders: 7.1. Shareholders’ rights and safeguards

101

7.2. Corporate governance 7.3. Insider trading 7.4. Green investment 8. Ethics of International Business and Globalisation: 8.1. Free trade versus fair trade 8.2. International bribery/corruption 8.3. International anti-corruption

Learning & Lecture Teaching The course contents are systematically delivered in a form of lecture. As one Methodology of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the lecture is designed to introduce the business ethics principles and concepts and illustrate with examples the opportunities and challenges in the organisational contexts.

Tutorial and Seminar A small class in a form of tutorial is organized to facilitate an in-depth discussion and intellectual exchange among students on business ethics issues. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the tutorial is designed to setup an interactive learning environment for students to share, discuss, and analyse business ethics issues in a small group using case studies. Assessment Methods in Course intended learning Alignment Specific assessment % outcomes to be assessed with Course methods/tasks weighting (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) Learning 1. Assignments 40%    Outcomes 2. Case Studies 20%     3. Examinations 40%     Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignments Students are required to write two group reports related to current business ethics issues faced by organisation.

Case Studies Using case study to facilitate an in-depth discussion and intellectual exchange among students on business ethics issues.

Examinations There will be a final examination to assess students’ overall achievement for the course according to the related intended learning outcomes. The examination is mainly designed to assess students’ analytical ability to suggest practical advice to organisations so as to maintain and improve ethical standards in business. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lectures 28 Hrs.

. Tutorials 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study:

102

. Self-study 28 Hrs. . Preparation of presentations and assignments 62 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Velasquez, M. G. (2012) Business Ethics: Concepts and Cases. 7th edition, References Pearson.

References 1. DesJardins, J. R. (2013) An Introduction to Business Ethics, 5th Edition. Prentice Hall. 2. Fisher, C. and Lovell, A. (2012) Business Ethics and Values: Individual, Corporate and International Perspectives. 4/E. Prentice Hall. 3. DeGeorge, R. (2010) Business Ethics. Pearson. 7th edition. 4. Crane, A. & Matten, D. (2010) Business Ethics: Managing Corporate Citizenship and Sustainability in the Age of Globalization. Oxford: Oxford University Press. 3rd edition.

Journal Journal of Business Ethics

Useful Websites

Institute of Business Ethics: http://www.ibe.org.uk/

Business Ethics: the magazine of Corporate Responsibility http://business-ethics.com/

Center for Ethics: http://www.vanderbilt.edu/CenterforEthics/resources.html

Bauer Center for Business Ethics: http://www.bauer.uh.edu/bcbe/facres.htm

(updated on 27 September 2017)

103

19 Course Description Form Course Code ECN1002 Course Title Microeconomics Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives The course aims to equip students with basic microeconomic principles and use them to make decisions and solve problems in their daily life and in business. Objectives of the course are: 1. To enable students to understand and apply microeconomic concepts and analytical tools. 2. To equip students with basic microeconomic principles and mathematical techniques and models to identify optimal choices and resolve business problems. 3. To help students to understand how consumers and firms make optimal consumption and business decisions in order to achieve their objectives. 4. To provide the opportunity for students to examine and handle real-world microeconomic and business issues. 5. To develop students’ skills in presenting and communicating microeconomic views and arguments. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Explain and discuss microeconomic concepts and analytical tools. Learning (b) Demonstrate the awareness of the quantitative, scientific foundation of Outcomes economic analysis, and related reasoning and analytical thinking. (CILOs) (c) Employ microeconomic reasoning and mathematical models to resolve various economic and business problems. (d) Apply microeconomic concepts and analytical techniques to examine real-world microeconomic and business issues. (e) Communicate on microeconomic ideas, arguments, and principles. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)   (b)  (c)  (d)    (e)  

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)   (b)   (c)    (d)      

104

(e) 

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)    (d)   (e) 

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)   (e) 

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This is an introductory microeconomics course. It provides students with basic Indicative microeconomic concepts and theories. Students will learn how to apply these Syllabus concepts and theories to explain their daily life behavior and solve different business problems. Key topics include supply and demand, consumer behavior, firm behavior, market structure, factor markets, exchange and trade.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Fundamental concepts and theories in Microeconomics 2. Supply and demand theory 3. Consumer behavior 4. Market structures 5. Firm behavior and profit maximization 6. Externalities and property rights 7. Factor markets 8. Comparative advantage: basic for trade Learning & Lectures Teaching Lectures intend to cover microeconomic knowledge and theories, and related Methodology analytical skills and applications. They outline the structure and scope of the respective topics, and highlight and explain especially the key or difficult issues.

Tutorials Tutorials help students gain better understanding of the concepts and skills covered in lectures, and apply them to resolve microeconomic issues, both hypothetical and real-world. There will be workshop/practice questions for students to gain better grasp of concepts and analytical skills and, where appropriate, short case studies for students to analyse real-world microeconomic issues. There will be group work and discussions, which enable students to build their capabilities to exchange and discuss microeconomic arguments and views. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

105

Learning 1. Class participation and 10%      Outcomes discussion 2. Assignment 15%   3. Test 25%      4. Final Examination 50%      Total 100 %

Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Class Participation and discussion Students will be required to participate in class/group discussions for a chosen topic in each class. This will help students become aware of their learning progress, develop their critical thinking, analytical, and communication skills.

Assignment Students will be required to work on short problems related to topics covered in class. These short problems can be used to assess students’ learning progress. In particular, their ability in applying theories to solve hypothetical economic situations can be assessed through working on short problems.

Test There will be a mid-term test in the midst of a semester to assess students’ learning progress. The test can also identify students’ strengths and weaknesses in different areas so that the instructor can provide help deemed appropriate.

Group Project Students will be required to form a group of four people, find/create a topic to work on (e.g. a hypothetical Macroeconomic problem). Students will be required to apply as many Macroeconomic theories (covered in this course) as possible. Students’ abilities in applying Macroeconomic theories to solve a given Macroeconomic problem will be assessed.

Final Examination There will be a 3-hour final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve microeconomics problems as well as to analyse real-world microeconomic issues. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs.

106

Reading List Textbook and 1. Frank, R.H., Bernanke, B.S., Antonovics, K. & Heffetz, O. (2019). References Principles of Economics, 7th Edition, McGraw Hill.

References 1. McConnell, C.R., Bruce, S.L., Flynn, S.M., Grant, R. (2012). Economics, Principles, Problems, and Policies. Global Edition. McGraw Hill. 2. Pindyck, R. & Rubinfeld, D. (2012). Microeconomics, 8th Edition. Prentice Hall.

Updated on 20 August 2018 Included in BBA and BBA(EM) programmes.

107

Course Description Form Course Code ECN1003 Course Title Macroeconomics Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives The course aims to equip students with basic macroeconomic principles and use them to make decisions and solve problems in their daily life and in business. Objectives of the course are: 1. To enable students to explain macroeconomic concepts and reasoning. 2. To provide an understanding of the operation of a macro-economy and particularly the interconnections between main macroeconomic variables. 3. To enable students to comprehend and evaluate macroeconomic issues and related government policies. 4. To offer students the chance to integrate and employ concepts and skills to analyse real-world macroeconomic issues, and to project changes. 5. To train students to present, exchange and discuss macroeconomic views and arguments. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended Learning (a) Demonstrate awareness of the scientific foundation of macroeconomic Outcomes analysis, and related reasoning and analytical thinking. (CILOs) (b) Explain and critically discuss macroeconomic concepts and reasoning.

(c) Explain the functioning of a macro-economy, and interconnections between major macroeconomic variables. (d) Analyse major macroeconomic issues and evaluate related government policies. (e) Communicate on macroeconomic ideas, arguments, and principles. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)   (b)  (c)   (d)   (e)    

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c) (d)  (e) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a) 

108

(b)   (c)     (d)    (e)       

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)    (d)     (e)   

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c) (d) (e) 

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This is an introductory macroeconomic course. It provides students with basic Indicative macroeconomic concepts and theories. Students will learn how to apply these Syllabus concepts and theories to analyse and explain current economic situations. Key topics include national income accounting, inflation and unemployment, economic growth, economic fluctuations and relevant government policies.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction and Concepts of Macroeconomic Principles 2. Spending, Income, and GDP 3. Inflation and the Price Level 4. Wages and Unemployment 5. Economic Growth 6. Savings and Investments 7. Economic Fluctuations 8. Fiscal and Monetary Policies 9. Aggregate Supply, Aggregate Demand, and Business Cycles 10. Exchange Rates and Capital Flows Learning & Lectures Teaching Lectures intend to cover microeconomic knowledge and theories, and related Methodology analytical skills and applications. They outline the structure and scope of the respective topics, and highlight and explain especially the key or difficult issues.

109

enable students to build their capabilities to exchange and discuss microeconomic arguments and views. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course Intended Learning (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Outcomes 1. Class participation and 10%      discussion 2. Assignment 15%   3. Test 25%      4. Final Examination 50%      Total 100 %

Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Final Examination There will be a 3-hour final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve macroeconomics problems as well as to analyse real-world macroeconomic issues. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs.

110

Reading List Textbook and 1. Frank, R.H., Bernanke, B.S., Antonovics, K. & Heffetz, O. (2019). References Principles of Economics, 7th Edition, McGraw Hill.

References 1. Mankiw, N. G. (2012). Macroeconomics, 8th Edition. New York-Worth Publishers.

2. McConnell, C.R., Bruce, S.L., Flynn, S.M., Grant, R. (2012). Economics, Principles, Problems, and Policies. Global Edition. McGraw Hill.

Updated on 20 August 2018 Included in BBA and BBA(EM) programmes.

111

Course Description Form Course Code ECN2001 Course Title International Business Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite ECN1002 Microeconomics ECN1003 Macroeconomics Objectives 1. Understand the environment of international business along economic, social, cultural, political, and legal dimensions. 2. Identify and describe opportunities and problems in international markets. 3. Develop the skills necessary for tactical decision-making and the resolution of corresponding managerial problems in international business. 4. Cultivate the breadth of view necessary for strategic decision-making and the resolution of corresponding managerial problems in international business. 5. Acquire familiarity with empirical phenomena and data patterns associated with business activity across national boundaries. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (h) Acquire the knowledge necessary to identify, understand, and predict Learning cross-country effects with regard to business activities. Outcomes (i) Develop the skills to exploit business opportunities arising from cross- (CILOs) country differences at the tactical level. (j) Develop the skills to exploit business opportunities arising from cross- country differences at the strategic level. (k) Develop skills in case analysis, case presentation, communication, and teamwork in project preparation. (l) Cultivate a global outlook in business affairs. (m) Communicate effectively on the theory and practice of international business, the associated real-world phenomena, data patterns, and public and business policy.

CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)   (e)     (f)    

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e)  (f) 

I s

C O MK-ILOs

112

1 2 3 4 5 6

(a)     (b)     (c)     (d)    (e)    (f)    

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course introduces the student to the opportunities and problems which Indicative arise when business is conducted across national boundaries. The lectures Syllabus begin by explaining the environment of international business along economic, social, cultural, political, and legal dimensions. It is then shown how such factors and institutions enter as parameters to determine decisions in international business, for example, strategies on the part of the firm to enter markets in certain countries. Finally, the implications for public policy (for example, taxation under globalization) are studied and the economic impact assessed. Topical and historical cases and examples are presented to illustrate the subject’s real-world relevance and practical usefulness. The instruction will focus on simple but fundamental ideas, and on intuitive reasoning. Mathematics will be used sparingly.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to international business (Chapter 1) 2. The economic foundations: international trade and investment (Chapter 6) 3. Market globalization and firm internationalization (Chapter 2, 3) 4. The global cultural, political and legal environment (Chapter 4, 7, 8) 5. The global economic environment (Chapter 9-11) 6. International business research (Chapter 13) 7. Global strategy and ethics (Chapter 5, 12) 8. Export (Chapter 14) 9. Foreign direct investment (Chapter 15) 10. Other foreign market entry strategies (Chapter 16, 17) 11. Marketing in the global firm (Chapter 18) 12. Management in the global firm (Chapter 19, 20) 13. Group project presentation Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered on the fundamental ideas and concepts of Methodology international business, their real-world relevance, and important practical applications.

Tutorials Tutorials in the form of discussion classes will be conducted in small groups. Discussion topics will be based on previous lecture material, questions selected from the textbook, and important contemporary issues. The objective is to help individuals better understand the instruction and apply the content to interpret and resolve problems in international business, both hypothetical and in the real world. Students will therefore be encouraged to participate in the discussion, to argue positively, and exchange ideas, views, and positions.

Assignments / Case studies As assignments, students will be required to prepare case studies on problems of current interest in international business, and to deliver them in short presentations (fifteen to twenty minutes) in class. The object is to train students in public speaking, assess their academic strengths and

113

weaknesses in an indirect manner, provide feedback on learning progress, and to identify directions for improvement.

Group Projects Groups of students will be required to submit a long case study in international business, with detailed discussion of problem choice, data collection, hypothesis formulation, and empirical relevance. In addition to academic knowledge, this will test the individual’s ability to work co-operatively and to communicate and argue effectively. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. Lectures and Class 10%      Outcomes Performance 2. Assignment/Case 20%     Studies 3. Group Project 40%     4. Final Examination 30%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Cavusgil, S.T., Knight, G. and Riesenberger, J.R. International Business: References The New Realities 3rd edition. New York: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2013.

(updated on 27 September 2017)

114

22 Course Description Form Course Code ECN3221 Course Title Money and Banking Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite ECN1002 Microeconomics ECN1003 Macroeconomics Objectives 1. Explores the concepts and analytical tools relating to the economics of money and banking. 2. Enables students to comprehend how the money and financial markets operate, and the measurement, determination, and risk and term structure of interest rates. 3. Trains students to understand the operation of monetary policy, and to evaluate its impacts on interest rates and other economic variables. 4. Equips students with the knowledge and skills relating to sound bank management and banking regulation. 5. Provides the chance for students to apply the concepts and analytical tools to examine real-world financial issues, and to exchange and discuss their views. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Identify and illustrate the concepts and analytical tools relating to the Learning economics of money and banking. Outcomes (b) Explain and discuss the role of money, banking and financial systems in (CILOs) an economy. (c) Integrate theories and principles, and relate them to sound bank management and effective banking regulation. (d) Evaluate the operation and targets of monetary policy and its effectiveness. (e) Employ theories and analytical tools to analyse real-world financial and monetary issues particularly in Hong Kong, and to present and discuss the findings. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)  (b)  (c)   (d)   (e)     

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)    (c)     (d)     (e)       

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course provides students with both theoretical and practical Indicative understanding of the role of money and financial markets in an economy, and Syllabus the analytical tools required for evaluating the impacts of monetary policy. Specifically, it will explore how the financial markets work, how interest rates are determined, as well as how money is defined, created and measured, and how it will affect other economic variables, e.g. the interest rates, inflation and unemployment, etc. Students will also learn the role of the central bank and

115

monetary policy in the economy, including the policy tools and targets. Attention will also be given to exploring the operation and management of the banks and other financial institutions, and the regulation of a financial system.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction: Money and the Financial System 2. Measuring Interest Rates 3. Determination of Interest Rates 4. Risk and Term Structure of Interest Rates 5. Stock Market: Rational Expectation and Efficient Market Hypothesis 6. Banking and the Management of Financial Institutions 7. Banking Industry: Structure, Competition and Regulation 8. Nonbank Finance and Financial Derivatives 9. Central Banking and Conduct of Monetary Policy 10. Money Supply Creation and Determinants 11. Tools and Conduct of Monetary Policy 12. Foreign Exchange Market 13. International Financial System 14. Money, Banking and the Financial System in Hong Kong Learning & Lectures Teaching Lectures intend to present the theories on the economics of money and Methodology banking, and the related analytical skills and applications. They outline the structure and scope of the respective topics, and highlight and explain the key (or difficult) issues.

Tutorials Tutorials help students gain better understanding of the concepts and skills covered in lectures, and apply them to resolve various financial issues, both hypothetical and real-world. There will be workshop/practice questions for students to gain better grasp of concepts and analytical skills and, where appropriate, short case studies for students to analyse real-world financial issues. There will also be group work and discussions, which enable students to exchange and discuss finance-related arguments and views. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Class participation and 10%      Outcomes discussion 2. Assignment 10%     3. Test 20%     4. Group Project 20%      5. Final Examination 40%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignment Students will be required to work on short problems related to topics covered in class. These short problems can be used to assess students’ learning

116

progress. In particular, their ability in applying theories to solve hypothetical money and banking issues can be assessed through working on short problems.

Group Project Students will be required to form a group of four people, select a current topic in relation to the economics of money and banking, discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as well as the related policy matters. Students’ abilities in applying economics theories to solve a given money and banking issue will be assessed.

Final Examination There will be a 3-hour final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve financial problems as well as to analyse real-world financial issues. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Mishkin, F. S. (2016). The Economics of Money, Banking, and Financial References Markets, 11th edition. Prentice Hall.

References: 1. Cecchetti, S. & Schoenholtz, K. (2014). Money, Banking and Financial Markets, 4th Edition. McGraw Hill. 2. Hong Kong Monetary Authority: http://www.hkma.gov.hk/eng/index.shtml

(updated on 11 July 2017)

117

Course Description Form Course Code ECN4231 Course Title Introduction to Econometrics Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite GEN1007 College Mathematics BUS2202 Business Statistics Objectives 1. Provides students with an in-depth understanding of econometric concepts and analytical tools. 2. Enables students to examine statistically the relationships between economic/financial variables and to predict their changes. 3. Enables students to use appropriate approaches for model estimation and hypothesis testing, and to interpret the findings. 4. Equips students with the skills to perform econometric analyses with a statistical software. 5. Offers students the chance to examine real-world economic and financial data, and present and discuss the empirical findings. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Demonstrate the knowledge of scientific basis of econometric concepts Learning and tools, and relate them to empirical analyses on economic and Outcomes financial data. (CILOs) (b) Explain econometric concepts and analytical tools, and select the appropriate approaches for model estimation and hypothesis testing. (c) Explain and interpret econometric findings and reports. (d) Formulate regression models, compile the required data, and perform econometric analyses with a statistical software. (e) Apply econometric concepts and tools to examine real-world economic and financial data, and report the empirical findings. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)   (b)    (c)   (d)    (e)     

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)   (d)    (e)     

118

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course introduces students to basic econometric theories and the Indicative application of econometric techniques to analyse economic and financial Syllabus data, estimate relationships between variables, and test related hypotheses. Main topics include estimation and inference of regression models, multicollinearity, autocorrelation, heteroscedasticity, model specification and simultaneous-equation models. This is an application-based course, and students will learn how to perform statistical analysis on real-world economic and financial data with a statistical software, e.g. EView5 or SPSS.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction 1.1. Review of probability and statistical inference 1.2. nature of econometrics 2. Simple Regression Model 2.1. Linear regression model with one regressor, OLS assumptions and estimation 2.2. Hypothesis testing and confidence intervals 3. Multiple Regression Model 3.1. Linear regression with multiple regressors 3.2. Estimation and hypothesis testing 3.3. Multicollinearity 4. Non-linear Regression Functions 5. Regression Analysis with Time series Data 5.1. Unit roots and cointegration 5.2. Error Correction Models 6. Simultaneous-Equation Models 6.1. Identification problems 6.2. Simultaneous-Equation methods: Two-Stage Least Square and instrumental methods Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding of the Methodology fundamental econometric concepts and skills, as well as their practical applications. Tutorials Tutorials focus mainly on practical applications of econometric concepts and skills, and students will learn how to analyse real world economic and financial data with a statistical software. Students will be divided into small groups. There will be group work and case studies, which enable students to develop skills to exchange and discuss related views and arguments. Exercise and Test Exercises and quizzes help inform the students’ learning progress. They identify students’ strengths and weaknesses, and provide regular feedbacks on their learning progress, particularly on areas for improvement so that students could adjust their study skills/approaches as fit. Projects

119

Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills to analyse real-world issues. Students are expected to conduct the relevant literature review, statistical analysis, write up the report and present the findings in class. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Class participation and 10%      Outcomes discussion 2. Assignment 10%      3. Test 20%    4. Project 20%      5. Final Examination 40%     Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Final Examination There will be a 3-hour final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve econometric problems. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Stock, J. and Watson, M. (2010). Introduction to Econometrics, 3rd References edition. Pearson. (updated on 27 September 2017)

120

24 Course Description Form Course Code FIN1002 Course Title Business Finance Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives 1. To introduce different types of financial markets and the operation of financial markets in Hong Kong and other countries. 2. To introduce the concepts and theories of modern financial management. 3. To develop an appreciation for the usefulness of these theories for financial decision-making. 4. Develop the student's financial decision-making skills. 5. Provide an overview of current financial management theories and practices. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Describe the major securities used in financing corporate, including bonds Learning and stock, and how financial markets support issuing and trading of such Outcomes financial instruments. (CILOs) (b) Analyse capital projects of firms and non-profit organisations as well as the factors that affect their capital structure. (c) Calculate financial terms like compounding, discounting, mortgage payment, annuities, cost of capital and capital budgeting by hand or by the use of Excel. (d) Define the meaning of risk of bonds and stocks and how they affect the return of a firm or a non-profit organisation. (e) Explain the corporate finance practice in Hong Kong, such as mergers & acquisitions, divestitures, and bankruptcy. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)   (b)      (c)   (d)       (e)   

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c) (d)  (e)

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)   (b) (c)   (d)   (e)    

121

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)   (b)    (c) (d) (e)   

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a) (b) (c)  (d) (e)  

Course Indicative Syllabus Synopsis/ 1. Introduction to Financial Markets and Corporate Finance Indicative 2. Financial Statements, Taxes, and Cash Flow Syllabus 3. Working with Financial Statements 4. Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money 5. Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 6. Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 7. Stock Valuation 8. Making Capital Investment Decisions 9. Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 10. Options and Corporate Finance 11. Cost of Capital 12. Raising Capital

Learning & Lectures Teaching Course contents will be systematically delivered in a form of in-class lecture. Methodology The foundation theories and knowledge of financial knowledge management will be delivered through lectures. The market practices will also be discussed during lectures so that students will be able to know how such theories or knowledge can be applied to the real world.

Tutorials A small class in a form of tutorial will be organized to facilitate an in-depth discussion and intellectual exchange among students and between students and instructor on contemporary financial market issues. Discussion of special events/incidents will be provided during tutorials for students to keep abreast of what happening in the financial markets. One of the most important objectives of tutorials is to help students to apply the knowledge or skills that learned in lectures to the real world, for example, formation of market view, identification of best capital raising strategies, and minimization of the risks that faced by the firms.

Assessment Specific % CILOs to be assessed Methods in assessment weighting (Please tick as appropriate) Alignment methods/tasks (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) with Course Intended 1. Assignment 20      Learning 2. Mid-term test 30     Outcomes 3. Examination 50    

122

Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignment Students will be required to work on problems related to topics covered in class. These problems can be used to assess students’ learning progress. In particular, their ability in applying theories to the real world can be assessed through working on the problems.

Examination It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve financial problems as well as to analyse real-world financial issues.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Ross, S.A., Westerfield, R.W., Jordan, B.D., Wong, R., & Wong, B. (2015). References Essentials of Corporate Finance, ( Asia Global Edition): McGraw-Hill.

Reference 1. Brealey, R. A., Myers, S. C. & Marcus, A. J. (2015) Fundamentals of Corporate Finance (8th edition): McGraw Hill. 2. Keown, A., Martin, J., & Titman, S. (2017). Financial Management: Principles and Applications (13th edition):Pearson.

Updated on 20 August 2018 Included in BBA and BBA(EM) programmes.

123

25 Course Description Form Course Code FIN3121 Course Title Financial Markets and Financial Products Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite FIN1002 Business Finance Objectives 1. To introduce the current issues related to the development of financial markets and their products in Asia and the western world, which include different asset classes, such as, stocks, bonds, foreign exchange, credit, and commodities, as well as primary market, and secondary market. 2. To introduce the role and function of major financial institutions, such as, commercial banks, investment banks, insurance companies, and mutual funds. 3. To introduce how to valuate and compare the fair market value of stocks, bonds and currencies using basic valuation models, such as interest rate models. 4. To introduce the regulatory framework of financial markets which help shaping the landscape of financial markets. 5. Obtain training and skills, such as, market sense, to identify the investment opportunities in various asset classes. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Describe and explain the role and function of major financial institutions, Learning such as, commercial banks, investment banks, insurance companies, and Outcomes mutual funds. (CILOs) (b) Describe and explain different asset classes, such as, stocks, bonds, foreign exchange, credit, and commodities as well as the markets where they are traded, for example, derivative markets, OTC market, primary market, and secondary market. (c) Evaluate and compare the fair market value of stocks, bonds and currencies using basic valuation models, such as interest rate models. (d) Explain the role of central bank in implementing monetary policy and assess the impacts of monetary policy on the financial markets and financial products. (e) Describe and explain the major purposes and practices in the regulation of financial institutions. (f) Identify and explain the practical and emerging issues that faced by the investors, such as non-profit organisations, in Hong Kong. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)  (b)   (c)     (d)   (e)    (f)     

L O FN-ILOs

124

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

(a)   (b)    (c)    (d)    (e)   (f)   

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ The course covers the organisation and operation of financial markets Indicative (money market and capital markets), and the financial institutions (banks, Syllabus insurance companies, mutual funds, etc.). It also covers various asset classes, such as, bonds, stocks, commodities and foreign exchange. It helps students to understand why financial markets exist, how interest rates are determined, and the role of financial institutions in a modern economy, especially in Hong Kong and China. In this course, the practical and emerging issues that challenged the investors and regulators, such as, corporate governance, will also be discussed.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction and Why Study Financial Markets and Institutions? (Chapter 1) 2. Overview of the Financial System (Chapter 2) 3. What Do Interest Rates Mean and What Is Their Role in Valuation? (Chapter 3) 4. Why Do Interest Rates Change? (Chapter 4) 5. How Do Risk and Term Structure Affect Interest Rates? (Chapter 5) 6. Are Financial Markets Efficient? (Chapter 6) 7. Structure of Central Banks and the Federal Reserve System (Chapter 7) 8. Conduct of Monetary Policy: Tools, Goals, Strategy, and Tactics (Chapter 8) 9. The Money Markets (Chapter 9) 10. The Stock Market and Bond Market (Chapter 10 & 11) 11. The Mortgage Markets (Chapter 12) 12. The Foreign Exchange Market (Chapter 13) 13. The International Financial System (Chapter 14) Learning & Lecture Teaching Course contents will be systematically delivered in a form of in-class lecture. Methodology The foundation theories and knowledge of financial markets and financial products will be delivered through lectures. The market practice will also be discussed during lectures so that students will be able to know how the financial products are produced and priced as well as how the financial markets are operated and interconnected. Such knowledge can also be applied to the real world. (Targeted CLO: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.) Tutorials A small class in a form of tutorial will be organized to facilitate an in-depth discussion and intellectual exchange among students and between students and instructor on contemporary financial markets and financial products

125

issues. Discussion of special events/incidents of financial markets will be provided during tutorials for students to keep abreast of what happening in the real world. One of the most important objectives of tutorials is to help students to apply the knowledge or skills that learned in lectures to the real world, for example, formation of market view, identification of investment opportunities, and selection of the appropriate products from the right markets to fulfill the expectation of the investors. (Targeted CLO: 2, 3, 6.) Case Study and Guest Speaker Sessions Case studies about how financial products are structured and priced will be given to the students for them to understand how the theories or knowledge on the textbooks can be applied to understand the practice of the real world. Case studies can be given as part of the tutorials or lectures. Some case studies will be given to students for them to have group discussion in order to strengthen the materials they learned from lectures. Guest speakers, who are senior management in financial institutions or in firms, will be invited to share their experience with the students. Students are encouraged to have interactions with the guest speaker so that they can learn from the industry leaders. (Targeted CLO: 2, 3, 4, 6.) Group Projects Students will be grouped and required to submit a long case study, with detailed discussion of problem choice, data collection, hypothesis formulation, and empirical relevance. In addition to academic knowledge, this exercise will test the individual's ability to work co-operatively and to communicate and argue effectively. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. Class participation and 5%       Outcomes discussion 2. Assignment 20%       3. Group project and 30%    Presentation 4. Mid-term test 15%      5. Final Examination 30%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Class Participation and Discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials. Assignment Students will be required to finish assignments and tutorial exercises that cover probability calculation and data interpretation. Group Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired in this course to a real-life financial issue. In this project, students have to 1) define a particular research question to be

126

examined, 2) select an appropriate data collection method, 3) collect and analyse the data, and 4) write a paper, and present their findings in class. Written Examination There will be mid and final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve financial problems as well as to analyse real-world financial issues. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Mishkin, F. & Eakins, S. (2014). Financial Markets and Institutions (8th References edition). Pearson. (updated on 27 September 2017)

127

Course Description Form Course Code FIN3122 Course Title Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite FIN1002 Business Finance BUS2202 Business Statistics Objectives 1. To introduce various securities and assets as well as the markets that they are traded. 2. To introduce the concept behind efficient market and inefficient market and their implications on the selection investment strategies. 3. To introduce the important investment theories and models that include Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) and the Arbitrage Pricing Theory (APT), and how to use such models to develop portfolio that contains assets, for example, securities and bonds. 4. To introduce the models that can be used to evaluate the performance of a portfolio with bonds and stocks. 5. Introduce the interest rate models, such as, term structure, discounted cashflow model and other related models in pricing bonds and other interest rate products. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Describe various securities and the markets they are traded, especially in Learning Hong Kong. Outcomes (b) Compare the concepts behind efficient market and inefficient market and (CILOs) their implications on the selection investment strategies. (c) Explain the risk and return relationship in terms of the Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) and the Arbitrage Pricing Theory (APT), and use such models to develop portfolio that contains assets, for example, securities and bonds. (d) Evaluate the performance of a portfolio with bonds and stocks in a global investment setting. (e) Apply the term structure model, discounted cashflow model and other related models in pricing bonds and other security products. (f) Describe the investment analysis and portfolio management practice in Hong Kong and in NPOs. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)  (b) (c)      (d)       (e)    (f) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs

128

(a)   (b)  (c)     (d)     (e)     (f)     

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course helps students understand the key concepts and principles of Indicative investment and portfolio management, which build a solid foundation for Syllabus further study or career pursuit. The topics addressed include the setting of investment and security analysis; efficient market hypothesis; survey of investment instruments and valuation methods; portfolio theories; asset pricing models; bond portfolio management; term structure of interest rates; and measurements of portfolio performance. This course will also cover investments and policies of non-profit organisations (NPO).

Indicative Syllabus 1. Investment process, which includes different asset classes, such as, stocks and bonds, different markets where such assets are traded in, efficient market hypothesis, as well as risk and return 2. Portfolio theory and practice, which include Markowitz framework, efficient frontier, diversification, and arbitrage pricing theory 3. Equilibrium in capital markets, behavior finance, and performance of financial markets 4. Fixed-income securities that include bonds and securitized products 5. Security analysis and firm valuation 6. Options, futures, swaps and other derivatives 7. Investment analysis and portfolio management in Hong Kong firms Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited. Tutorials Students are divided into smaller groups of 15 students each. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Some of the tutorial sessions will be formed by simulation games and company visits will be arranged. Case Studies Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. Projects and Presentation Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills to analyse investment decisions and portfolios. Students will select a current financial issue relating to this course with the instructor’s approval, and discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as

129

well as the related matters. Students are expected to conduct the relevant literature review, statistics and practical material, write a paper, and present the findings in class. It also provides an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. Class participation and 10%       Outcomes discussion 2. Assignment 15%      3. Project 25%       4. Mid-term test 20%      5. Final Examination 30%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Class Participation and Discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials. Assignment Students will be required to finish assignments and tutorial exercises that cover probability calculation and data interpretation. Group Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired in this course to a real-life financial issue. In this project, students have to 1) define a particular research question to be examined, 2) select an appropriate data collection method, 3) collect and analyse the data, and 4) write a paper, and present their findings in class. Written Examination There will be a mid and final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve financial problems as well as to analyse real-world financial issues. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Bodie, Z., Kane, A., & Marcus, A. (2013). Investments (10th edition). References McGraw-Hill.

130

References 1. Bodie, Z., Kane, A., & Marcus, A. (2012). Essentials of Investments (9th edition). McGraw-Hill. (updated on 27 September 2017)

131

Course Description Form Course Code FIN4121 Course Title Corporate Finance Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite FIN1002 Business Finance Objectives 1. To introduce the problems that faced by firms in capital budgeting and how to make decisions of a firm based on cash flow and models like NPV and IRR. 2. To introduce the concept and models of capital planning, for example, WACC, cost of debt, and cost of equity of a firm. 3. To introduce how to select the suitable financing instrument, such as debt and equity, to finance a firm. 4. To introduce the liquidity models and apply such models in the evaluation of the liquidity level and overall working capital effectiveness of a firm. 5. To introduce how to analyse the contents of financial statements of a firm and use such information to forecast its future cash flow. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Identify and analyse capital budgeting problems and make decisions of a Learning firm based on cash flow and models like NPV and IRR. Outcomes (b) Calculate and interpret the WACC, cost of debt, and cost of equity of a (CILOs) firm. (c) Select the suitable instrument for a firm, such as debt and equity, to finance itself. (d) Explain the liquidity models and apply such models in the evaluation of the liquidity level and overall working capital effectiveness of a firm. (e) Analyse the contents of financial statements of a firm and use such information to forecast its future cash flow. (f) Explain corporate governance issues and risks, particularly those faced by Hong Kong for-profit firms and NPO organisations and design effective corporate governance structure. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)   (b)     (c)      (d)      (e)        (f)    

AC-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 (a)    (b)   (c) 

132

(d)    (e)    (f) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)   (b)    (c)   (d)   (e)    (f)  

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course discusses issues and problems faced by corporations and non- Indicative profit organisations (NPO) in raising or management of capitals. Major Syllabus topics include what capital structure to adopt, how to value a firm or an investment project, how to raise capital in the equity market through issuing of stocks or bonds, what mechanisms to put in place to discipline the manager or controlling shareholders, and whether a firm should engage in a merger or acquisition. The main focuses are practical implementations and case analyses.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Review of NPV and Capital Budgeting 1.1. Introduction to Corporate Finance 1.2. NPV and Investment Rules 1.3. Forecasting Expected Cash Flows and Capital Budgeting 1.4. Estimating Cost of Capital 2. Capital Structure 2.1. Financing with Debt and Equity 2.2. Capital Structure with Tax 2.3. Capital Structure with Bankruptcy Costs, Agency Costs and Asymmetric Information 2.4. Payout policy 2.5. Valuation of the Company with Debt 3. Additional Topics 3.1. Real Options 3.2. Issuing Securities and IPOs 3.3. Mergers and Acquisitions 3.4. Raising and management of capital for non-profit organisations (NPO) Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited. Tutorials

133

Students are divided into smaller groups. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Students will be required to sit for quizzes at different stage. And, company visits will be arranged. Case Studies Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. Projects and Presentation Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills to analyse investment decisions and portfolios. Students will select a current financial issue relating to this course with the instructor’s approval, and discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as well as the related matters. Students are expected to conduct the relevant literature review, statistics and practical material, write a paper, and present the findings in class. It also provides an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. Class participation and 10%       Outcomes discussion 2. Assignment 10%      3. Project 30%    4. Mid-term test 20%      5. Final Examination 30%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Class Participation and Discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials. Assignment Students will be required to finish assignments and tutorial exercises that cover probability calculation and data interpretation. Group Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired in this course to a real-life financial issue. In this project, students have to 1) define a particular research question to be examined, 2) select an appropriate data collection method, 3) collect and analyse the data, and 4) write a paper, and present their findings in class. Written Examination There will be mid and final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts

134

and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve financial problems as well as to analyse real-world financial issues.

References 1. Ross, S., Westerfield, R., & Jaffe, J. (2012). Corporate Finance (10th edition). McGraw-Hill. 2. Koller, T., Goedhart M., & Wessels D. (2010). Valuation: Measuring and Managing the Value of Companies (5th edition). John Wiley & Sons. 3. Harvard Business Cases for Undergraduate Students: http://hbsp.harvard.edu/list/under-graduate-course-page 4. The Times 100 Case Studies: http://www.thetimes100.co.uk/company_list.php Damodaran Online (NYU professor’s website with useful material in corporate finance): http://pages.stern.nyu.edu/~adamodar/

(updated on 27 September 2017)

135

28 Course Description Form Course Code FIN4132 Course Title Derivatives Analysis Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite FIN1002 Business Finance Objectives 1. Introduce the operation of the major derivative markets, especially the Hong Kong market, and the basic types of financial derivatives that include options, futures, forwards, and swaps. 2. Introduce the development and economic roles of derivative products in the financial markets. 3. Introduce the opportunities and risks of investment and trading with derivative products. 4. Introduce how to develop the basic payoff functions of derivatives and design more complicated trading strategies of with plain vanilla derivatives such as forward, futures and options. 5. Introduce the no-arbitrage principle and price derivatives with Binomial Tree and Black-Scholes models. 6. Introduce the factors that affect different derivative products, and calculate their Greek numbers, such as, Delta, Gamma and Vega to support the design of simple hedging strategies. 7. Introduce the basic exotic options and the related products traded in the markets. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Describe the operation of the major derivative markets, especially the Learning Hong Kong market. Outcomes (b) Explain the basic types of financial derivatives that include options, (CILOs) futures, forwards, and swaps, and their development and economic roles in the financial markets. (c) Derive the basic payoff functions and design or select trading strategies of basic derivatives such as forward, futures and options. (d) Explain the role of no-arbitrage principle and price derivatives with Binomial Tree and Black-Scholes models. (e) Identify the factors that affect different derivative products, and calculate their Greek numbers, such as, Delta, Gamma and Vega to support the design of simple hedging strategies to hedge the risks that come from holding portfolios or issuing financial products. (f) Explain the basic exotic options and the related products traded in the markets. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)      (b)     (c)     (d)   (e)     (f)  

136

FN-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (a)     (b)      (c)    (d)    (e)    (f)     

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course is designed to offer a general introduction to derivative markets Indicative and derivative products. Main topics include futures, options, swaps, and Syllabus basic structured products, the pricing models of derivatives that include Black Scholes model and Binomial Tree, Greek numbers, and the applications of derivatives to hedging and speculation. This course provides an overview of the main theoretical concepts underlying the analysis of financial derivatives and shows how these concepts can be implemented in practice in a variety of contexts.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Overview of Derivatives Products that Include Options, Futures, Forward, and Swaps as well as the Structure of Derivatives Market 2-3. Concepts and Pricing of Futures and Forwards that include the No Arbitrage Pricing. 4-5. Concepts and Pricing of Swaps, which include the use of interest rate term structure to discount the future cash flows. 6-7. Option Pricing Models: Black-Scholes Model and Binomial Tree 8-9. Option Trading Strategies, which include Straddle, Strangle, Butterfly, Risk Reversal, Bull Spread, and Bear Spread. 10-11. Greek Numbers, which include the calculation of Delta, Gamma, Theta, Rho, and Vega, as well as how to use such information to design Hedging Strategy 12. Exotic Options and Simple Structured Products that Traded in Hong Kong Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited. (Targeted CLO: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.) Tutorials Students are divided into smaller groups. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. In addition, software application and simulation games will form a part of tutorials. Students are required to sit for quizzes at different stage, which will help monitor their learning progress. (Targeted CLO: 1, 2, 3,4,5, 6.) Case Study

137

Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. (Targeted CLO: 1, 6.) Group Projects Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills to analyse real-world issues. Students will select a current issue relating to this course with the instructor’s approval, and discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as well as the related matters. Students are expected to conduct the relevant literature review, statistics and practical material, write a paper, and present the findings in class. This also provides an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. (Targeted CLO1) Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. Class participation and 10%       Outcomes discussion 2. Group project and 20%      Presentation 3. Mid-term test 30%     4. Final Examination 40%     Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Class Participation and Discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials. Group Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired in this course to a real-life financial issue. In this project, students have to 1) define a particular research question to be examined, 2) select an appropriate data collection method, 3) collect and analyse the data, and 4) write a paper, and present their findings in class. Written Examination There will be a mid and final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve financial problems as well as to analyse real-world financial issues.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs.

138

Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Hull J., (2013). Fundamentals of Futures and Options Markets (8th References edition). Pearson.

References: 1. McDonald, R., (2009). Fundamentals of Derivatives Markets. Pearson. 2. Dunbar, N. (2000). Inventing Money: The Story of Long-term Capital Management and the Legends Behind It. Wiley.

(updated on 27 September 2017)

139

Course Description Form Course Code FIN4133 Course Title Fixed Income Securities Analysis Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite FIN1002 Business Finance BUS2202 Business Statistics Objectives 1. Introduce the students the fixed income products, such as government bonds and corporate bonds, and their characteristics, as well as how to price such products using the cash flow and discount factors based on term structure or yield curve. 2. Introduce the economic issues that affect the price of fixed income securities and use such information to predict the movement of their prices. 3. Introduce the roles of different financial institutions involved in the issuing and trading of fixed income products. 4. Introduce the interest rate models and develop analytical tools to price fixed income securities. 5. Introduce the fixed income derivatives, such as CDS and IRS, and how to use such credit derivatives products to hedge the credit risk and interest rate risk. 6. Introduce the models and frameworks to support development of investment portfolios, such as, bond portfolio Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Describe fixed income products, such as government bonds and corporate Learning bonds, and their characteristics, and price such products using the cash Outcomes flow and discount factors based on term structure or yield curve. (CILOs) (b) Explain the economic issues that affect the price of fixed income securities and use such information to predict the movement of their prices. (c) Explain the roles of different financial institutions involved in the issuing of fixed income products. (d) Explain the interest rate models and develop analytical tools to price fixed income securities. (e) Use fixed income derivatives, such as CDS and IRS, to manage the credit risk and interest rate risk. (f) Use fixed income products to develop investment portfolios, such as, bond portfolio. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)    (b)     (c)      (d)    (e)      (f)      

140

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)   (b)    (c)      (d)   (e)     (f)    

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course is designed to provide an introduction to fixed income securities Indicative by covering the topics: the institutions, instruments and operations in the Syllabus fixed income securities markets, valuation of fixed income securities, term structure of interest rates, and the use of fixed income derivatives in the areas of risk management and financial engineering.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction and Basics of Fixed-income Securities, which include the major fixed income products, such as bonds and securitized products like CDO 2. Yield to Maturity and Spot Rates, introduces the relationship between the bond price and yield, how to calculate other rates, such as, forward rate, based on the spot rate. 3. Duration and Convexity, how to estimate the duration and convexity of a fixed income products and the impacts of movement of the yield curve. 4. Forward Rate and Term-structure Theories, how to estimate the forward rate based on spot rate and how to construct the term structure 5. Government Bond Market, which include the process of issuing and pricing of government bond, the impacts of rating (credit spread) and the interest rate. 6. Corporate Bond Market, which introduces different bonds used by firms in raising capital, such as, ZCB and convertible bonds, as well as how to price them. 7. Fixed Income Derivatives, such as, Futures, Options, IRS and CDS and how to use such instrument to hedge the risks of fixed income instruments 8. Bond Portfolio and other Fixed Income Products Portfolio Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited. (Targeted CLO: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) Tutorials Students are divided into smaller groups. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with

141

the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Some of the tutorial sessions will be taken up by simulation games. (Targeted CLO: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.) Case Study Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. They also provide an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. (Targeted CLO: 4, 6.) Group Projects Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills to analyse real-world issues. Students will select a current issue relating to this course with the instructor’s approval, and discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as well as the related matters. Students are expected to conduct the relevant literature review, statistics and practical material, write a paper, and present the findings in class. (Targeted CLO: 4, 5, 6.) Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. Class participation and 10%      Outcomes discussion 2. Assignment 10%      3. Group project and 25%  Presentation 4. Mid-term test 15%     5. Final Examination 40%     Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Class Participation and Discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials. Assignment Students will be required to finish assignments and tutorial exercises that cover probability calculation and data interpretation. Group Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired in this course to a real-life financial issue. In this project, students have to 1) define a particular research question to be examined, 2) select an appropriate data collection method, 3) collect and analyse the data, and 4) write a paper, and present their findings in class. Written Examination There will be mid and final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve financial problems as well as to analyse real-world financial issues.

142

References: 1. Wikipedia Introduction: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fixed_income 2. Glossary of Bond Terms: http://apps.finra.org/investor_information/smart/bonds/bondglossary.asp 3. Hong Kong Government Bond Programme: http://www.hkgb.gov.hk/en/index.html 4. Green Light for Hong Kong’s Bond Market: http://www.hksi.org/eng/news/download/cover_story1_jul09.pdf 5. China Bonds: http://www.chinabond.com.cn/d2s/index.html

(updated on 27 September 2017)

143

30 Course Description Form Course Code FIN4134 Course Title Wealth Management and Financial Planning Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite FIN3122 Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management Objectives 1. To introduce the students fundamental concepts of wealth management and financial planning and the local practice in Hong Kong. 2. To introduce how to use portfolio and risk management techniques to design wealth management products for clients. 3. To teach students how to understand the requirements from clients, assess performance of different wealth management products, and design wealth planning proposals for clients. 4. To introduce students how to develop the mastery generic skills that required by wealth managers, including collaboration skills, communication skills, critical thinking skills, problem-solving skills, self-management skills and study skills. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Explain fundamental concepts of wealth management and financial Learning planning and the local practice in Hong Kong. Outcomes (b) Apply portfolio and risk management techniques to design wealth (CILOs) management products for clients. (c) Describe the requirements from clients, assess performance of different wealth management products, and design wealth planning proposals for clients. (d) Demonstrate mastery generic skills that required by wealth managers, including collaboration skills, communication skills, critical thinking skills, problem-solving skills, self-management skills and study skills. CILOs in

Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CILOs (a)   (b)     (c)       (d)     

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)     (c)     (d)   

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course aims to cover the comprehensive process of wealth planning and Indicative management. It also provides an overview of the major components in Syllabus financial planning including consumption planning, tax planning, insurance planning, retirement planning, and estate planning. Major topics include

144

private banking, customer needs analysis and relationship management, products and services in wealth management, portfolio and risk management, investment strategies, and regulatory environment.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Fundamental Concepts of Financial Planning and Wealth Management 2. Money Management Strategy and Cash Flow Planning 3. Personal Profiling, Risk Profiling and Life-Cycle Analysis 4. Investment Planning and Education Planning 5. Types of Risks, Risk Management and Insurance Planning 6. Retirement Planning and MPF for employees of firms 7. Tax Planning and Estate Planning 8. Process of Financial Planning and Wealth Management Service 9. Global Asset Allocation and Portfolio Management Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited. Tutorials Students are divided into smaller groups. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Some of these tutorial sessions will be taken up by role play and simulation games. To allow for continuous monitoring of students’ learning progress, quizzes will be conducted at different stage. Case Studies Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. They also provide an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Projects and Presentation Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills to analyse real-world issues. Students will select a current issue relating to this course with the instructor’s approval, and discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as well as the related matters. Students are expected to conduct the relevant literature review, statistics and practical material, write a paper, and present the findings in class. This also provides an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) Learning 1. Class participation and 10%    Outcomes discussion 2. Assignment 10%    3. Project 30%  

145

4. Mid-term test 20%    5. Final Examination 30%    Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Class Participation and Discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials. Assignment Students will be required to finish assignments and tutorial exercises that cover probability calculation and data interpretation. Group Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired in this course to a real-life financial issue. In this project, students have to 1) define a particular research question to be examined, 2) select an appropriate data collection method, 3) collect and analyse the data, and 4) write a paper, and present their findings in class. Written Examination There will be mid and final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve financial problems as well as to analyse real-world financial issues.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Cheng, L., Leung, T., & Wong, Y., (2009). Financial Planning & Wealth References Management: An International Perspective. McGraw Hill.

(updated on 27 September 2017)

146

31 Course Description Form Course Code FIN4136 Course Title Taxation and Tax Planning Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite ACY1011 Financial Accounting FIN1002 Business Finance Objectives 1. Introduce the key features of Hong Kong’s tax system and the general rights and obligations of taxpayers. 2. Introduce the salaries tax, property tax and profits tax to analyse the tax consequences of income earned and expenses incurred. 3. Teach students how to calculate the tax liability for an individual, partnership or corporation under the salaries tax, property tax, profits tax and stamp duty. 4. Introduce the correct approach in dealing with taxpayer’s own tax affairs and dealing with tax authority’s requests. 5. Introduce how to use simple tax planning techniques to evaluate the consequences arising from tax authority’s application of anti-avoidance legislations and the process of tax investigation. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Describe the key features of Hong Kong’s tax system and the general Learning rights and obligations of taxpayers. Outcomes (b) Apply the knowledge of salaries tax, property tax and profits tax to (CILOs) analyse the tax consequences of income earned and expenses incurred. (c) Calculate the tax liability for an individual, partnership or corporation under the salaries tax, property tax, profits tax and stamp duty. (d) Select and explain the correct approach in dealing with taxpayer’s own tax affairs and dealing with tax authority’s requests. (e) Employ simple tax planning techniques to evaluate the consequences arising from tax authority’s application of anti-avoidance legislations and the process of tax investigation. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)    (b)    (c)      (d)      (e)     

FN-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (a)   (b)  (c)    (d)  (e)   

147

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course provides students with the knowledge of key elements of Indicative taxation in Hong Kong, and its practical application for individual taxpayers Syllabus and also owners of small-to-medium sized businesses. It covers the three major types of direct taxation, namely salaries tax, property tax and profits tax, as well as the stamp duty. It aims to build a solid foundation for students to engage themselves in the career of financial planning for individuals. Students will also be introduced to the concepts of tax planning, with case studies to strengthen their ability to analyse taxpayer’s situations and critical thinking on various tax issues and related business considerations.

Indicative Syllabus 1. The Hong Kong tax system 1.1. Key features and recent development 2. Property tax 2.1. Scope of charge and liability 2.2. Assessable value and deductible items 3. Salaries tax 3.1. Scope of charge and liability 3.2. Exemption, assessable income, deductible items and allowance 4. Profits tax 4.1. Scope of charge and liability 4.2. Source of profits and the relevant source rule 4.3. Capital versus revenue nature of profits; deduction of expense and tax depreciation 5. Personal assessment 5.1. Application requirement and procedure 5.2. Benefit for election of personal assessment 5.3. Computation of tax liability under personal assessment 5.4. Forms of business ownership 6. Tax administration 6.1. Taxpayer’s right and obligation 6.2. Tax authority’s power under the tax law 6.3. Penalty and recovery of tax 7. Stamp duty 7.1. Scope of charge 7.2. Computation of duty and stamping procedure 7.3. Relief and exemption 8. Tax planning 8.1. Tax planning process and common tax planning technique 8.2. Anti-avoidance legislation 8.3. Tax audit and investigation

148

Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited. Tutorials Students are divided into smaller groups. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Case Studies Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. Projects and Presentation Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills to analyse real-world issues. Students will select a current issue relating to this course with the instructor’s approval, and discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as well as the related matters. Students are expected to conduct the relevant literature review, statistics and practical material, write a paper, and present the findings in class. This also provides an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Class participation and 10%      Outcomes discussion 2. Assignments 10%      3. Project 20%      4. Mid-term test 20%      5. Final Examination 40%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignment Students will be required to finish assignments and tutorial exercises that cover probability calculation and data interpretation.

Group Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired in this course to a real-life financial issue. In this project, students have to 1) define a particular research question to be

149

examined, 2) select an appropriate data collection method, 3) collect and analyse the data, and 4) write a paper, and present their findings in class.

Written Examination There will be mid and final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve financial problems as well as to analyse real-world financial issues.

References 1. Macpherson, A. and Laird, G. (2014-15). Hong Kong Taxation: Law & Practice. Hong Kong: The Chinese University Press. 2. Hong Kong Master Tax Guide 2014-15. CCH Hong Kong. Relevant information and materials can be found from the following websites: Information/Materials Website 1. Inland Revenue Ordinance (Chapter 112) http://www.legislation.gov.hk 2. Stamp Duty Ordinance (Chapter 117) http://www.legislation.gov.hk 3. Hong Kong Tax Cases http://www.judiciary.gov.hk 4. Inland Revenue Board of Review Decisions http://www.ird.gov.hk 5. Departmental Interpretation & Practice Note http://www.ird.gov.hk 6. Publication and Press Release from http://www.ird.gov.hk 7. Inland Revenue Department

(updated on 27 September 2017)

150

32 Course Description Form Course Code FIN4137 Course Title Risk Management and Insurance Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite FIN3122 Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management Objectives 1. Introduce different types of risks as well as how to identify and quantify such risks. 2. Introduce the underlying principles of risk management and insurance and design risk management and insurance policies for firms and non- profit organisations. 3. Introduce students how to estimate the fundamental life, health, retirement, property and liability risk exposures and select the appropriate insurance policies for individuals. 4. Introduce the characteristics of derivatives and design risk management solutions based on derivatives to cover the risks as identified. 5. Introduce the institutional and social context, such as, regulation, for risk and insurance and their implications for personal, business and public decisions.

Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Define the nature, role and significance of different types of risks as well Learning as identify and quantify such risks. Outcomes (b) Explain the underlying principles of risk management and insurance and (CILOs) design risk management and insurance policies for firms and non-profit organisations. (c) Identify fundamental life, health, retirement, property and liability risk exposures and select the appropriate insurance policies for individuals. (d) Describe the characteristics of derivatives and design risk management solutions based on derivatives to cover the risks as identified. (e) Explain the institutional and social context, such as, regulation, for risk and insurance and their implications for personal, business and public decisions.

CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)     (b)      (c)       (d)      (e)     

FN-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (a)  (b) 

151

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ In this course, students should develop a good understanding of key risk and Indicative insurance concepts and be able to use this knowledge in their lives and Syllabus careers. Topics to be covered in this course include risk management concepts; risk identification and measurement; property, net income, and liability loss exposures; analysis of life, property and liability insurance contracts; methods and problems of insurance pricing; insurance regulation and public policy; and risk management. Concepts and tools will be presented in various ways and students will be challenged to demonstrate their understanding and application of concepts to “real world” issues and problems.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to Risks and Risk Management, which include different types of risks, such as, credit risk and market risk, the major events related to risks in the past, for example, LTCM and Barings, and the current risk management practice in firms. 2. Insurance, Risk, and Pricing of Insurance, which include the fundamental models in measuring the risks and how to base on such information to price insurance for hedging such risk. 3. Risk Management and its Process, which include risk identification, risk measurement/quantification, and risk transfer. 4. Regulation of the Insurance Industry, Legal Principles of Insurance Contracts, and the Protection of Insurance Customers 5. Liability Risk, which include the models for measuring liability risk and how to select the right instrument for hedging such risk. 6. Auto and Home Insurance, which provides an introduction about the nature of such insurance and the pricing principles. 7. Other Types of Insurance, such as, fire insurance, catastrophic insurance, and annuities. 8. Operation of Insurers and Insurance Companies 9. Risk management and insurance in Hong Kong Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited. Case Studies Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. Projects and Presentation Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills of risk management to analyse real-world issues. Students will select a current issue relating to this course with the instructor’s approval, and

152

discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as well as the related matters. Students are expected to conduct the relevant literature review, statistics and practical material, write a paper, and present the findings in class. This also provides an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Class participation and 10%      Outcomes discussion 2. Assignments 30%      3. Project 30%    4. Final Examination 30%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Class Participation and Discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials. Assignment Students will be required to finish assignments and tutorial exercises that cover probability calculation and data interpretation. Group Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired in this course to a real-life financial issue. In this project, students have to 1) define a particular research question to be examined, 2) select an appropriate data collection method, 3) collect and analyse the data, and 4) write a paper, and present their findings in class. Written Examination There will be final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve financial problems as well as to analyse real-world financial issues.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs.

153

Reading List Textbook and 1. Rejda, G., (2013). Principles of Risk Management and Insurance (12th References edition). Pearson.

References 1. Hull, J., (2015). Risk Management and Financial Institutions (4nd edition). Wiley. 2. Lam, J. (2014). Enterprise Risk Management: From Incentives to Controls (2ed Edition). John Wiley. 3. Charles, T. (2004). Risk and Financial Management: Mathematical and Computational Methods. John Wiley & Sons. 4. Risk Management Magazine: http://www.rmmagazine.com/ 5. Global Association of Risk Professionals (FRM Exam): http://www.garp.com/frmexam/ (updated on 27 September 2017)

154

33 Course Description Form Course Code FIN4138 Course Title Hong Kong and China Financial Markets Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite FIN1002 Business Finance Objectives 1. Introduce the major securities used in financing corporate, including bonds and stocks. 2. Introduce the roles of different financial institutions and the financial products that traded in Hong Kong and China. 3. Introduce the development of the modern Hong Kong and China financial markets, the strengths and weaknesses as well as the positioning of both Shanghai and Hong Kong in the global financial markets. 4. Introduce students how to identify the factors and challenges that affect the development of different investment instruments in China and Hong Kong. 5. Identify the investment opportunities and develop investment plans in both Hong Kong and China markets. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Explain the history and development of Hong Kong and China financial Learning markets before 1949. Outcomes (b) Define the roles of different financial institutions and the financial (CILOs) products that traded in Hong Kong and China. (c) Explain the development of the modern Hong Kong and China financial markets, the strengths and weaknesses as well as the positioning of both Shanghai and Hong Kong in the global financial markets. (d) Explain the factors and challenges that affect the development of different investment instruments in China and Hong Kong. Identify the investment opportunities and develop investment plans in both Hong Kong and China markets. (e) Explain the corporate finance practice in Hong Kong, such as mergers & acquisitions, divestitures, and bankruptcy. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)   (b)     (c)     (d)    (e)   

FN-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (a)  (b)   (c)   (d)  

155

(e) 

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ The financial institutions in China and Hong Kong have undergone rapid Indicative changes in recent decades. This course provides a comprehensive survey of Syllabus the nature and the role of financial markets, such as those for bond, securities, commodities and derivatives, as well as the participating institutions, with particular emphasis on those markets, financial institutions, and major corporate clients, such as non-profit organizations, in Hong Kong and China. It also examines the various dimensions of regulation and prudent supervision, and the developments of financial products in Hong Kong and China.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to the Operation and Structure of Financial Market in both Hong Kong and China, which include the major players and how they are regulated 2. Recent Development of Hong Kong and China Financial Markets and the issues and challenges that each market faces. 3. Banking sector in Hong Kong and China 4. Securities, Bonds, and Derivatives Markets in Hong Kong and China 5. Corporate Finance and Investment Banks activities in Hong Kong and China 6. Insurance and Wealth Management in Hong Kong and China 7. Mutual Funds and Private Equity Funds in Hong Kong and China 8. Real Estate Markets in Hong Kong and China 9. Regulation and Supervision of Hong Kong and China Financial Markets Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited. Case Studies Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. Projects and Presentation Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply their knowledge to analyse real-world issues. Students will select a current issue relating to the Hong Kong and China financial markets with the instructor’s approval, and discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as well as the related matters. Students are expected to conduct the relevant literature review, statistics and practical material, write a paper, and present the findings in class. This also provides an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

156

Learning 1. Class participation and 10%      Outcomes discussion 2. Assignments 20%     3. Project 40%  4. Mid-term Test 10%      5. Final Examination 20%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Class Participation and Discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials. Assignment Students will be required to finish assignments and tutorial exercises that cover probability calculation and data interpretation. Group Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired in this course to a real-life financial issue. In this project, students have to 1) define a particular research question to be examined, 2) select an appropriate data collection method, 3) collect and analyse the data, and 4) write a paper, and present their findings in class. Written Examination There will be final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve financial problems as well as to analyse real-world financial issues.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Neftci S. and Yuan M. (2007). China's Financial Markets: An Insider's References Guide to How the Markets Work (1st edition). Academic Press.

References 1. Burdekin, R. (2008). China's Monetary Challenges: Past Experiences and Future Prospects. Cambridge University Press. 2. Ho, S., Scott, R. & Wong, K. (2004). The Hong Kong Financial System: A New Age. Oxford University Press. 3. Wang, M. (2009). China in the Wake of Asia’s Financial Crisis. Routledge. (updated on 27 September 2017)

157

Course Description Form Course Code GEN1001 Course Title Developing English Language Skills Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives The objective of this course is to make students competent and confident in using English accurately and fluently.

Course Upon completion of this course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Communicate confidently and effectively with application of the listening and Learning speaking techniques learnt; Outcomes (b) Expand the range of vocabulary by developing and applying appropriate and (CILOs) customised language learning strategies; (c) Deliver organized and effective oral presentations with accuracy and fluency; (d) Read and understand different kinds of texts for specific purposes; and (e) Write English papers with accuracy and fluency.

CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major- CILOs ILOs (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)   (e)  

AC-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) 

FN-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) 

158

MK-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 (a)   (b) (c)   (d)    (e)   

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) 

Course This course aims to enhance students’ overall proficiency in English, to improve Synopsis/ language skills for a tertiary level study and to create an appropriate linguistic Indicative environment for students to facilitate communication and self-expression in Syllabus English. Through guided practice in listening, speaking, reading, writing, and academic discussions, students will further enhance their language skills and apply these skills in different contexts, such as taking lecture notes, giving oral presentations, completing written tasks and responding to questions in simulated situations.

Learning & Lectures Teaching Course content will be delivered primarily through lectures. Key knowledge Methodology and skills on presentation, discussion, critical reading and essay writing will be covered.

Tutorials They are used to help students gain better understanding of the topics covered in lectures. They are also used to strengthen students’ oral presentation skills through individual presentations and class discussion. Learning progress of students will be monitored. Feedback and support will also be provided as appropriate. Assessment Methods in Course intended learning Alignment Specific assessment % outcomes to be assessed with Course methods/tasks weighting (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Written assignments 30%   Outcomes 2. Speaking assessments 40%    3. Written examination 30%    Total 100%

159

Written assignments Student’s ability in using English and presenting ideas can be assessed by written assignments.

Speaking assessments Student’s ability to present information and ideas orally can be assessed by individual oral presentation and group discussion.

Written examination Student’s ability in comprehending English texts, presenting ideas and writing effectively can be assessed by examination.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 14 Hrs. . Tutorial 28 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 28 Hrs. . Preparation of presentations and written 62 Hrs. assignments Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List References and 1. Anderson, K., Maclean, J., & Lynch T. (2004). Study Speaking – A Course References in Spoken English for Academic Purposes. Cambridge: C.U.P. 2. Glendinning, E.H., & Holmstrom B. (2004). Study Reading: A Course In Reading Skills For Academic Purposes. Cambridge: C.U.P. 3. Hamps-Lyons, L., & Heasley, B. (2006). Study Writing: A Course in Writing Skills For Academic Purposes. Cambridge: C.U.P. 4. Lynch, T. (2004). Study Listening – A Course in Listening to Lectures and Note-taking. Cambridge: C.U.P.

Web resources 1. British Council Learn English: http://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/en/ 2. Cambridge Dictionary Online: http://dictionary.cambridge.org/ 3. Longman Dictionary Online: http://www.ldoceonline.com/ 4. Merriam-Webster Online: http://www.merriam-webster.com/ 5. Take Away English in BBC UKChina: http://www.bbc.co.uk/ukchina/simp/elt/ 6. The Flatmates, Grammar, Vocabulary & Pronunciation in BBC Learning English: http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/

(updated on 21 Jul 2015)

160

Course Description Form 課程編號 GEN1002 課程名稱 Applied Chinese Language (應用中文) 學分 3 水平 4 先修課無目標本科旨在訓練同學中文的聽、說、讀、寫技巧，使他們能更有效地運用中國語文。本課程主要幫助同學掌握中文的基礎知識，包括語音學和語法學，更由此提升閱讀能力至賞析的層面。同學將學習各種實用文體，加強口語技巧訓練，以應付將來工作上的需要。此外，本課程將鼓勵同學通過查檢工具書和搜尋互聯網的資訊，培養語文的自學能力。

預期學習成果學生在完成此課程後應能夠： (CILOs) (a) 掌握語文基礎知識，如錯別字改正、詞義辨析、糾正病句。 (b) 掌握中文文章的寫作要求。 (c) 寫作專業實用文：專業文章選讀、個案分析、實務文書。 (d) 運用合適的口語表達方式：粵音正讀、演講能力、溝通技巧。 (e) 增強語文自學能力：使用工具書、使用互聯網、探討語文現象。

CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major-

CILO s ILOs (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)   (e)  

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILO s (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a) 

161

(b)  (c)  (d)  (e) 

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILO s (a) (b)   (c)    (d)    (e)  

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) 

課程簡介 1. 教授語音、語法等語文基礎知識。 2. 掌握中文文章的寫作要求：文章結構、注釋格式、參考書目格式。 3. 通過實例分析，訓練同學書寫專業實用文。 4. 鍛鍊口語表達能力。 5. 培養同學的語文自學能力。

教學及學習模課堂講學式透過課堂講學向同學講解中國語文的基礎知識。

小組研討在小組研討中讓學生得以應用所學到的中國語文知識，並透過各種模擬練習，訓練學生的閱讀、聆聽、書寫及說話能力。

162

與預期學習成果一致的評估評估方法比重待評估的預期學習成果方法： (%) (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) 1. 習作 40%      2. 小組討論 20%  3. 期終考試 40%    

總計 100%

習作透過不同類型的習作，評核學生對語文基礎知識的認識與應用能力，以及書寫能力。

小組討論透過討論，評核學生的書寫、聆聽和說話能力。

期終考試期終考試用以評核學生對語文基礎知識的認識與應用能力，以及閱讀和書寫能力。

預期之學習時課堂間分配 . 講學 28 小時 . 小組研討 14 小時評核 . 考試 3 小時自我研習 90 小時總計 135 小時參考書籍和文參考書獻 1. 香港城市大學語文學部編著（2009）《中文傳意──基礎篇》。香港：香港城市大學出版社。 2. 香港城市大學語文學部編著（2009）《中文傳意──寫作篇》。香港：香港城市大學出版社。

推薦閱讀 1. 中國社會科學院語言研究所詞典編輯室編（2012）。《現代漢語詞典》（第 6 版）。北京：商務印書館。 2. 卉君（2012）。《漢語基本知識》。香港：商務印書館。 3. 何文匯（2005）。《粵音自學提綱》。香港：香港教育圖書公司。 4. 何文匯（2009）。《粵音平仄入門─粵語正音示例（合訂

163

本）》。香港：明窗。 5. 呂叔湘（2005）。《語文常談》。香港：三聯書店。 6. 李家樹、陳遠止、謝耀基（2012）。《漢語綜述》。香港：香港大學出版社。 7. 李錦昌（2008）。《商業傳意與應用文大全》。香港：商務印書館。 8. 胡裕樹（2003）。《現代漢語》。香港：三聯。 9. 談彥廷、鄒兆玲編著（2005）。《活學活用應用文》。香港：香港教育圖書公司。

(updated as at 29 July 2015)

164

36 Course Description Form

Course Code GEN1006 Course Title Basic Chinese (for non-Cantonese speaking students only) Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives This is an elementary course for non-Chinese speaking students. After completing this course, students will be equipped with the basic communication skills in Chinese. Course Upon completion of this course, students should be able to: Intended (a) understand the basic features of Chinese. Learning (b) write Chinese characters. Outcomes (c) read simple Chinese texts with expressions. (CILOs) (d) acquire basic communication skills in daily life. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)  

AC-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 (a)  (b)  (c)  (d) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d) 

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)    (c)    (d)   

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c) 

165

(d) 

Course This course aims to introduce basic Chinese language with real life Synopsis/ examples. Introduction will also be given to the formation of Chinese Indicative characters, stroke order, and communication skills based on useful Syllabus vocabulary items, daily expressions, etc. Contents can include: 1. Introduction to Chinese phonetic system 2. Introduction to Chinese characters 3. Introduction to basic sentence structure and usage 4. Practice of useful expressions 5. Practice of everyday life vocabularies and situational conversations 5.1. greetings 5.2. weather 5.3. food 5.4. transportation 5.5. friends 5.6. family 5.7. hobbies Learning & Lecture Teaching Course content will be delivered primarily through lecture. Key knowledge Methodology and skills on reading simple Chinese texts, writing Chinese characters and using daily expressions will be covered.

Tutorial It is used to help students gain better understanding of the topics covered in lectures. Also, students have the opportunity to ask questions and do oral practices other than lectures. Assessment Specific assessment % Course intended learning Methods in methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed Alignment (Please tick as appropriate) with Course (a) (b) (c) (d) Intended 1. Written assignments 50%    Learning 2. Speaking assessments 50%    Outcomes Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Written assignments Student’s ability in using Cantonese phonetic system, Chinese characters and sentence structure and usage can be assessed by written assignments.

Speaking assessments Student’s ability to acquire basic communication skills in daily life by individual oral presentation and group discussion. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lectures 30 Hrs.

. Tutorials 15 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 30 Hrs.

166

. Preparation of written assignments and speaking 60 Hrs. assessments Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and 1. Chow, Bun-Ching. (2009) Cantonese for everyone.(Jyutping version). References Hong Kong: The Commercial Press. 2. Liu Xun zhu bian; Zhang Kai bian zhe... [deng] ; Ying yi shen ding Jerry Schmidt. (2007) New practical Chinese reader book I. Beijing Shi: Beijing yu yan da xue chu ban she.

References 1. David C.S. Li and Jack C. Richards.(1995) Cantonese as a second language: A study of learner needs and Cantonese course books. Hong Kong: City University of Hong Kong, Dept. of English. 2. Keith S.T. Tong and Gregory James.(1996) Colloquial Cantonese: The complete course for beginners. London: Routledge. (updated on 30 September 2015)

167

Course Description Form Course Code GEN1007 Course Title College Mathematics Credit Units 3 Level 4 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives The course is designed to familiarize students with mathematical concepts that serve as a foundation of subsequent coursework within the business and other quantitative domains. They provide insight to students to formulate models to solve problems with appropriate mathematical techniques. Elementary topics include equations, simple algebra, matrix algebra; specific topics include differentiation, integration, multivariable calculus, sequences and series. Course Upon completion of this course, students should be able to: Intended (a) demonstrate skills on manipulating algebraic expressions and functions; Learning (b) apply simple and matrix algebraic concepts to solve linear, quadratic Outcomes and systems of linear equations; (CILOs) (c) understand calculus, including differentiation and integration, on simple functions and their applications; (d) apply differentiation techniques on functions with several variables to resolve various maximising or minimising problems; (e) understand sequences, series and their applications CILOs in PILOs Alignment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 with PILOs

CILOs and Major- (a)   ILOs (b)   (c)   (d)    (e)  

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) 

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)   (b)   (c)  

168

(d)  (e) 

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) 

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course is intended for students with no prior training in quantitative Indicative methods. It introduces fundamental concepts and methods of mathematics, Syllabus and specifically develops students’ knowledge in solving problems related to matrix algebra, system of linear equations, calculus, multivariable calculus, and sequences and series. These quantitative techniques serve to form a solid foundation in generic skills required for taking advanced courses in various disciplines.

Indicative Syllabus 1. The Basics 1.1 Simple Algebra 1.2 Functions 1.3 Equations and graphs 2. Matrix Algebra 2.1 Matrix addition and scalar multiplication 2.2 Matrix multiplication 2.3 System of linear equations 3. Differentiation 3.1 The derivative 3.2 Rules for differentiation 3.3 Applications of differentiation 4. Integration 4.1 Integration 4.2 Integration by substitution, by parts and partial fractions 4.3 Definite Integral 5. Functions of Several Variables 5.1 Partial derivatives 5.2 Optimization 5.3 Constrained optimization 6. Sequences and Series 6.1 Arithmetic and Geometric Sequence and Series 6.2 Financial Applications Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will focus on the discussions of mathematics concepts and Methodology techniques on solving problems. Considering the fact that students are with different academic backgrounds, a variety of examples will be used in lectures, so as to ensure effective students’ learning.

Tutorial Tutorials will form an important part of this course and there are two primary functions. First, they allow students to ask questions and clarify the concepts that they could not fully grasp in lectures. Second, tutorials mainly adopt problem-based learning strategies. Different topics will be covered in each tutorial.

169

Assessment Methods in Specific % Course intended learning Alignment assessment weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course methods/tasks (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Assignment 20%      Outcomes 2. Mid-term Test 30%      3. Final 50%      Examination Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignment Students’ abilities in using Mathematics on solving problems will be assessed using both tutorial exercise and take-home assignments.

Written Examinations In order for the responsible lecturer to address issues regarding students’ learning in an early stage, a mid-term examination will be conducted. The final examination is summative to assess the learning outcomes of students in the course. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 28 Hrs. . Preparation of written assignment 62 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Textbook Reading List 1. Raymond A., Barnett et al.(2010) College Mathematics for Business, and Economics, Life Sciences and Social Sciences (12th Edition). Pearson References Education, International Edition.

Reference 1. Haeussler, E., Paul, R., and Wood, R. (2010). Introductory mathematical analysis for business, economics, and the life and social sciences (13th Edition). Pearson Education. 2. Hoffmann, L., Bradley, G., Sobecki, D., Price, M., (2013). Applied Calculus (11th Edition). McGraw Hill. 3. Barnett, R., Ziegler, M., Byleen, K., Sobecki, D., (2010). College Algebra with Trigonometry (9th Edition). McGraw Hill.

(updated on 30 September 2015)

170

38 Course Description Form

Course Code GEN1304 Course Title The Development and Operation of Non-profit Organizations Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives This course aims at providing students a basic understanding of the social welfare services and Non-profit Organisations (NPOs) in Hong Kong, China and other countries. The course will examine the emergence, history and development of the local and international social welfare services since the 19th century. The course will also analyse and discuss the development, operation and future of different representative local and international NPOs such as Tung Wah Group of Hospitals, Caritas, Methodists, GREENPEACE and Po Leung Kuk. Through case studies in the NPOs that are related to students’ majors, students will gain more understanding about the role of and the challenges faced by different NPOs in their discipline, which may contribute to their future participation in community services. Apart from lectures and seminars, learning activities such as on-site visits are arranged for students to gain a wide perspective about social welfare services, and develop the spirit of Tung Wah Persons with a caring attitude towards the needy and the disadvantaged.

Course Upon successful completion of this course, students should be able to: Intended Learning (a) critically analyse the social development of Hong Kong, China and Outcomes other countries in relation to their social welfare policies and services. (CILOs) (b) explain how leaders implement visions and values realistically in the midst of challenge and limitation at the welfare organisations. (c) give an account of the visions and missions of major social welfare organisations. (d) demonstrate an appreciation of the work of non-profit organisations (NPOs) and be able to minimize alienation, pay respect to human dignity and have compassion to the helpless, the needy, and the marginalized.

CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)      (b)     (c)     (d)     

Course 1. The past: The development of NPOs from the 19th century in Hong Synopsis/ Kong, China and other countries Indicative 2. The present: The vision of NPOs in respecting human dignity, their Syllabus social administration and their contributions to the modern world

171

3. The future: Challenges of NPOs such as war, economy situation, government policy and social values 4. Case Study (1): NPOs in Hong Kong 5. Case Study (2): NPOs in mainland China and Taiwan 6. Case Study (3): International NPOs Learning & Lecture Teaching The core content of the course will be conveyed through lectures. To benefit Methodology fully from lectures, students will be expected and encouraged to complete pre-assigned learning materials in advance.

Seminar Seminars are used to reinforce and critically analyse the concepts and knowledge learned in lectures. Special topics and learning materials will be assigned before the seminars. Through debates, group discussions, case studies, and role play, students are encouraged to share their ideas and thoughts with the class and facilitate their learning in a collaborative way. They are also encouraged to share their community service experiences at different NPOs.

Visit Several visits to some local representative non-profit organisations will be arranged to give students tangible and direct experiences that pertain to what they have learnt in the course. These visits enrich students' learning by exposing them to experiences outside the classroom and make their learning becomes more concrete, meaningful and memorable. Assessment Specific assessment % Course intended learning Methods in methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed Alignment (a) (b) (c) (d) with Course 1. Group Presentation 30%     Intended 2. Class Performance 10%     Learning 3. Individual 30%     Outcomes Reflection 4. Examination 30%     Total 100% Group Presentation Each group of students will select a case or a special topic related to the development of NPO, its contribution to the society and its future direction for presentation. The chosen NPO is preferably the one set up in the students’ field of study. This learning activity is to facilitate students’ cooperative learning and to train their presentation, interpretation and organisation skills. Emphasis will also be put on the applications of the theories and knowledge learnt in lectures.

Class Performance Students will be required to actively contribute to and participate in the lecture and seminar. Short quizzes will be arranged in order to assess students’ understanding of the topics discussed in the lesson.

Individual Reflection

172

Students are required to write an individual reflection on evaluating their learning processes and outcomes during and after attending the course. Students are especially encouraged to reflect on their changes in attitudes towards NPOs in Hong Kong, China and other countries, and on their community service experiences at different NPOs.

Written Examination Students’ understanding and comprehension of the course materials will be assessed by written exam. Student Class contact: Study Effort Required . Lectures 14 Hrs. . Seminars 20 Hrs. . Visits 8 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 28 Hrs. . Preparation for group presentations 28 Hrs. . Preparation for individual assignments 28 Hrs. Total student study time 126 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and 1. SINN, Elizabeth. Power and Charity: A Chinese Merchant Elite in References Colonial Hong Kong. Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press, 2003. 2. LI, Yuwen (ed.). NGOs in China and Europe: Comparisons and Contrasts. Farnham, Surrey, England; Burlington, VT: Ashgate, 2011.

References 1. Budrys, Grace. How Nonprofits Work: Case Studies in Nonprofit Organizations. Lanham: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers, 2013. 2. CARROLL, John M. Edge of Empires: Chinese Elites and British Colonials in Hong Kong. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2005. 3. Hong Kong, Benevolent City: Tung Wah and the Growth of Chinese Communities. Hong Kong: Hong Kong Museum of History, 2010. 4. JONES, Catherine. Promoting Prosperity: The Hong Kong Way of Social Policy. Hong Kong: Chinese University Press, 1990. 5. Laforest, Rachel (ed.). Government-Nonprofit Relations in Times of Recession. Montréal : McGill-Queen's University Press, 2013. 6. SALAMON, L. M. and ANHEIER, H. K. (eds.). Defining the Non- Profit Sector: A Cross-National Analysis. Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1997. 7. SINN, Elizabeth. Pacific Crossing: California Gold, Chinese Migration, and the Making of Hong Kong. Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press, 2013. 8. SKELDON, Ronald (ed.). Emigration from Hong Kong: Tendencies and Impacts. Hong Kong: The Chinese University Press, 1995. 9. TICOZZI, Sergio. Historical Documents of the Hong Kong Catholic

173

Church. Hong Kong: Catholic Archives, 1997. 10. Zunz, Olivier. Philanthropy in America: A History. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 2012.

Web Resources 1. http://ngohk.blogspot.com/ (Hong Kong Non-profit Journal) 2. http://www.wisegiving.org.hk/tc/index.aspx (WiseGiving)

Video 1. 東風破 (Merry-go-round) (2010). 千勣企業有限公司。

(updated on 30 September 2016)

174

39 Course Description Form Course Code GEN2005 Course Title Information Technology and Multimedia Applications Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives 1. Helps students develop a broad understanding of the rich mix of multimedia concepts and technologies. 2. Employs multimedia technology to improve information distribution. 3. Helps students choose appropriate forms of multimedia applications to present information.

Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) produce multimedia projects from concept to delivery. Learning (b) manage multimedia projects. (c) choose appropriate forms of multimedia applications for information Outcomes presentation. (CILOs) (d) develop a portfolio to show prospective employers or clients. (e) know how information technologies can help solve problems. (f) apply various IT skills and tools to enhance working performance as appropriate.

CILOs in

Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major- CILOs ILOs (a)    (b)    (c)    (d)     (e)    (f)   

AC-ILOs

1 2 3 4 5 6

CILO s (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) (f)

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILO s (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) (f)

175

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILO s (a)     (b)      (c)     (d)    (e)    (f)   

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILO s (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) (f)

Course Advancements in communication speed and computer technology allow one Synopsis/ to transmit and manipulate complex information, such as image, audio and Indicative video, very easily and efficiently. It has become normal for a university Syllabus graduate to possess knowledge in information technology and to know how to produce multimedia contents. This course aims to equip students with the essential skills to put together a multimedia presentation.

Learning & Course content will be delivered through lectures. Key knowledge and skills Teaching on presentation and discussion. Practical class exercises are required to Methodology implement with appropriate tools/software during lessons.

Assessment Methods in Specific % Course intended learning Alignment assessment weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course methods/tasks (Please tick as appropriate) Intended Learning (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Outcomes 1. Individual 30       Assignments 2. Group Project 40       3. Final 30    Examination Total 100 %

Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Individual Assignments Apply various IT skills and tools to enhance working performance as appropriate.

176

Group Project Choose appropriate forms of multimedia applications for information presentation. Develop a portfolio to show prospective employers or clients.

Final Examination Students will be assessed their knowledge in how information technologies can help solve problems through a final examination.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lectures 28 Hrs. . Tutorials 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 28 Hrs. . Preparation of presentations and written 62 Hrs. assignments Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Required Texts: and 1. Chapman, N. & Chapman, J. (2009). Digital Multimedia. (3th Edition). References Wiley. 2. McGloughlin, S. (2001). Multimedia: Concepts and Practice. Prentice Hall.

(updated on 30 September 2015)

177

40 Course Description Form Course Code GEN2006 Course Title Enhancing Academic English Skills Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives The objective of this course is to further make students competent and confident in using English accurately and fluently. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended a. interpret the inferred, connotative and figurative meanings in a text Learning b. paraphrase and summarize texts to make better communication Outcomes c. write and inquire appropriately in a given topic with the skills of academic (CILOs) writing using academic and idiomatic vocabulary and correct citation styles d. evaluate and select the available sources of information critically for academic writing e. draw outlines for discussion based on the collection of information and ideas f. produce a short academic essay with accuracy and fluency CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

and Major- CILOs ILOs (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)   (e)   (f)  

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e)  (f) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e)  (f) 

178

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)   (c)   (d)   (e)    (f)  

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e)  (f) 

Course This course is intended to help students further develop their language skills Synopsis/ in academic writing in English that is required at the university level. The Indicative course aims to enable students to gain better understanding of the grammar Syllabus and the language use. By the end of the course, students should be able to write well-organized summaries and short essays following the conventions of academic writing, using appropriate expressions. Learning & Lectures Teaching Course content will be delivered primarily through lecture. Key knowledge Methodology and skills on presentation, discussion, critical reading and essay writing will be covered.

Seminars It is used to help students gain better understanding of the topics covered in lectures. They are also used to strengthen students’ oral presentation skills through individual presentations and class discussion. Learning progress of students will be monitored and feedback and support will also be provided as appropriate.

179

Assessment Specific % Course intended learning Methods in assessment weighting outcomes to be assessed Alignment methods/tasks (Please tick as appropriate) with Course (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Intended 1. Assignments 40%      Learning 2. Presentations 30%    Outcomes and discussions 3. Examinations 30%     Total 100 %

Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignments Student’s ability in using English and presenting ideas can be assessed by written assignments.

Presentations and discussions Student’s ability to present information and ideas orally can be assessed by individual oral presentations and group discussions.

Examinations Student’s ability in comprehending English texts, presenting ideas and writing effectively can be assessed by the final examination. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lectures 14 Hrs. . Seminars 28 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 28 Hrs. . Preparation of presentations and assignments 62 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Nil References References 1. Bailey, S. (2003). Academic Writing: A Practical Guide for Students. London: Nelson Thornes Ltd. [Part 1, 2,3 and 4] 2. Giltrow, J. (2002). Academic Writing: Writing and Reading in the Disciplines (3rd ed.). Ontario: Broadview Press Ltd. 3. Giltrow, J., Gooding, R. A., Burgoyne, D. & Sawatsky, M (2005). Academic Writing: An Introduction. Ontario: Broadview Press Ltd. 4. Hamp-Lyons, L. & Heasley, B. (2006). Study Writing: A Course in

180

Writing Skills for Academic Purposes. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 5. McCarthy, M. & O'Dell, F. (2008). Academic Vocabulary in Use. Cambridge: Cambridge UP.

(updated as at 29 July 2015)

181

41 41 Course Description Form Course Code GEN2010 Course Title English for Business Contexts Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite GEN1001 Developing English Language Skills Objectives The objectives of this course include familiarizing students with English in different business contexts such as accounting, business law, economics, finance, management, and marketing; listening, reading, watching, explaining, analyzing, and evaluating different types of business texts; as well as using business glossaries to compose passages and articles. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) read critically a given piece of business article; Learning (b) listen critically a given piece of business news; Outcomes (c) summarize the main points of a given piece of business text; (CILOs) (d) critically analyse and evaluate the content of a given piece of business reading/news; (e) speak and write with correct business terminologies for different business contexts. CILOs in

Alignment PILOs with PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)     (b)     (c)    (d)     (e)   

AC-ILOs

Os CIL 1 2 3 4 5 6 (a)    (b)    (c)   (d)    (e) 

FN-ILOs

CIL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)   (e) 

MK-ILOs

CIL 1 2 3 4 5 6 (a)   (b)  

182

HSM-ILOs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CIL Os (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) 

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ Using authentic materials provides great motivation to student learning. This Indicative course adopts the pedagogical approach to link business glossaries to students’ Syllabus daily life. In the first part of the course, students will review business glossaries in different contexts. The second part of the course will focus on the practical use of these glossaries in our daily life through listening, watching, and reading current news and articles.

Indicative Syllabus Major topics include review of glossaries in Accounting, Economics, Finance, Marketing, and Management; the use of business glossaries in different contexts; and skills to summarize, analyse and evaluate business text and news. Learning & Lecture Teaching Course content will be delivered primarily through lectures. Students are Methodology required to read/watch pre-assigned materials before class in order to achieve the intended learning outcomes.

Tutorial It will help strengthen and consolidate students’ understanding of the topics covered in lectures. Students are expected to accomplish tasks and exercises to manifest their acquisition of concepts. Assessment Methods in Specific % Course intended learning Alignment assessment weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course methods/tasks (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Participation 10%      Outcomes 2. Individual 20%      Assignments 3. Group 20%      Assignment 4. Presentation 10%      5. Exam 40%    

Total 100 %

183

Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Participation Contribution to class discussion is an essential element in the learning process. Students will be required to participate in class discussion through asking and answering questions as well as sharing their views on given topics. This will increase students’ motivation in learning, facilitate feedback and feed forward to the instructor, and develop students’ knowledge inquiry skills.

Individual Assignments There will be two individual written assignments. Students will be required to write a short summary of a business news article (written) and a short summary of business news extracted from, for example, the Economist, the South China Morning Post, the Wall Street Journal, Bloomberg, Reuters or references alike. Through these, students’ abilities in reading, listening, and writing skills in different business contexts will be assessed.

Group Assignment Students will be required to form groups of a maximum of four people. Each group will be required to search for a business report (accounting, economics, finance, management, or marketing) to analyse and evaluate the content of it. For example, accounting major students can choose to work on a financial report of HSBC (found at http://www.hsbc.com.hk/1/2/about/financialinformation/financial-reports). Students’ critical thinking and analytical skills, as well as their ability in writing with appropriate business glossaries will be assessed.

Presentation Students will be required to present what they have done in the Group Assignment. Presentation, being a part of communication skills, is crucial for all students in their future career. Being at ease when speaking in front of a group of people is of fundamental importance to one’s career pursuit. Through this, students’ ability in speaking with the correct business terminologies will be assessed.

Written Examination Student’s ability in overall achievement for the course according to the intended learning outcomes will be assessed by examination. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs.

184

Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Reference books: and 1. Kerin, R.A., Hartley, S.W., Rudelius, W. and Lau, G.T. (2013). Marketing References in Asia, 10th edition. McGraw-Hill/Irwin. 2. Mankiw, N.G. Principles of Economics, 7th edition. Mason OH: South- Western Cengage Learning, 2014. 3. Robbins, S. P. and Coulter, M. Management, 12th edition. Englewood Cliffs NJ: Prentice Hall, 2013. 4. Ross, S., Westerfield, R., & Jordan, B. (2013). Essentials of Corporate Finance (8th edition). McGraw-Hill. 5. Spiceland, J. D., Thomas, W., Herrmann, D. (2013). Financial Accounting, 3rd Edition. New York: McGraw Hill. 6. Stott, V. (2010). Introduction to Hong Kong Business Law, 4th edition. Singapore: Pearson Education South Asia. Rogers L., & Naunton J. (2012). Skills for Business Studies: A reading and writing skills book for business studies students. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Other References: 1. Bloomberg (http://www.bloomberg.com) 2. Press releases, different types of business reports available from websites of multiple national corporations such as HSBC (http://www.hsbc.com.hk) and Cathay Pacific Airways (http://www.cathaypacific.com.hk), etc. 3. Reuters (http://www.reuters.com) 4. South China Morning Post 5. The Economists 6. Wall Street Journal 7. BBC General and Business English (http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/general/)

(updated as at 29 July 2015)

185

42 Course Description Form 41 Course Code GEN3003 Course Title Business Communication in English Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives The objective of this course is to develop students’ skills and strategies for effective communication in English for a variety of business purposes and in various business contexts. Through a variety of task-based contextualised activities, students will interact with one another for effective business communication. In the learning process, students are encouraged to make use of different types of learning materials and of electronic tools, and apply their English knowledge and skills to the business environment. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended e. identify the different formats and styles in English used for different business Learning purposes and contexts; Outcomes f. analyse and respond to different types of business texts; (CILOs) g. produce a wide variety of writing required in text genres for business communication; and h. develop the confidence to initiate an exchange and give a presentation in front of others in a business context. CILOs in

Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major- ILOs CILOs (a)    (b)    (c)    (d)   

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d) 

L O MK-ILOs

186

1 2 3 4 5 6

(a)    (b)    (c)   (d)   

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d) 

Course 1. Critical reading skills for the comprehension of business texts Synopsis/ 2. Writing skills for different business purposes: notes, circulars, notices, Indicative forms, memoranda, fax, emails, letters, agenda, minutes, proposals and Syllabus reports 3. Speaking skills in business-related situations: presenting, discussing, negotiating, making suggestions, clarifying 4. Listening strategies in business situations

Learning & Lectures Teaching The course content will be delivered generally by lectures. Students are Methodology expected to read the pre-assigned materials before the class in order to achieve the intended learning outcomes.

Seminars Students have the chance to clarify concepts discussed in the lectures and/or examine elaboration on certain issues. Topics will be provided to integrate formal analysis into context to ensure students’ understanding of the subjects taught in the lectures. Assessment Methods in Course intended learning Alignment outcomes to be assessed Specific assessment % with Course (Please tick as methods/tasks weighting Intended appropriate) Learning (a) (b) (c) (d) Outcomes 1. Written 30%    Assignments 2. Projects and 20%    Presentations 3. Simulated Meeting 20%    and Role Playing (Job Interview) 4. Examinations 30%    Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

187

Written Assignments The written assignments include different types of business documents and could be completed either in class or after class. Student’s general understanding in business communication and their application of the English communication skills can be assessed by written assignments.

Projects and Presentations Each group of students will do a project and presentation after conducting an investigation into a real business. The analysis into the particular business will be assessed in a written report and presentation.

Simulated Meeting and Role Playing (Job Interview) These are task-based contextualised activities which provide good opportunities for students to apply and polish their skills for effective business communication through their interaction with one another. Students’ application of their listening, speaking and writing skills will be assessed.

Examinations There will be a final examination to assess students’ overall achievement for the course according to the related intended learning outcomes. They are designed to assess students’ basic knowledge of business communication.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lectures 14 Hrs. . Seminars 28 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 28 Hrs. . Preparation of presentations and assignment 62 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Nil References References 1. Bilbow, G. T. (2004). Business Writing for Hong Kong, 3rd edition. Hong Kong: Longman. 2. Bilbow, G.T. (1996). Business Speaking for Hong Kong. Hong Kong: Longman. 3. Geffner, A. B. (2010). Business English: The Writing Skills You Need for Today’s Workplace, 5th edition. New York: Barron’s. 4. Lehman, Carol M. (2011). Business Communication, 16th edition. Mason, OH: South-Western Cengage Learning. 5. Macintosh, D. (1994). English for Business. Hong Kong: Book Marketing

188

Ltd. 6. Parkinson, Dilys (ed). (2000). Oxford Business English Dictionary: for learners of English. Oxford: Oxford University Press. 7. Roman, K. (2000). Writing that Works: How to Communicate Effectively in Business. New York: Quill. 8. Sweeney, S. (2003). English for Business Communication, 2nd edition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 9. Taylor, S. (2004). Model Business Letters, Emails & Other Business Documents. London: Prentice Hall. 10. Thompson, Kenneth. (2007). English for Meetings. Oxford: Oxford University Press. 11. Walker, Carolyn. (2008). English for Business Studies in Higher Education Studies. Reading: Garnet Publishing.

(updated as at 30 September 2015)

189

43 Course Description Form 1 Course Code GEN3004 Course Title Report Writing Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite GEN2006 Enhancing Academic English Skills; IELTS 6.0 Objectives This course integrates academic and professional English writing skills through the exploration of the genre of reports. Students will learn to write reports for various purposes in academic and professional contexts using different approaches, styles and registers. The merging of academic English and disciplinary knowledge fostered by this course will enhance students’ communicative competence which is required for both academic and professional pursuits. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) identify the functions and purposes of different types of reports Learning and the linguistic and rhetorical features associated with each; Outcomes (b) develop academic reports that evidence critical inquiry into (CILOs) selected issues, using appropriate structures; (c) compile professional reports following professional norms with consideration of situational and contextual factors; (d) synthesise sources and organise ideas logically in appropriate formats and styles; (e) adapt writing styles and registers to suit different academic and professional contexts. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major- CILO s ILOs (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)   (e)  

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)   (c)   (d)  (e) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)   (b)  (c)  (d) 

190

(e) 

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)    (c)    (d)    (e)   

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) 

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ Report writing is an essential skill in most academic and professional Indicative contexts, and mastery of this skill will provide an edge for students in Syllabus both their current study and future career. Capitalising on students’ prior training in academic English writing and their disciplinary knowledge, this course explores the structures and rhetorical features of common academic and professional reports within various disciplines, with a focus on practical applications and pertinence to academic and professional norms. Such training will further develop students’ ability to express their critical thinking in writing, using English that features clarity, conciseness and precision with appropriate style.

Indicative Syllabus This course reviews the form and function of various types of reports, such as research reports, case analysis reports and experiment reports, and explores the language features and writing techniques applicable to their structural components. Students will familiarize themselves with the generic sub-skills in the broad genre as well as the specific requirements of professional reports through discipline-based collaborative writing practice.

Learning & Lecture Teaching Generic concepts and skills in report writing will be discussed in Methodology lectures. For each lecture, sample materials will be drawn from various disciplines so as to enhance the scope of coverage while demonstrating the transferability of such knowledge.

Tutorial Students from different disciplines will be assigned to different tutorial groups to facilitate discussion on discipline-specific topics and professional subgenres in order to help students achieve the intended

191

learning outcomes. In addition to consolidation tasks and exercises related to the topics covered in the lectures, students will also be expected to engage in collaborative writing activities designed to facilitate their completion of the Group Report assignment. Assessment Methods in Specific % Course intended learning Alignment assessment weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course methods/tasks (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Individual 20%     Outcomes Report 2. Group Report 30%     3. Reflections 10%      4. Examination 40%      Total 100 %

Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Individual Report Each student will be required to write an academic report individually on an issue of his/her own choice from his/her discipline of study. Students will need to conduct research on their chosen topics and present their findings/recommendations in a proper format following academic conventions. Their knowledge of the purposes and textual features of different types of academic reports will find application in this assignment.

Group Report In groups, students will complete one report writing task for each type of the professional reports covered in this course. In each task, the group will identify one issue or problem case in their discipline that they have encountered either in their studies or during their practicum/internship, analyse the problem, and collaborate on the report under the guidance of the tutor. Peer and tutor feedback will be collected during the process. At the end of the course, the group will select the best written report for submission. This assignment will facilitate the development of critical thinking and professional writing skills using group work and peer learning while encouraging collaboration as will be required in actual professional settings.

Reflections Students’ engagement in the learning process will be documented by their reflections on each tutorial. They will be encouraged to reflect on their own performance, note down what they have learnt from their peers or from any of the writing and learning activities.

Written Examination Student’s overall attainment of the intended learning outcomes will be assessed by examination.

192

Student Study Class contact: Effort . Lecture 14 Hrs. Required . Tutorial 28 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study (reading assigned materials) 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reference books: Reading List 1. Beins, B. (2012). APA style simplified: writing in psychology, and education, nursing, and sociology. Massachusetts: Wiley-Blackwell. References 2. Hyland, K., & Candlin, C. N. (1999). Writing: texts, processes, and practices. London: Longman. 3. Jay, R. (2003). How to write proposals and reports that get results. London: Prentice Hall. 4. Kail, R. V. (2015). Scientific writing for psychology: Lessons in clarity and style. Los Angeles: SAGE. 5. Mort, S. (1992). Professional report writing. Aldershot: Gower. 6. RMIT University Learning Lab. Reports. http://emedia.rmit.edu.au/learninglab/content/reports-0 7. Sussams, J. E. (1998). How to write effective reports. Aldershot: Gower. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

193

44 Course Description Form 1 Course Code HSM2002 Course Title Introduction to Health Services Management Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite ECN1002 Microeconomics ECN1003 Macroeconomics MGT1001 Introduction to Management Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Define, explain, and effectively apply basic analytical principles to Learning managerial problems in health and healthcare organisations, under Outcomes different assumptions regarding for-profit orientation and non-profit (CILOs) orientation, the business environment, information, risk, external effects, public good characteristics, and the policy and regulatory framework. (b) Provide analytical support to managerial decision-making in health and healthcare organisations, under different assumptions regarding for- profit orientation and non-profit orientation, the business environment, information, risk, external effects, public good characteristics, and the policy and regulatory framework. (c) Evaluate conditions and problems in designing and applying analysis to managerial problems in health and healthcare organisations, and to exploit such evaluations to formulate analytically-grounded recommendations for action under different assumptions regarding for- profit orientation and non-profit orientation, the business environment, information, risk, external effects, public good characteristics, and the policy and regulatory framework. (d) Interpret and assess the managerial implications of current problems and issues in health and healthcare production, delivery, operations, and reform, and effectively communicate the conclusions through written and oral presentations. (e) Understand the best practices of health services management in Hong Kong, especially with reference to the dominant group of public and private non-profit-oriented organisations. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs

and Major- CILO s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)      (b)      (c)       (d)     (e)    

HSM-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (a)      (b)    

194

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course surveys the principles which govern efficient and effective Indicative management in health and healthcare organisations. It aims to introduce Syllabus students to the management problems which will be discussed in detail under other courses in the HSM Major. The lectures are divided into three parts. The first part explains the fundamental managerial objective of value delivery in healthcare, both in the abstract and in terms of an intuitively appealing leadership-driven framework. Part two applies the concepts expounded in part one to micro-level management in health and healthcare organisations, with particular reference to organisation design and coordination, human resources and staff motivation, teams and team effectiveness, communication, power, politics and conflict resolution, learning and innovation, risk management, and quality improvement. Part three covers the macro-aspects of management in health and healthcare organisations, with particular reference to strategic thinking and competitive advantage, profit-orientation and non-profit orientation, the enhancement of strategic alliances, health information strategies and systems, compliance with health policies and regulations, consumerism and ethics, and globalization. Managerial problems and issues in Hong Kong’s healthcare system will also be discussed, mainly by means of case studies and experience-sharing with guest speakers from the profession.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Review of elementary principles. 1.1. The managerial challenge to deliver value in healthcare, especially with reference to cost control and different degrees of organisational, behavioral, and regulatory complexity. 1.2. Leadership and management in health and healthcare organisations: an operational framework for action. 2. Micro-level management in health and healthcare organisations. 2.1. Design and coordination in health and healthcare organisations: differentiation, consistency and integration, centralization and decentralization, service lines and staffing, parallel and hybrid structures, multiple organisational goals (especially non-profit- orientation), and governance. 2.2. Human resources management and staff motivation in health and healthcare organisations: measurement, processes, and incentives to accumulate human capital under for-profit and non-profit assumptions. 2.3. Teams and team effectiveness in health and healthcare organisations, especially with reference to types and the corresponding measurement of performance and effectiveness.

195

2.4. Communication in health and healthcare organisations: networks, stakeholders, social media, barriers, and leadership. 2.5. Politics and conflict resolution in health and healthcare organisations: the political nature of power, power relations, power as a source of conflict, and conflict management strategies. 2.6. Learning and innovation in health and healthcare organisations: structural complexity, feedback, and the management of learning, innovative thinking, and knowledge in the organisation. 2.7. Assuring and improving quality in health and healthcare organisations: interpretation, measurement, approaches, frameworks, and processes. 3. Macro-level management in health and healthcare organisations. 3.1. Strategic thinking and competitive advantage: values, mission, and vision, generic strategies, long run, short run, competitiveness and organisational structure, competitiveness and the use of internal resources. 3.2. Managing strategic alliances in health and healthcare: types, forms, and functions, stages in alliance building, entry and exit problems. 3.3. Managing in compliance with the policy and regulatory framework, especially with regard to the rationale of regulations, their impact under different assumptions regarding for-profit and non-profit- orientation, the methods to ensure strategic consistency. 3.4. Health information strategies and systems: concepts and definitions, factors driving the demand for information technology-based solutions, success factors in technology acceptance, strategic alignment of information systems, and systems performance measurement. 3.5. Consumerism and ethics in health and healthcare: consumer-driven markets, retail medicine, the impact of insurance and reimbursement practices, and the ethical supply of healthcare. 3.6. Managing globalization in healthcare, especially with regard to the flows of patients, workers, and regulations across international borders. 3.7. Problems and issues associated with health and healthcare in Hong Kong, and opportunities for reform. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Assignments 10%      Outcomes 2. Project 30%      3. Test 20%      4. Final Examination 40%     

196

Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignment and Test Students will be required to finish assignments and tutorial exercises that cover probability calculation and data interpretation.

Project Students have to select an appropriate topic for presentation and report submission so that they can have more understanding for a particular session regarding to health services management.

Final Examination Student’s ability in comprehending English texts, presenting ideas and writing effectively can be assessed by examination. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Patrice Spath (2013), Introduction to Healthcare Quality Management, References 2ed Edition, AUPHA, Health Administration Press 2. Dunn, R.T. Dunn and Haimann’s Healthcare Management 9th edition. Chicago: Health Administration Press, 2010.

References 1. Burns, L.R., Bradley, E.H., and Weiner, B.J. Shortell and Kaluzny’s Health Care Management: Organization Design and Behavior 6th edition. New York: Delmar, Cengage Learning, 2012. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

197

45 1 Course Description Form Course Code HSM2003 Course Title Health Policies and Healthcare Systems Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 QF Credit 14 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives This course introduces the student to the design and implementation of public policy in health and healthcare, and the institutions and systems to which the analysis and policies are applied. Its principal aim is to provide knowledge of the health policies which underlies the healthcare systems. The instruction is divided into two parts. Part One describes the formulation and implementation of policies and regulations in health and healthcare, and explains the efficiency, equity, and need basis of government intervention in market activities and initiatives towards reform. Part Two reviews the institutional structure of the health and healthcare markets, The lectures also review healthcare institutions and systems in different countries, with special emphasis on Hong Kong and China. Current and future trends and developments will also be discussed. Course Upon completion of this course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Examine the social and behavioural determinants of health and verbalize how Learning public health policy and healthcare systems could address the health related Outcomes issues through an intersectoral system; (CILOs) (b) Evaluate the demographic, cultural, political and regulatory perspectives influencing the formulation of health policies at local and global levels; (c) Describe the healthcare systems and factors that influence the efficiency and effectiveness of these systems. (d) Explain the health care reform process and identify barriers to these reforms.

CILOs in

Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major- ILOs CILOs (a)  (b)    (c)  (d) 

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)     (b)      (c)       (d)     

198

Course 1. Introduction to health and epidemiology Synopsis/ 1.1. The social determinants of health Indicative 1.2. Relationship between health inequalities and social justice. Syllabus 1.3. Approaches in improving public health 2. Health and healthcare policies and regulations. 2.1. Social choice, social insurance, and the formulation and implementation of public policy and the regulatory framework in health and healthcare. 3. Health systems 3.1. Changing needs and motivations of stakeholders of health care systems 3.2. Organisational design : levels of care 3.3. Accountability in care : Measurements and quality improvements in healthcare delivery systems 3.4. Comparative health systems 4. Healthcare reform : 4.1. Historical development of health care delivery systems 4.2. Healthcare delivery and reform : government’s role 4.3. Problems and issues associated with health and healthcare in Hong Kong, and directions and opportunities for reform. Learning & Lectures Teaching Course content will be delivered primarily through lectures. Key knowledge Methodology and skills on presentation, discussion, critical reading and essay writing will be covered.

Tutorials They are used to help students gain better understanding of the topics covered in lectures. They are also used to strengthen students’ oral presentation skills through individual presentations and class discussion. Learning progress of students will be monitored. Feedback and support will also be provided as appropriate. Assessment Methods in Course intended learning Alignment outcomes to be assessed Specific assessment % with Course (Please tick as methods/tasks weighting Intended appropriate) Learning (a) (b) (c) (d) Outcomes 1. Written 30%     assignments 2. Written 40%     examination 3. Project 30%     Total 100% Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Written assignments Student’s ability in using English and presenting ideas can be assessed by written assignments.

199

Written examination Student’s ability in comprehending English texts, presenting ideas and writing effectively can be assessed by examination.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 28 Hrs. . Preparation of presentations and written 62 Hrs. assignments Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Shi, L. Introduction to Health Policy, Health Administration Press, References Chicago, 2014. 2. Dlugacz, Y.D., Introduction to health care quality : theory, methods, and tooles, Hoboken, New Jersey : Jossey-Bass, 2017. (eBook)

Reference 1. Bacon-Shone, J. Hong Kong’s Health System : reflection, perspectives and vision, 2006. 2. Burke, J., Health Analytics: Gaining the insights to Transform Health Care, 2013. 3. Longest, B.B., Managing Health Services Organizations ad Systems, 6th Ed., 2014 4. Strome, T.L., Healthcare Analytics for Quality and Performance Improvement, 2013

Updated on 29 August 2018 Included in BBA programme.

200

46 Course Description Form 1 Course Code HSM2004 Course Title Introduction to Healthcare Economics & Health Financing Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite ECN1002 Microeconomics ECN1003 Macroeconomics Objectives The objectives of this course are: (i) review the fundamental concepts and principles underlying the economic analysis of health and healthcare, (ii) review applications of this economic analysis under different assumptions regarding profit-orientation, competition, market structure, information structure, and the regulatory environment, and (iii) study real-world cases involving such applications, especially in a Hong Kong context. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Define, explain, and effectively apply economic concepts and principles Learning to health services management, under different conditions and Outcomes assumptions regarding for-profit orientation and non-profit orientation, (CILOs) information, risk-bearing, external effects, public good characteristics, the regulatory framework, and public policy. (b) Construct economic analysis to support managerial decision-making in health and healthcare organisations, under different conditions and assumptions regarding for-profit orientation and non-profit orientation, information, risk-bearing, external effects, public good characteristics, the regulatory framework, and public policy. (c) Evaluate the analytical and empirical conditions under which economic analysis can be applied to managerial problems in health and healthcare organisations, and to exploit such evaluations to formulate recommendations for action under different conditions and assumptions regarding for-profit orientation and non-profit orientation, information, risk-bearing, external effects, public good characteristics, the regulatory framework, and public policy. (d) Interpret and assess the economic and policy implications of current problems and issues in health and healthcare production, delivery, management, and reform, and to effectively communicate the conclusions through written and oral presentations. (e) Understand the economic principles which underlie the best practices of health services management in Hong Kong, especially with reference to the dominant group of public and private non-profit-oriented organisations. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)      (b)      (c)       (d)     (e)    

201

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)      (b)     (c)    (d)     (e)   

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course introduces the student to healthcare economics and health Indicative financing. Its principal aim is to provide knowledge of the economic Syllabus analysis which underlies the other courses in the HSM Major. The instruction is divided into three parts. The first part reviews the basic positive economic concepts of demand, supply, pricing, industrial organisation, and resource allocation, and the basic welfare economic concepts of external effects, public goods, and social choice. Part two applies the concepts and principles expounded in part one to explain the production, demand, supply, resource allocation, and markets for health and healthcare, with special reference to the risks and risk-bearing associated with sickness, information imperfection and asymmetry, and insurance and agency problems. Part three is devoted to the economic problems and issues associated with Hong Kong’s healthcare system, especially with regard to the characteristics of for- profit and non-profit organisations. This part is mainly delivered by means of case studies and experience-sharing with guest speakers from the profession.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Positive economic principles: rational choice, demand, supply, markets, resource allocation, efficiency, and industrial organisation. 2. Production, demand, supply, resource allocation, organisational, and market characteristics in health and healthcare. Risk and risk-bearing when well or sick, information imperfection and asymmetry, insurance, agency and their importance in health and healthcare markets. 3. Normative or welfare economic principles: external effects, public goods and the demand, supply and markets for public goods, social choice and individual values. 4. Production, demand, supply, resource allocation, organisational, and market characteristics in health and healthcare. 5. Health financing, risk and risk-bearing when well or sick, information imperfection and asymmetry, insurance, agency and their importance in health and healthcare markets.

Assessment Specific assessment % Course intended learning Methods in methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed Alignment (Please tick as appropriate) with Course (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Intended 1. Assignments 10%      2. Project 30%     

202

Learning 3. Test 20%      Outcomes 4. Final Examination 40%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignment Student’s ability in using English and presenting ideas can be assessed by written assignments. Project Students have to analyse different case studies and apply the theories regarding to health economics and financing. Test Students’ ability to understand the basic theories regarding to health economics and financing. Final Examination Student’s ability in comprehending English texts, presenting ideas and writing effectively can be assessed by examination. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Getzen, T.E. Health Economics and Financing 5th edition. New York: References John Wiley & Sons, 2012.

References 1. Folland, S., Goodman, A.C. and Stano, M. The Economics of Health and Health Care 6th edition. Upper Saddle River NJ: Prentice-Hall, 2010. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

203

47 Course Description Form 1 Course Code HSM3003 Course Title Healthcare Information Systems Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives The objectives of this course are: (i) review the fundamental concepts and ideas underlying the design and management of information technology and information systems in healthcare organisations, (ii) review applications of these concepts and ideas under different assumptions regarding profit-orientation, competition, market structure, and the regulatory environment, and (iii) study real-world cases involving (i) and (ii), especially in a Hong Kong context. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Understand the functions of computerized information systems designed Learning for health services management and knowledge management in health Outcomes and healthcare. (CILOs) (b) Interpret the objectives of health services management and knowledge management in health and healthcare, and translate them into output requirements, while at the same time integrating clinical and business information. (c) Apply the laws relating to personal data protection and the use of data quality control tools and systems to protect personal information from theft or damage on the part of hackers, viruses, and spyware. (d) Explain the operation of computers, input/output devices, secondary storage devices, and communication networks which support healthcare information systems and health and healthcare knowledge management systems. (e) Compare the costs and benefits of different types of health and healthcare data processing systems, and formulate and implement decisions concerning the purchase and use of such systems. (f) Understand the features of systems designed for the management of personnel, facilities, equipment, and supply chains in health and healthcare organisations, together with systems designed to support electronic medical records, automated patient scheduling, automated prescription generation, knowledge management, and other healthcare and clinical functions, especially systems that are currently employed in Hong Kong. CILOs in

Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major- CILOs ILOs (a)     (b)      (c)       (d)     (e)     (f)

204

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)   (b)  (c)   (d)    (e)     (f)   

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course aims to provide students with the knowledge to define strategic Indicative and operational objectives for information systems to support health services Syllabus management, and to guide the design and acquisition of information systems to meet these objectives. Particular emphasis will be placed upon the conceptualization of variables to be incorporated in such systems and their design, including an understanding of hardware, software and communication links, and the proper interpretation of information processing and the utilization of information for the purposes of program management. Applications to human resource management in health and healthcare organisations, clinical data collection and storage, and patient management (including the maintenance of confidentiality) then follow. Problems and issues associated with information systems in Hong Kong’s health and healthcare system will also be discussed, especially through the analysis of profit-oriented and non-profit-oriented organisations, case studies, and experience-sharing with guest speakers from the profession. This course will briefly review the recently developed information-based subject of knowledge management in health and healthcare. Beginning with the ideas of the organisation as a complex system endowed with the ability to learn and innovate, knowledge management – the identification of relevant data and the efficient transformation of data into information and then knowledge under a three dimensional schema involving technology, processes and people, and the efficient use of knowledge, has become an essential element in the healthcare manager’s skills set. The lectures will explore the definitions and interpretations of knowledge, the knowledge spiral and its support in data mining and information processing, knowledge capture, single and double loop learning, hard and soft systems, the intelligence continuum, and applications such as the network-centric organisation of healthcare production and delivery. Because of the technical nature of these concepts, the instruction will mainly take the form of case studies.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to systems analysis. 1.1. Operational and strategic uses of information systems in healthcare management and health insurance. 1.2. Systems analysis I: Analysis of organisational activities and procedures and flowcharting.

205

1.3. Systems analysis II: Translating organisational activities into output requirements. 1.4. Input design I: Derivation of Input content from output requirements. 1.5. Input Design II: Data quality control and management of viruses and spyware. 1.6. Internal organisation and operations of computer systems. 2. Healthcare information systems. 2.1. Healthcare applications software. 2.2. Electronic medical (health) records. 2.3. Data communication and network management. 2.4. Patient scheduling software. 2.5. Medical records privacy and ethical issues relating to patient information. 2.6. The US Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) and applications of information technology to health and healthcare management. 2.7. Data encryption, digital signatures, and other methods of user authentication. 2.8. Knowledge management in health and healthcare organisations. 2.9. Review of basic concepts and principles. (i) Definition of knowledge as contextualized information. (ii) Knowledge management as the optimal generation, representation, storage, transfer, transformation, and selection of knowledge for use. (iii) The knowledge spiral: data mining, information process, and knowledge generation. 2.10. Applications of knowledge management in health and healthcare organisations and systems. (i) Case study: the British National Health Service (NHS) and its Connecting for Health initiative. (ii) Case study: NHS Direct and knowledge sharing. 3. Healthcare information systems and knowledge management in Hong Kong, with special reference to the Hospital Authority and the dominant group of public and private non-profit-oriented organisations. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Project 30%      Outcomes 2. Test 20%      3. Final Examination 50%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

206

Project Students have to find out the state-of-the-art healthcare information system that can apply to Hong Kong situation in order to bring benefits to local patients or to the frontline staff. Test Students’ ability to understand the basic understanding regarding to healthcare information systems. Final Examination Student’s ability in comprehending English texts, presenting ideas and writing effectively can be assessed by examination. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Gerald L. Glandon; Detlev H. Smaltz and Donna K. Slovensky (2014), References Information Systems: For Healthcare Management, 8th edition, Health Administration Press, Chicago 2. Wager, K.A., Lee, F.W. and Glaser, J.P. Healthcare Information Systems: A Practical Approach for Healthcare Management 2nd Edition. San Francisco CA: Jossey-Bass Imprints, 2009. 3. Wickramasinghe, N., Bali, R.K., Lehaney, B., Schaffer, J.L. and Gibbons, M.C. Healthcare Knowledge Management Primer. New York: Routledge, 2009.

References 1. Electronic Medical Records Software http://www.mdsmedicalsoftware.com/medicalsoftware/EMR/allscripts/i ndex.php 2. Emergency Department Information System http://www.wellsoft.com/product_overview/product_overview.php 3. Employee Scheduling http://www.celayix.net/default.asp http://www.cybershift.com/index.asp 4. Hospital Enterprise-Wide Software http://www.cerner.com/public/ http://www.gehealthcare.com/usen/products.html http://www.medical.siemens.com/webapp/wcs/stores/servlet/CategoryD isplay~q_catalogId~e_ -1~a_categoryId~e_100010~a_catTree~e_100010~a_langId~e_- 1~a_storeId~e_10001.htm

207

5. Hospital Laboratory Management http://www.capterra.com/lab-management-software 6. Hospital Medical Records Coding and Billing http://www.ingenix.com/Products/Hospitals/ 7. ICU Tele-Monitoring http://visicu.com/products/index.html 8. Medical Decision Support http://www.logicalimages.com/prodVDx.htm 9. Healthcare in Hong Kong http://www.gov.hk/en/about/abouthk/factsheets/docs/health_department .pdf 10. e-Health in Hong Kong http://www.pcpd.org.hk/english/activities/files/dr_quat.pdf http://www.ehealth.org.hk/ (updated as at 29 July 2015)

208

48 Course Description Form 1 Course Code HSM3004 Course Title Human Resources Management in Healthcare Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MGT1001 Introduction to Management Objectives The objectives of this course are: (i) review the fundamental concepts and ideas underlying the management of human resources in healthcare organisations, (ii) review applications of this analysis under different assumptions regarding profit-orientation, competition, market structure, and the regulatory environment, and (iii) study real-world cases involving (i) and (ii), especially in a Hong Kong context. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Articulate the principles of management as applied to human resources Learning in health and healthcare organisations, in particular in the key functional Outcomes areas of staff planning, recruitment and selection, training and (CILOs) development, performance appraisal, job design and analysis, benefits and compensation, employer-employee relations, and legal and regulatory requirements. (b) Understand and be able to comply with the major laws and regulations which circumscribe the management of human resources in the healthcare and health organisations. (c) Demonstrate knowledge of employee motivation techniques, delegation and decentralization in human resource use, and of productivity enhancement in health and healthcare organisations. (d) Identify the impact on health and healthcare employees of the objectives and actions of managers and supervisors, especially as distinguished by for-profit and non-profit orientations. (e) Understand issues and problems in the area of employee welfare in health and healthcare organisations, for example harassment and discrimination in the workplace. (f) Understand the problems, challenges and opportunities facing human resource managers in Hong Kong’s healthcare sector, especially with regard to structural and operational reforms in non-profit-oriented organisations. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)      (b)      (c)      (d)     (e)     (f)

L O HSM-ILOs

209

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

(a)    (b)    (c)    (d)  (e)     (f)    

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course surveys the principles which govern the management of human Indicative resources in health and healthcare organisations and applications of these Syllabus principles to staff planning, recruitment and selection, training and development, performance appraisal, job design and analysis, benefits and compensation, and employer-employee relations in such organisations. Analytical and empirically-based approaches are integrated and applied in the instruction. The focus is on the knowledge and skill requirements of future managers in the health and healthcare sector. Leadership, dynamic behavior, organisational culture, learning, administrative systems, and communication networks are emphasized in establishing the ambit of human capital use and accumulation. Problems and achievements of human resources management in Hong Kong’s health and healthcare system will also be discussed through analysis of the dominant group of non-profit- oriented hospitals and healthcare organisations, case studies, and shared experience with guest speakers from the profession.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Strategic human resource management in profit-oriented and non-profit- oriented health and healthcare organisations: 1.1. Integrating human resource management and strategic management under the two environments. 1.2. Work and workforce planning and goals-oriented motivation of healthcare professionals. 1.3. Workforce diversity and its strategic effects. 1.4. Managing globalization and regionalization in the healthcare workforce. 2. Operational human resource management in profit-oriented and non-profit oriented health and healthcare organisations: 2.1. Job design and job analysis. 2.2. The legal environment and its effects. 2.3. Recruitment, staff selection, and staff retention. 2.4. Staff development and training. 2.5. Performance management. 2.6. Compensation and benefits practices. 2.7. Employee benefits planning and implementation. 2.8. Employee health, safety, and preparedness. 2.9. Managing organized labour. 2.10. Workload and input-output measurement.

210

2.11. Budgeting. 2.12. Labour productivity enhancement. 3. Human resource management in Hong Kong’s healthcare sector, with special reference to non- profit-oriented organisations. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % weighting Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. Project 30%       Outcomes 2. Test 20%       3. Final Examination 50%       Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Project Students have to analyse case studies in order to make recommendations from the point of view as an executive. Test Students’ ability to understand the practices regarding to human resources management in healthcare sector. Final Examination Student’s ability in comprehending English texts, presenting ideas and writing effectively can be assessed by examination. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Fried, B.J., Fottler, M.D. Human Resources in Healthcare: Managing References for Success 4th edition. Chicago: AUPHA/ Health Administration Press, 2015. References 1. Hernandez, S.R., O’Connor, S.J. eds. Strategic Human Resources rd Management in Health Services Organizations 3 edition. New York: Delmar Cengage Learning Press, 2010. 2. Flynn, W. J., Mathis, R. L., Jackson, J. H., Langan, P. J. Healthcare Human Resource Management. Mason, OH: Thomson South-Western, 2004. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

211

49 Course Description Form 1 Course Code HSM4001 Course Title Healthcare Operations Management Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite GEN1007 College Mathematics Objectives The objectives of this course are: (i) review the fundamental concepts and principles underlying the operations management of healthcare organisations, (ii) review applications of such ideas and principles under different assumptions regarding profit-orientation, competition, market structure, and the regulatory environment, and (iii) study real-world cases involving (i) and (ii), especially in a Hong Kong context. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Identify, distinguish, and interpret the problems and opportunities which Learning emerge in the operations management, for example, supply chain Outcomes management and logistics and facilities management in health and (CILOs) healthcare organisations, under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, risk, external effects, and the policy and regulatory environment. (b) To analyse and evaluate organisational and management structures in health and healthcare institutions and to formulate proposals to improve operational efficiency in such organisations under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, information, risk, external effects, and the public policy and regulatory environment. (c) To assess the effectiveness of goals-setting and execution processes in designed areas of operations management in health and healthcare organisations, under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, information, risk, external effects, and the policy and regulatory environment. (d) To model the processes, measure the effectiveness of performance improvement tools, techniques, and programs in health and healthcare organisations, under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, information, risk, external effects, and the public policy and regulatory environment. (e) To determine and evaluate the overall performance of health and healthcare organisations and solve operational problems in such organisations, under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, information, risk, external effects, and the public policy and regulatory environment. (f) Understand the best practices of operations management in Hong Kong’s healthcare sector, especially within the dominant group of public and private non-profit-oriented organisations. CILOs in

Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major- CILOs ILOs (a)     (b)      

212

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)   (b)     (c)   (d)     (e)       (f)     

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ Increasing complexity and change the environment under which health and Indicative healthcare decisions are made have increased the importance of operational Syllabus management, such as, supply chain management, logistics management, facilities management, and resources allocation in the supplying organisations and systems. Cost effectiveness and quality are two instances of the decisions made by operations managers which play a key role in the formulation of strategy determination of performance under such circumstances. This course reviews the theory and applications of operations management in health and healthcare organisations, under different assumptions regarding profit-orientation, risk, external effects, and the public policy and regulatory environment. It focuses on the formulation and properties of optimal decisions in operations management, especially as applied to strategic planning, process efficiency, supply chain management, logistics management, facilities management, process design, quality control, staff and resources allocation, and communication efficiency in such organisations. Problems and issues associated with operations management in Hong Kong’s health and healthcare system will also be discussed, especially through the analysis of profit-oriented and non-profit-oriented organisations, case studies, and experience-sharing with guest speakers from the profession.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Overview of healthcare operations management under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, information, risk, and the public policy and regulatory environment. 1.1. Introduction: Challenges, problems, and opportunities in healthcare operations management. 1.2. Optimizing organisation and structure in healthcare production and delivery. 1.3. Objectives, goals-setting, and implementation as supported by operations management. 2. Tools and techniques to improve operations performance in health and healthcare organisations under different assumptions regarding profit

213

orientation, information, risk, and the public policy and regulatory environment. 2.1. Methods of problem formulation and solution. 2.2. Deterministic and statistical tools for operational enhancement. 2.3. Quality management: measurement tools and performance- improving tools. 2.4. The lean enterprise. 3. Process and patient flow analysis, modeling, and improvement in health and healthcare organisations under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, information, risk, and the public policy and regulatory environment. 3.1. Scheduling and capacity management in health and healthcare organisations under such conditions. 3.2. Healthcare logistics, supply chain, and facilities management under such conditions. 4. Operations management in Hong Kong’s healthcare sector, with special reference to the dominant group of public and private non-profit-oriented organisations. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % weighting Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. Project 30%       Outcomes 2. Test 20%       3. Final Examination 50%       Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Project Students have to go to clinic or hospital to analyse their healthcare operations systems and make suggestions to solve the problems. Test Students’ ability to understand the basic theory of healthcare operations management. Final Examination Student’s ability in comprehending English texts, presenting ideas and writing effectively can be assessed by examination. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs.

214

Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Daniel B. McLaughlin and John R. Olson (2014),Healthcare Operations References Management, 2nd edition, Health Administration Press, Chicago

References 1. Ozcan, Y. A. Quantitative Methods in Health Care Management: Techniques and Applications 2nd edition. San Francisco CA: Jossey- Bass Publishers, 2009. 2. Carey, R.G. Improving Healthcare with Control Charts, Basic and Advanced SPC Methods and Case Studies. Milwaukee: ASQ Quality Press, 2003. 3. John F. Kros and Evelyn C. Brown (2013), Health Care Operations and Supply Chain Management: Operations, Planning, and Control, Jossey- Bass.

Case study material: 1. Process Fundamentals, Harvard Business School 9-696-023 2. Shouldice Hospital Limited, Harvard Business School 9-683-068 (updated as at 29 July 2015)

215

50 1 Course Description Form Course Code HSM4002 Course Title Healthcare Financial Management Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite FIN1002 Business Finance Objectives The objectives of this course are: (i) review the fundamental concepts and principles underlying financial management in healthcare organisations, (ii) review applications of these concepts and principles under different assumptions regarding profit-orientation, competition, market structure, and the regulatory environment, and (iii) study real-world cases involving (i) and (ii), especially in a Hong Kong context. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Define, explain and effectively apply accounting and financial concepts Learning and principles as they relate to management in health and healthcare Outcomes organisations, under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, (CILOs) risk, external effects, and the public policy and regulatory environment. (b) Construct and interpret financial reports to support decision-making in health and healthcare organisations by employing the principles of financial accounting and financial management. (c) Perform and interpret the methods and techniques of financial decision- making (particularly in planning and control) using computer software such as Microsoft EXCEL. (d) Evaluate problems in applying financial management concepts and techniques to the operation of health and healthcare organisations under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, risk, external effects, and the public and regulatory environment, and apply such evaluations to formulate policy recommendations. (e) Interpret and assess the financial management implications of current issues in health and healthcare delivery and reform, and effectively communicate the conclusions through written and oral presentations. (f) Understand the best practices of healthcare financial management in Hong Kong, especially with reference to the dominant group of public and private non-profit-oriented organisations. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)      (b)      (c)      (d)      (e)     (f)

HSM-ILOs

CIL

216

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (a)      (b)     (c)     (d)     (e)    (f)   

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course surveys the principles which govern financial management in Indicative health and healthcare organisations and the application of these principles to Syllabus key functional areas in such organisations, under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, risk, external effects, and the public and regulatory environment. The course is divided into four parts. The first part focuses on the principles and practices of financial accounting, and the methods for analyzing and applying financial accounting information in decision-making in health and healthcare organisations. The second part develops skills in the valuation of cash flows, and explains the different ways and means by which profit-oriented and non-profit-oriented health and healthcare organisations exploit the financial markets to raise funds and invest in projects. Part three explores managerial accounting concepts, and applies these concepts to organisational planning and control in health and healthcare organisations. Part four discusses the problems and achievements of financial management in Hong Kong’s health and healthcare system, especially through the analysis of profit-oriented and non-profit-oriented organisations, case studies, and shared experience with guest speakers from the profession.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Overview of healthcare financial management as applied to profit-oriented and non-profit- oriented organisations. 1.1. Basic principles and practices of financial accounting. 1.2. Using financial accounting methods and information to support decision-making in healthcare delivery and management. 2. Models and methods of cash flow evaluation, with special reference to the presence or absence of the profit maximization condition. 2.1. Financial markets and fund raising, with special reference to the presence or absence of profit maximization in the investment decision. 2.2. Project financing, with special reference to the presence or absence of profit maximization in the investment decision. 3. Financial and managerial accounting, planning, and control, with special reference to the presence or absence of the profit maximization condition. 4. Financial management in Hong Kong’s healthcare sector, with special reference to non-profit-oriented organisations. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate)

217

Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. Assignments 10%       Outcomes 2. Project 30%       3. Test 20%       4. Final Examination 40%       Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Assignment Student’s ability in using English and presenting ideas can be assessed by written assignments. Project Students have to analyse the case studies and apply accounting and financial concepts and principles to healthcare sector. Test Students’ ability to understand accounting and financial concepts and principles. Final Examination Student’s ability in comprehending English texts, presenting ideas and writing effectively can be assessed by examination. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Gapenski, Louis C. Healthcare Finance: An Introduction to Accounting References and Financial Management, 5th Edition. Chicago, Illinois: Health Administration Press, 2011.

References 1. Baker, Judith. J. and Baker, R. W., Health Care Finance: Basic Tools for Nonfinancial Managers, 3rd edition; Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2011. 2. Cleverley, William O., Essentials of Health Care Finance, 7th edition; Aspen Publications Hardcover, 2010.

Other Useful Learning Resources: 1. www.hfma.org (Healthcare Financial Management Association) (updated as at 29 July 2015)

218

51 Course Description Form 1 Course Code HSM4003 Course Title Quality Assurance and Risk Management in Healthcare Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite FIN1002 Business Finance Objectives The objectives of this course are: (i) review the fundamental concepts and principles underlying risk and quality management in healthcare organisations, (ii) review applications of these concepts and principles under different assumptions regarding profit-orientation, competition, market structure, information structure, and the regulatory environment, and (iii) study real-world cases involving (i) and (ii), especially in a Hong Kong context. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Define, explain, and effectively apply quality assurance and risk Learning management concepts and principles to health services management, Outcomes under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, information, (CILOs) risk-bearing, external effects, public good characteristics, the regulatory framework, and public policy. (b) Construct quality and risk- based analysis to support managerial decision-making in health and healthcare organisations, under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, information, risk identification, risk assessment, risk mitigation, risk-bearing, external effects, public good characteristics, the regulatory framework, and public policy. (c) Evaluate problems in applying quality- and risk- based analysis to management problems in health and healthcare organisations, and apply such evaluations to formulate recommendations for action under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, information, risk identification, risk assessment, risk mitigation, risk-bearing, external effects, public good characteristics, the regulatory framework, and public policy. (d) Interpret and assess the implications of quality assurance and risk management to current issues in health and healthcare production, delivery, management, and reform, and effectively communicate the conclusions through written and oral presentations. (e) Understand the quality assurance and risk management principles which underlie the best practices of health services management in Hong Kong, especially with reference to the dominant group of public and private non-profit-oriented organisations. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)      (b)      (c)       (d)     (e)    

219

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)      (b)     (c)    (d)     (e)   

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ The first subject covered in this course is quality assurance in health and Indicative healthcare. The problem of quality began to attract professional attention Syllabus after the US Institute of Medicine published a Report entitled To Err Is Human: Building a Safer Health System in 1999. Since that time, research has brought into light numerous concepts and variables to characterize and manage quality in health and healthcare organisations. This course will review in a non-technical manner the most important of these results, including the Institute of Medicine’s six-dimensional definition of quality, benchmarking, clinical practice guidelines, high-performance work practices, outcome and process approaches to quality measurement, quality improvement processes, and the role of transactional and transformational leadership in organisational quality improvement. Problems and issues associated with quality assurance and management in Hong Kong’s healthcare system will also be discussed, by means of case studies supported by experience-sharing with guest speakers from the profession. A second and related subject is then introduced -- Enterprise Risk Management (ERM). The principles of ERM allow the evaluation of an organisation’s risk exposure, in particular political risk, operational risk, and financial risk. In particular, ERM would support a comprehensive and integrated risk management program strategy to ensure the efficient delivery of healthcare at the safe and trusted levels expected on the part of patients. It also covers important insights on timely topics such as patient safety, error reduction, risk financing, and bioterrorism preparedness and response. As always, problems associated with risk management in Hong Kong’s healthcare system will be discussed, mainly in terms of case studies (e.g. response to the SARS emergency) and experience-sharing with members of the profession.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Quality Assurance in healthcare organisations. 14 Review of the elementary principles of quality management in health and healthcare organisations. (i). Definitions of quality in health and healthcare, with particular reference to the Institute of Medicine approach. (ii). The three primary quality management activities: measurement, assessment, and improvement and their applications in the healthcare organisation. 15 Measuring quality in the healthcare organisation: the structural, process, and outcomes approaches. Selection criteria for each measure.

220

16 Evaluating quality in the healthcare organisation: presentation and interpretation of measurement data, the establishment of performance expectations, and the determination of performance targets. 17 Improving quality in the healthcare organisation: improvement models and tools, their characteristics and selection criteria, and the management of quality improvement projects. 18 Case study: Patient safety as an objective of quality management in hospitals. 2. Risk Management in health and healthcare organisations. 14 Basics of Enterprise Risk Management in Healthcare and Healthcare Legal Concepts 15 Development of a Risk Management Program and the Healthcare Risk Management Professional 16 Early Warning Systems for the Identification of Organisational Risks 17 Introduction to Risk Financing 18 Patient Safety Organisations 19 Risk Management’s Role in Performance Improvement 20 Using Data as a Risk Management Tool and the Clinical Record 21 Interpersonal Communication Skills and Ethics in Patient Care 22 Risk Management in Hong Kong health and healthcare system

Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Project 30%  Outcomes 2. Test 20%      3. Final Examination 50%     Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Project Students have to analyse case studies and apply quality management and risk management principles in healthcare sector. Test Students’ ability to understand basic concepts and principles regarding to quality management and risk management in healthcare sector. Final Examination Student’s ability in comprehending English texts, presenting ideas and writing effectively can be assessed by examination. Student Study Class contact: Effort . Lecture 28 Hrs.

221

Required . Tutorial 14 Hrs.

Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Spath, P. Introduction to Healthcare Quality Management. 2ed Edition. References Chicago: Health Administration Press, 2013. 2. American Society for Healthcare Risk Management (2009) Risk Management Handbook for Health Care Organizations, (Student Edition). R. Carroll, (Ed.). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

References 1. Ransom, E.R., Joshi, M.S., Nash, D.B. and Ransom, S.B., eds. The Healthcare Quality Book 2nd edition. Chicago: Health Administration Press, 2011. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

222

52 Course Description Form 1 Course Code HSS1001 Course Title Sociology Today Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives 1. Equip students with the basic sociological theories and concept. 2. Develop students’ critical thinking to evaluate and criticize the current social issues. 3. Develop students’ potential to apply relevant sociological theories on social phenomenon. Course Upon completion of the course, students are able to: Intended a. describe the history of sociology, both its theories and outstanding Learning proponents. Outcomes b. identify the contemporary issues, especially the differences in

contemporary theorists. c. analyse the contemporary issues and social problems in terms of determinants and influencing factors. d. develop effective strategies in handling social problems. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)   (d)  

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a) (b) (c)  (d) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a) (b) (c) (d)

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)

223

(b)    (c)    (d)   

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a) (b) (c) (d) 

Course 1. The introduction of sociology Synopsis/ 1.1. Theoretical perspectives: structural-functionalism, conflict theory and Indicative symbolic interactionalism Syllabus 1.2. Modern contemporary theorists 1.3. Sociological investigation 1.4. Wright Mills’s sociological imagination 1.5. Peter Berger’s invitation to sociology 2.The foundations of society 2.1. Culture 2.2. Socialization 2.3. Social interaction 2.4. Sexuality and society 2.5. Deviance 3.Social inequalities 3.1. Social stratification and social class 3.2. Gender stratification 3.3. Racial stratification 3.4. Elderly 4.Social institutions 4.1. Family and marriage 4.2. Education 4.3. Religion 4.4. Economy 4.5. Government 5.Social change 5.1. Population and environment 5.2. Globalization Learning & Lectures Teaching The course content will be delivered generally by lectures. The pre-assigned Methodology materials are expected to read before the class in order to achieve the intended learning outcomes.

Seminars Seminars aim at giving students opportunity to learn how to integrate major ideas and give a neat presentation. Students are required to discuss current social issues in the seminar.

224

Assessment Methods in Specific % Course intended learning Alignment assessment weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course methods/tasks (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) Learning 1. Assignments 10   Outcomes 2. Tests 20     3. Examinations 40     4. Presentations 30   Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignments Student’s general understanding in sociological concepts and theories can be assessed by written assignments. Assignment will take forms of multiple- choice questions, true-false questions and short questions. Assignment aims at revising important points of each chapter. Assignment also acts as a preparation for the test and final examination.

Test and examination There will be test and final examination to assess students’ overall achievement for the course according to the related intended learning outcomes. They are designed to assess students’ basic knowledge of Sociology.

Presentation Each group of students will do a presentation on the topic of social problem. The interpretation, analysis and strategies used to deal with the problem will be assessed. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lectures 28 Hrs. . Seminars 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 28 Hrs. . Preparation of presentations and written 62 Hrs. assignments Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Macinois, J. (2010). Sociology. (13th ed.). NJ: Prentice Hall. References References

225

1. Berger, P. L. (1992). Invitation to Sociology: A Humanistic Perspective. London: Penguin. 2. Collins, R. (1982). Sociological Insight: An Introduction to Non-obvious Sociology. New York: Oxford University Press. 3. Giddens, A. (2010). Sociology. Cambridge: Polity Press. 4. Henslin, J. M. (2009). Down to Earth Sociology. New York: Wadsworth International. 5. Mills, C. W. (1992). The Sociological Imagination. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books. (updated as at 30 September 2016)

226

53 Course Description Form 1

Course Code HSS1003 Course Title Introduction to Psychology Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives 1. Equip students with the basic knowledge of Psychology. 2. Help students acquire and apply the fundamental vocabulary of Psychology. 3. Enhance students’ understanding on the differences between scientific evidence and personal opinion. 4. Develop students’ analytical mind to examine human beliefs, values and behaviors. Course Upon completion of the course, students are able to: Intended a. describe and distinguish different approaches in the study of psychology. Learning b. analyse the strengths and weaknesses of different psychological theories. Outcomes c. explain human behaviours from various school of psychology. (CILOs) d. comment on unscientific beliefs and research about human behaviours. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs & 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

APILOs and CILOs Major-ILOs (a)  (b) (c)   (d)  

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b) (c)  (d)

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a) (b) (c) (d)

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)  

227

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b) (c)  (d) 

Course The purpose of this course is to introduce fundamental concepts of psychology Synopsis/ in the context of daily life. Upon completion of this course, students should Indicative have acquired a basic understanding of findings in various areas of Syllabus psychology, and major psychological theories used to explain human behaviour.

Learning & Lectures Teaching The course content will be delivered generally by lectures. The pre-assigned Methodology materials are expected to read before the class in order to achieve the intended learning outcomes.

Tutorials Students have chances to clarify confusion from the lectures and/or have elaboration on certain points. Topics will be provided to integrate formal analysis into context to ensure students’ understanding of the subjects taught in the lectures. Assessment Methods in Course intended learning Specific Alignment % outcomes to be assessed assessment with Course weighting (Please tick as appropriate) methods/tasks Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) Learning 1. Assignments 20%   Outcomes 2. Tests 30%     3. Examinations 40%     4. Presentations 10%   Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignments Student’s general understanding in psychological concepts and theories can be assessed by written assignments.

228

Presentation Each group of students will do a presentation. The interpretation, analysis and strategies used to deal with the problem will be assessed. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lectures 28 Hrs. . Tutorials 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 28 Hrs. . Preparation of presentations and assignment 62 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Nevid, J. S., & Rathus, S. A. (2010). Psychology and the Challenges of Life References (11th edition). New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

References 1. Bond, H. M. (2010). Oxford Handbook of Chinese Psychology. NY: Oxford University Press. 2. Feist, G. J., & Rosenberg, E. L. (2010). Psychology: Making Connections. Boston: McGraw Hill Higher Educaiton. 3. Feldman, R. S. (2009). Understanding Psychology (9th Ed.). New York, NY: McGraw-Hill. 4. Gerrig, R. J., & Zimbardo, P. G. (2008). Psychology and Life (8th ed.). Boston: Peasron Education. 5. Hock, R. R. (2005). Forty Studies that Changed Psychology: Exploration into the History of Psychological Research (5th ed.). Upper Saddle River, J. J.: Pearson/ Prentice Hall. 6. Stewart, S. M., Bond, M. H., Kennard, B. D., Ho, L. M., and Zaman, R. M. (2002). Does the Chinese construct of guan export to the West? International Journal of Psychology, 37(2), 74-82. 7. 陳烜之, 梁覺 (2000). 邁進中的華人心理學. 香港：中文大學出版社 (updated as at 30 September 2016)

229

54 Course Description Form 1

Course Code MED3012 Course Title Epidemiology Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Prerequisite Nil Objectives This course aims to provide students concepts of epidemiology, includes study design, calculation of measures and screening for disease. In addition, the course introduces the method of evaluating epidemiology research studies and how to criticize on literature in both international and local context Intended Learning Upon completion of the course, students will be able to: Outcomes (a) Describe the measures of associations and terminology used in epidemiological studies; (b) Read and interpret epidemiologic studies in the literature; (c) Apply the principles, techniques and measurements of epidemiology relate with the local context and tackle with the real-world problems. CILOs in

Alignment with PILOs PILOs and Major- ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CILOs (a)    (b)     (c)     

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILO s (a)  (b)    (c)     

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction of epidemiology 2. Disease transmission 3. General health and population indicators 4. Public health practice in epidemiology 5. Design strategies and statistical methods in epidemiology 5.1. Descriptive studies 5.2. Analytical studies 5.3. Cross sectional and ecological studies 5.4. Cohort studies 5.5. Case control 5.6. Randomized controlled trial 6. Experimental studies in epidemiology 7. Field epidemiology 8. Clinical epidemiology

230

Teaching/Learning Lecture Methodology Lectures are scheduled for delivery theoretical knowledge in preparation for discussion on how the theories and techniques are applied.

Tutorial Tutorials are used to allow students to clarify concepts and queries. Tutorials include in class activities and the use of interactive multimedia. In class activities include practical calculation sessions that allow students to recognize, remember and understand epidemiological concepts and thereby build confidence in their mastery of the course. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Intended subject learning Alignment with methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed (Please Intended Learning tick as appropriate) Outcomes (a) (b) (c) (d) 1. Project 20     2. Written Test 40    3. Examination 40     Total 100 Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Project Project evaluates student’s learning by tackling relevant problems. It guides students towards self-directed learning behavior to search for information and knowledge on answers to a proposed assumption.

Written Test(s) Written test(s) are used to assess students’ understanding about the abstract concepts learned, ability to interpret statistical findings and calculations. It allows them to reflect and identify areas for improvement in studying this subject (PILO 7-10).

Examination Examination will consist of different types of questions which will assess all of the intended learning outcomes for the subject and will specifically check their understanding of the integration of physiologic concepts. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Other student study effort: . Pre-reading 60 Hrs. . Preparation of presentation and written assignment 30 Hrs. Total student study effort 135 Hrs.

231

Reading List and Textbook(s) References 1. Ray M. Merrill. (2010) Introduction to epidemiology. (5th ed.). Sudbury, Mass.: Jones and Bartlett Publishers.

References 1. Fos, Peter J. (2011) Epidemiology foundations: the science of public health. San Francisco, CA : Jossey-Bass. 2. Krieger, Nancy. (2011) Epidemiology and the people's health: theory and context. New York : Oxford University Press. 3. Ilona Carneiro et al. (2011) Introduction to epidemiology. (2nd ed.). Maidenhead; New York: Open University Press. 4. Penny Webb and Chris Bain. (2011) Essential epidemiology: an introduction for students and health professionals. (2nd ed.). Cambridge, UK; New York: Cambridge University Press. 5. Jørn Olsen et al. (2010) An introduction to epidemiology for health professionals. New York: Springer. 6. Bryan Kestenbaum. (2009) Epidemiology and biostatistics. Dordrecht; New York: Springer. 7. William A. Oleckno. (2008) Epidemiology: concepts and methods. Long Grove, Ill.: Waveland Press. (updated as at 3 November 2016)

232

55 1 Course Description Form

Course Code MGT1001 Course Title Introduction to Management Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite None Objectives 1. Expound the fundamental concepts of management in social institutions, especially in business organisations. 2. Explain the key competencies of effective management in business organisations. 3. Train students to think and act in the manner of effective managers. 4. Encourage students to apply textbook knowledge to practical problems of management in business organisations. 5. Develop communication skills in managerial and business contexts.

Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Explain and apply the fundamental functions of management in business Learning organisations: planning, leading, organisation, and control. Outcomes (b) Understand the nature of management as a necessary and optimization- (CILOs) oriented activity in the business organisation, and the response of managerial functions and tasks to changes in the organisation’s external environment. (c) Apply the basic theories of human behavior to different work-roles in the business organisation, and to evaluate the consequences for efficient and effective management. (d) Analyse and compare the arguments surrounding the objectives of social responsibility and ethical behavior in social enterprises in general and business organisations in particular. (e) Prepare case studies on managerial behavior in business organisations in a modern market economy like Hong Kong, to predict changes in such behavior under different assumptions regarding profit orientation, external conditions and regulatory environments, and to identify and evaluate the implications for business policy. (f) Communicate effectively on management tasks and performance, real- world managerial phenomena, data patterns produced by the execution of managerial functions, and public policy, especially as directed towards the business sector.

CILOs in PILOs Alignment

with PILOs CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 and Major- (a)   ILOs (b)  (c)    (d)     (e)    (f)  

233

AC-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 (a)  (b)  (c)   (d)  (e)   (f) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)  (d)  (e)   (f) 

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)   (b)  (c)    (d)   (e)    (f)    

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)   (b)     (c)   (d)   (e)   (f) 

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course reviews the fundamental concepts of management from a business Indicative perspective. The lectures begin by introducing the four main functions Syllabus executed by managers in modern business organisations: planning, leadership, organisation, and control. The alignment between analysis and practice is then explained, with particular emphasis on the effects of management on business performance at both the individual and group level. At the same time, cases and examples are presented to illustrate the empirical relevance of

234

the ideas and concepts discussed, and to demonstrate to students how the theory can be applied in real world business situations.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Managers and Managing 2. The Evolution of Management Thought 3. Values, Attitudes, Emotions, and Culture 4. Ethics and Social Responsibility 5. Managing in the Global Environment 6. Decision Making, Learning, Creativity, and Entrepreneurship 7. The Manager as Planner and Strategist 8. Management of Organisational Structure and Culture 9. Organisational Control and Management of Change 10. Human Resource Management 11. Motivation and Performance 12. Leadership 13. Managing Groups and Teams 14. Promoting Effective Business Communication

Learning & Lecture Teaching The course content is systematically presented in the form of lectures. In Methodology particular, teaching and learning activities are designed to explain fundamental concepts and principles of management in business organisations in a clearly-structured manner and to illustrate with cases and examples managerial opportunities, problems, and challenges under different organisational contexts in both for-profit and non-profit business sectors.

Tutorials Tutorials, generally in the form of discussion classes, will be conducted in small groups. Discussion topics will be based on previous lecture material, questions raised in the textbook, and important contemporary issues. The objective of the teaching and learning activities is to encourage discussion and exchange among students. In particular, the tutorial is designed to create an interactive learning environment for students to share, argue, and analyse managerial problems, for example in the form of short cases studies. Student groups will also be required to submit a long case study or report, with detailed discussion of problem choice, data collection, hypothesis formulation, and empirical relevance. In addition to academic knowledge, this exercise will test the individual’s ability to work co-operatively and to communicate and argue effectively.

Reading A list of materials, mainly based on the textbook, will be distributed during the first tutorial. Students will be required to read and understand this material in an order corresponding to the lectures before the next classes, and to discuss the contents intelligently. The reading activity is designed to encourage self and proactive learning, develop positive inquisitiveness of

235

mind, and broaden the student’s horizons in the area of management in business organisations.

Consultations Consultation sessions, which are scheduled outside normal class time, are open to students who desire to seek further advice and guidance in their study of management in business organisations. The consultation activity is designed to supplement regular instruction with informal meetings, during which student problems and learning difficulties can be attended to and resolved in a friendly give-and-take atmosphere.

Assignment and Test Students will be required to finish assignments and tutorial exercises that cover probability calculation and data interpretation.

Group Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired in this course to a real-life management issues. In this project, students have to 1) define a particular research question to be examined, 2) select an appropriate data collection method, 3) collect and analyse the data, and 4) write a paper, and present their findings in class.

Class contact:

236

. Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Student Study Assessment Hours: Effort . Examination 3 Hrs. Required Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Robbins, S.P. and Coulter, M. Management, 13th edition. Englewood References Cliffs NJ: Prentice Hall, 2015.

(updated as at 5 January 2016)

237

56 Course Description Form 1 Course Code MGT2214 Course Title Management of Non-Profit Organizations Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite MGT1001 Introduction to Management Objectives 1. Develop students’ ability to apply basic management frameworks in NPO. 2. Understand the core management concepts essential to leading a NPO. 3. Provide students with a better understanding in the leadership qualities and the importance of mission for NPO. 4. Develop students’ awareness in differences between management of private corporations and that of NPO. 5. Prepare students for the challenges in people and relationship management in a NPO setting. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Explain the leadership qualities and the importance of mission for NPO. Learning (b) Discuss effective corporate and marketing strategies for NPO. Outcomes (c) Recognise the key differences in cultures, governance, accountability, (CILOs) and performance management between private sector and NPO. (d) Develop people and relationship management plans for NPO. (e) Identify the key characteristics that determine the success and failure of NPO. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)    (b)   (c)   (d)     (e)  

AC-ILOs

1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a) (b)  (c) (d) (e) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a) (b)  (c)  (d) (e)

238

MK-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 (a)   (b)   (c)    (d)  (e)   (f)

HSM-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (a) (b)  (c)  (d)  (e)

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ Non-profit organisations (NPO) include charitable organisations, trade unions, Indicative and public arts organisations. The Non-profit sector of our society is growing rapidly, creating a major need to learn how to manage these organisations Syllabus effectively. This course examines the mission, leadership, resources, marketing, goals, people development, decision making and other management issues that determine the success of non-profit organisations. The course includes visits to local NPOs and talks by past or present leaders of NPOs.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to Non-profit Organisation 1.1. Commitment and Leadership 1.2. Mission and goals setting 1.3. Importance of excellent partnerships with the board 2. Culture in NPOs 2.1. What values are important to NPOs? 2.2. Variations in NPOs’ values 2.3. Behavior that is common and treasured 2.4. The Personality of an organisation 2.5. Consequences of a lack of understanding about culture 3. Strategy Formulation for NPOs 3.1. Effective strategies for marketing, innovation and fund development using customer-centered mindset 3.2. Growth and development of NPOs marketing 3.3. Positioning and branding for NPOs 3.4. The characteristics of high-performing NPOs 4. Social Marketing for NPO 4.1. Defining social marketing 4.2. Establish target, objectives and goals 4.3. Positioning for social marketing products 5. Governance and Performance Management 5.1. Accountability: What does it mean for a NPO to be accountable? 5.2. Forces shaping the non-profit environment 5.3. Measuring performance 6. People and Relationships Management 6.1. People decisions from staff, volunteers to boards 6.2. The key relationships

239

6.3. Importance of communications: Assessing communication issues 6.4. Collaboration with private sector 7. Trends, development and key management and marketing issues of local NPOs 7.1. Performance measurement 7.2. Making decisions on what to measure 7.3. Mobilising resources for change 7.4. Sustainability and growth Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will focus on the theoretical aspects of NPO management and the Methodology challenges and issues that NPOs may encounter. They are designed to develop students’ skills in applications of basic management concepts in non-profit organisations. And, guest speakers will be invited to cover some of the topics in this course (e.g. variation in values across different NPOs and social marketing for NPO). Tutorials Real-life case studies will be used to help solidify students’ knowledge of NPO management and to allow for comparisons of management practice between private corporations and NPOs. Students will have the opportunity to ask questions regarding the course materials, case studies and essay topics. Company Visits Visits to the local NPOs will be arranged. The company visits aim to develop students’ understanding in different NPOs’ cultures, management and communication styles, missions and values. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) 1. Class participation and 10%     Learning discussion Outcomes 2. Essay 40%     3. Mid-term test 10%      4. Final Examination 40%      Total 100 %

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and 1. Kotler, P. and Andreasen, A. R. (2013). Strategic Marketing for Non- References Profit Organizations (United States Edition). Pearson Education. 2. Drucker, P. F. (2006). Managing the Non-Profit Organization. Principles and Practices. Harper Business.

240

References 1. Riddle J. (2002) Managing a Non-profit. MA. Streetwise. Adams Media Corp 2. Crutchfield, L. and Grant, H. (2008). Forces for Good: The Six Practices of High-Impact Non-profits. San Francisco. Jossey-Bass. 3. Letts, C., Ryan, W., Grossman, A. (1999). High Performance Non-profit Organizations: Managing Upstream for Great Impact. Wiley. 4. Gerencser M., Van Lee R., Napolitano F., and Kelly C. (2008) Mega Communities. NY: Palgrave-MacMillan. 5. Koltler, P., and Lee, R. N. (2008). Social Marketing: Influencing Behavior for Good (3rd edition). SAGE Publications, Inc.

(updated as at 14 June 2016)

241

57 Course Description Form 1 Course Code MGT3005 Course Title e-Business and e-Marketing Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles Objectives 1. Understand the concepts, ideas, assumptions, and processes which underlie e-Business and e-Marketing. 2. Develop CIT-based skills for managing and working in teams. 3. Develop CIT-based time management skills. 4. Develop CIT-based research and knowledge acquisition skills, especially in a business context. 5. Develop CIT-based evaluation and critical analysis skills, especially in a business context. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Understand the meaning and scope of e-Business and e-Marketing Learning under different economic, technological, and regulatory conditions. Outcomes (b) Explain what is required to set up and operate an e-Business. (CILOs) (c) Determine the strategic roles and applications of e-Supply Chain Management. (d) Discuss and supply examples of the applications of e-Procurement. (e) Identify what is involved in conducting e-marketing over the Internet, and the importance of Customer Relationship Management to e- business development. (f) Distinguish between different types of new media, and create an outline plan to implement e-marketing with design of e-platforms/websites to meet the needs and requirements of different market segments (including physically-impaired consumers). CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs and Major- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CILOs ILOs (a)   (b)     (c)    (d)      (e)    (f)    

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)   (c)     (d)    (e)   (f)  

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ Electronic Business (e-Business in short) involves the use of communication Indicative and information technologies (CIT) to support business activities. In this Syllabus course, students will learn how e-business methods enable companies to perform better by linking internal and external data processing systems more efficiently and flexibly, by working more closely with suppliers and partners, and by more immediate satisfaction of customer needs and expectations. The lectures also develop a general framework for electronic marketing,

242

which would then allow a systematic investigation of the impact of communication and information technologies on marketing theory and practice in both business-to-consumer and business-to-business contexts.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to e-Business and e-Commerce (Chapter 1) 2. e-Commerce fundamentals (Chapter 2, 4) 3. e-Business Infrastructure: platforms, networks, products, applications, databases and the flow of data to internal and external systems (Chapter 3) 4. Using CIT to support supply chain management and e-procurement (Chapter 6, 7) 5. e-Marketing and electronic customer relationship management (e-CRM): permission marketing, customer profiling, B2C vs. B2B buyer behavior. (Chapter 8, 9) 6. e-Marketing Strategy and e-Marketing Mix (Chapter 5) 7. e-Marketing Channels (Chapter 11) Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures aim to present and explain the practices, structures, models, and Methodology technologies applied in e-business and e-marketing. Business case studies and demonstrations of e-business applications will also be discussed. Guest speakers will be invited to share real-world experience in e-business and e- marketing, especially with regard to challenges, opportunities, planning, and development. Tutorials Tutorials help students to enhance their understanding of the concepts, ideas, and skills covered in the lectures. Workshop/practice questions will be introduced to enable a better grasp of the real-world relevance of these concepts, ideas, and skills and where appropriate, short cases will be assigned for students to study real-world issues in e-business and e- marketing. There will also be group work and discussions, where students would be able to exchange ideas and discuss problems. Tests and Assignments Tests and assignments help inform the learning curve. The student’s academic strengths and weaknesses can be readily identified with regular feedback on learning progress, particularly with regard to areas for improvement. In this way, students can adjust study skills and approaches as appropriate. Group Project Students will be grouped and required to submit a long case study, with detailed discussion of problem choice, data collection, hypotheses formulation, and empirical relevance. In addition to academic knowledge, this exercise will test the individual’s ability to work co-operatively and to communicate and argue effectively.

243

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and 1. Chaffey, D. E-Business and E-Commerce Management, 5th edition. References New York: Financial Times Press, Prentice Hall, 2011. (updated as at 5 January 2016)

244

58 Course Description Form 1 Course Code MGT3111 Course Title Management Information Systems Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite MGT1001 Introduction to Management GEN2005 Information Technology and Multimedia Applications Objectives 1. To equip students with foundation concepts of management information system. 2. To enable students to discover the strategic advantage leveraged on IT in the new economy. 3. To enhance students’ understanding of various types of information systems in the business world. 4. To enable students to provide analysis and critique on real-world cases relating to information systems. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Explain the role of IT for acquiring, organizing, and communicating Learning information required to solve business problems. Outcomes (b) Discuss how successful companies made use of MIS as a driver of (CILOs) strategic change. (c) Analyse and evaluate applications of various IS and propose IS solutions for business problem solving. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)  (b)      (c)      

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)  (c)  

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c) 

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)    (c)   

I s

C O HSM-ILOs

245

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

(a)  (b)  (c) 

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ Management Information System (MIS) is the science of collecting, storing, Indicative processing and transmitting information for the purpose of making better Syllabus management decisions. This course introduces MIS as the essential and strategic component of the modern organisation. Traditionally, MIS has been the enabler of business processes: it coordinated information among various departments of an organisation, thus ensuring that the organisation reached its strategic goals. While this role of MIS is still true today, with the advent of the Internet and e-Commerce, MIS is often the driver of strategic change. The success of companies like Amazon, eBay, Dell and many others show how information systems (IS) are used by organisations to conduct business in ways that were impossible a few decades ago.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Information Systems in Global Business Today 2. Global E-Business and Collaboration 3. Information Systems, Organisations, and Strategy 4. Ethical and Social Issues in Information Systems 5. Foundations of Business Intelligence: Database and Information Management 6. Telecommunications, the Internet, and Wireless Technology 7. Security of Information Systems 8. Achieving Operational Excellence and Customer Intimacy: Enterprise Applications 9. E-Commerce: Digital Markets, Digital Goods 10. Knowledge Management 11. Enhancing Decision Making 12. Building Information Systems: System Development and Selection Process Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited.

Tutorials During the tutorials, students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases.

246

Assignments To assess students’ ability to apply MIS theory through case study.

Test To assess students’ ability to apply theory and resolve management information system problems.

Written Examination There will be a final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses students’ ability to apply theory and resolve problems relating to management information system issues. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and 1. Laudon, K. & Laudon, J. (2017). Essentials of Management References Information Systems, 12th edition. Prentice Hall. References 1. Laudon, K. & Laudon, J. (2018). Management Information Systems: Managing the Digital Firm, 15th edition. Prentice Hall. 2. Valacich, J. & Schneider, C. (2017). Information Systems Today: Managing the Digital World, 8th edition. Prentice Hall. 3. Kroenke, D. & Boyle R. (2017). Experiencing MIS, 7th edition. Prentice Hall. Updated on 10 07 2018

247

59 1 Course Description Form Course Code MGT3131 Course Title Operations Management Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MGT1001 Introduction to Management BUS1003 Quantitative Methods for Business Decisions Objectives 1. To equip students with knowledge in the field of operations. 2. To teach students how to measure performance of operations in a firm. 3. To enable students to apply the tools to analyse and make improvement to existing operations. 4. To expose students to recent advances and practices in the field of Operations Management. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Explain the important role of operations in a for-profit and/or non-profit Learning organisation’s success. Outcomes (b) Measure the effectiveness of operations using the five key performance (CILOs) criteria: cost, quality, delivery, flexibility, innovativeness. (c) Describe the phases of a product or service development process and the roles played by the marketing function in the development process. (d) Recommend the steps for measuring the performance of processes by which goods and services are produced and delivered. (e) Apply the tools for inventory, facilities and capacity planning. (f) Assess and evaluate the current practices and issues in the field of Operations Management including Quality Management, Supply Chain, Six Sigma, and Just-in-Time. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)     (b)     (c)     (d)     (e)      (f)    

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)   (b)    (c)   (d)  (e) (f) 

248

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) (f) 

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)  (d)   (e)   (f)  

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)   (b)     (c)    (d)     (e)   (f)     

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ Operations Management (OM) involves design, planning, establishment, Indicative control, operation and improvement of the activities/processes that create a Syllabus firm's final products and/or services. Large scale globalization, short product life cycle and more informed customers means that successful management of operations, careful design and efficient utilization of resources is an absolute must not only to add to the bottom line of a firm, but even for its mere survival. The course aims to provide students with the key tools and current practices in operations management. It also discusses the relationships, strategic linkages and interactions of operations with other business areas including Marketing in order to achieve organisational goals.

Indicative Syllabus 1. The Scope of Operations Management 1.1. Organisational perspective (operations and corporate social responsibility, linkages with other organisational functions such as Finance, Marketing, HR) 1.2. Operational perspective

249

1.3. Cases and examples of operations at for profit and non-profit settings 2. Operations Strategy and Performance Measurement 2.1. Content and process of operations strategy 2.2. Time, trade-offs, targets 2.3. Strategic “Fit” and sustainability 2.4. Concepts of productivity, efficiency, process velocity, throughput, Little’s formula 3. Design, Development of Products and services 3.1. Voice of the Customer/Target Market 3.2. Quality Function Deployment (QFD) 3.3. Value Analysis/value engineering 4. Process Design and Improvement 4.1. Process selection: job shop, batch ship, assembly line, continuous flow 4.2. Break-even analysis 5. Inventory, Facilities and Capacity Planning 5.1. Inventory models 5.2. Facility layouts 5.3. Economies of scale 5.4. Learning curve 5.5. Capacity requirements 5.6. Decision trees 6. Quality Management, Supply Chain Management, Six Sigma, and Just-in-Time Systems. 6.1. Cost of quality 6.2. Bullwhip effect in Supply Chains Learning & Lectures Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of the Methodology fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited.

Tutorials Students are divided into smaller groups of 15 students each. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Simulation games and role play will be used to facilitate students’ learning during tutorials. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. Class participation and 20%      Outcomes discussion

250

2. Assignments 20%     3. Final Examination 60%      Total 100 %

Class participation and discussion Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. They also provide an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills.

Written Examination There will be a 3-hour final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve business problems. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Slack, N., Brandon-Jones, A. and Johnson R. (2016). Operations References Management (8th edition). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. References 1. William J Stevenson, (2014). Operations Management, 12th edition. New York: McGraw-Hill. 2. Chase, R.B., Jacobs, F.R. and Aquilano, N.J. (2008). Operations Management for Competitive Advantage, 12th edition. New York: McGraw-Hill. (updated on 11 July 2017)

251

60 Course Description Form 1 Course Code MGT4111 Course Title Strategic Management Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MGT1001 Introduction to Management1 Objectives 1. Provide students with a fuller understanding of the frameworks, models and tools needed to formulate and implement successful business strategies. 2. Offer work-based projects to help students in developing and assessing practical strategic initiatives, based on the unique set of issues, resources and information. 3. Train students to consider when and how to apply concepts and techniques learnt in previous courses to strategic management. 4. Increase students’ awareness in the importance of corporate culture, leadership, ethical and social responsibilities to corporate success. 2. Prepare students for the challenges that face the general managers in a competitive business environment. 3. Provide students with an understanding of the differences in strategic planning between for-profit and non-profit organisations.

Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Acquire familiarity with the concepts, frameworks and techniques of Learning strategic management. Outcomes (b) Apply the concepts, frameworks and skills to (CILOs) - explain the reasons for good and poor performance by an enterprise; - generate strategy options for an enterprise; - assess the strategy options based on limited information; - select the most appropriate strategy; and - recommend the best way to implement the chosen strategy and evaluate the outcomes against the strategic objectives. (c) Evaluate the ethical and social responsibility dimensions in the strategic management process. (d) Devise a strategic plan based on the knowledge gained in previous courses. (e) Build the capacity as a general manager in terms of: - appreciation of the work of a general manager; - ability to recognise opportunities for profit in a business environment; - ability to develop original and innovatory approaches to strategic problems; and - ability to appraise the culture and leadership of a business enterprise. (f) Able to understand the significance of strategic planning and implementation in non-profit organisations.

1 The original pre-requisite ‘All core business courses’ was reviewed and found to be not specific. After deliberation, the pre-requisite was changed as stated above.

252

PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)    (b)    (c)   (d)    (e)    (f)   

FS-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)   (d)  (e)   (f)

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)    (c)   (d)  (e)    (f)

MKT-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)    (c)    (d)  (e)    (f) 

PA-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)   (d)   (e)  (f)

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ Strategic management focuses on the concept of strategy formulation and implementation by exploring the functions and nature of general management.

253

Indicative The course serves as an opportunity to develop skills for strategic thinking and Syllabus analysis, leadership, communication, teamwork, and cross-functional integration. Students learn about corporate and business planning and the implementation of organisational change through structures, systems and people.

This is a project-based capstone course that primarily involves a year-long group project. Emphasis will be placed on the application of strategic management frameworks in a real organisation. Students will also be expected to synthesise previously learnt knowledge from the concentration courses into a comprehensive understanding of strategic issues. The teaching approaches adopted include not only lectures and case analyses, but also a series of project consultations offered by the course lecturer and other academics in Accounting, Finance and Marketing concentrations.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to strategic management 1.1. Defining strategic management 1.2. Industrial Organisation Model 1.3. Resource-Based Model 1.4. The key attributes to strategic management 1.5. The strategic management process 2. Firm boundaries 2.1. The horizontal boundaries of the firm 2.2. The vertical boundaries of the firm 2.3. Vertical integration and its alternatives 2.4. The Value Chain 3. Environmental and competitive analysis 3.1. Environmental scanning 3.2. PEST Analysis 3.3. Industry analysis 3.4. Competitor analysis 4. Strategy formulation 4.1. Situational analysis: SWOT 4.2. Formulating organisational strategies 4.3. Corporate strategy: diversification 5. Strategic position and dynamics 5.1. Core competencies 5.2. Best Practices 5.3. Strategic positioning for competitive advantage 5.4. Sustaining competitive advantage 5.5. Sources of competitive advantage 6. Strategic control and corporate governance 6.1. Different approaches to strategic control 6.2. Strategic control 6.3. The role of corporate governance 6.4. Aligning the interests of owners and managers 6.5. Business and individual ethics 6.6. Corporate Culture and Strategic leadership 7. Strategic planning and implementation for NPOs

254

7.1. Environmental analysis for NPOs 7.2. Strategic planning for NPOs 7.3. Strategic implementation for NPOs 7.4. Strategic control and evaluation for NPOs

Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures and assigned readings will provide the theoretical frameworks and Methodology approaches required for the analysis of the selected case studies. Specifically they will cover the nature of firm strategy and the processes of formulating and implementing it using real-life examples. They serve to demonstrate how to conduct analyses of an organisation’s internal capabilities and the external environment, and ultimately to draw conclusions.

Tutorials and Project Consultations This is primarily a case course. That is, tutorial sessions (which are compulsory) will involve the discussion of specific case situations. These cases will describe real organisations. Through analysis and discussion in class, students will learn about the nature of firm strategy and the processes of formulating and implementing it. More importantly, the tutorial sessions are designed to help improve students’ case analytical skills and writing skills that are transferable to their group project. Project consultation sessions will be made available to students to ask questions regarding the course materials, case studies and group projects, so that the lecturer can better identify areas where students need more guidance at early stage.

Group Project, Group Presentations and Individual Reflective Learning Journal Students will be assigned to a group of 4-6 members for this project. Each group will consist of at least one student from each major area (Financial Services, Health Services Management, Marketing, and Professional Accountancy). This is to ensure that all groups will possess a range of essential knowledge and skills in different business functional areas and that they will be capable of dealing with issues that require integrated knowledge.

Each group is required to conduct an in-depth, longitudinal analysis of a company regarding its strategy and performance and the industry in which it operates. Students have two options regarding their company choice: (1) approach a company (probably in the region) and gather information/data through direct interactions with the company officials as well as from secondary sources, or (2) choose a company and conduct research on its strategic issues with information/data only from secondary sources. Each group needs to take into account the potential difficulties in obtaining information regarding the company of their choice.

All students will be required to submit a group written report and their own reflective learning journals. Advisory sessions run by the responsible lecturer and academics in different concentrations will be made available to students. They will be able to seek guidance on how to proceed with the group project and how knowledge previously learnt from the required and elective courses in their concentrations can be applied to the group project.

255

Apart from the written work, each group will be given opportunities – a mid- term presentation and a final presentation – to communicate the findings orally in a professional manner. Students will benefit from receiving feedback on their approaches from the responsible lecturer and other academics from different concentrations, and thus make appropriate adjustment if necessary. The process requires students to be responsible, to be able to work as a team, to resolve conflict, and to reach consensus about conclusions. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) 1. Class participation and 10%   Learning discussion Outcomes 2. Project 50%     3. Final Examination 40%   Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills to real-life strategy issues. In this project, students have to 1) identify particular strategies and competitive advantages of the focal company, 2) select an appropriate data collection method, 3) collect and analyse the data, and 4) write a report, and present their findings in class.

Final Examination There will be a 3-hour final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve strategic management problems, and to analyse real-world strategy issues. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs.

256

Reading List Textbook and 1. John A. Pearce II, Richard B. Robinson (2015) Strategic Management, References International Student Edition, McGraw-Hill.

References 1. Dess, G., Lumpkin, G., and Eisner, A. (2013). Strategic Management: Text and Cases, 7th edition. New York: McGraw Hill. 2. William J Stevenson, (2014). Operations Management, 12th edition. New York: McGraw-Hill. 3. Chase, R.B., Jacobs, F.R. and Aquilano, N.J. (2008). Operations Management for Competitive Advantage, 12th edition. New York: McGraw-Hill. 4. W. Chan Kim and Renée Mauborgne (2005) Blue Ocean Strategy: How to Crete Uncontested Market Space and make Competition Irrelevant, Harvard Business School Press 5. Michael E. Porter (1998) Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analyzing Industries and Competitors, Harvard Business School Press. (updated as at 30 September 2016)

257

61 1 Course Description Form Course Code MGT4131 Course Title China Business Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite None Objectives 1. To equip students with knowledge of the external environmental forces which are changing the market structure and competition in China. 2. To address the importance of China market as part of today’s integrated global economy. 3. To analyse the nature and development of China market from social, political, and economical perspectives. 4. To enable students to identify and assess market opportunities and threats underlying China business. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Describe major changes in the market structure at China after business Learning and economic reform and accession to the WTO. Outcomes (b) Examine the effects of social, political, and economical factors on the (CILOs) development of business in China market. (c) Identify and assess market opportunities and threats underlying China business. (d) Evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of various business formats in China market. (e) Formulate appropriate business and marketing strategies to execute the chosen business format in China market. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)     (b)     (c)     (d)     (e)    

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)     (e)  

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course provides students with knowledge of the external environmental Indicative forces that are changing the market structure and competition in China. It Syllabus also addresses the importance of China market as part of today’s integrated global economy. The nature and development of China market will be analysed from social, political, and economical perspectives. Students will develop the abilities to identify and assess market opportunities and threats underlying China business.

258

Indicative Syllabus 1. Nature and Development of China market 1.1. Commerce in traditional China 1.2. Unique features of China market 1.3. Impacts of business and economic reform to the development of China market 1.4. Impacts of regional and global economic integration (CEPA and WTO) to the development of China market 2. Business Environment in China 2.1. Chinese culture and society 2.2. Political , economic, and legal systems in China 2.3. Business ethics in China 2.4. Foreign investment in China 3. Business Formats in China 3.1. State-owned enterprises 3.2. Private-owned enterprises 3.3. Joint-ventures 3.4. Foreign direct investments Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited. Tutorials Students are divided into smaller groups in each tutorial group. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are required to have finished the assigned readings prior to tutorials. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Consultation A number of consultation sessions outside the normal class time are opened for all students, who will like to seek further advices from the instructor on the subject area. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the consultation is designed to supplement the regular class with an informal causal meeting and attend learning difficulties of students in this course. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Class participation and 10%     Outcomes discussion 2. Assignments 10%  3. Project 30%   4. Mid-term test 10%     5. Final Examination 40%     Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Class participation and discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials.

259

Assignments Students will be required to finish assignments that involve the analysis of business environment in China. Project Students apply market analysis skills to case firms entering into China market and present arguments and conclusions. Mid-term test Short essay and multiple choice questions will be used in mid-term Test. Final Examination Final examination covers all chapters and materials being discussed in the class. The questions can be in the format of case studies and essay. It accounts for 40% of the total course marks.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and Randau, H. and O. Medinskaya (2015) China Business 2.0: Analyse the References Economy, Understand the Society, and Manage Effectively. Switzerland: Springer International Publishing.

References 1. Zhuo, Linong (2006). China Business: Environment, Momentum, Strategies, Prospects. New York: Pearson/Prentice Hall. 2. Yau, O. H. M. and H. Steele (2000). China Business: Challenges in the 21st Century. Hong Kong: The Chinese University Press. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

260

62 Course Description Form 1 Course Code MKT2001 Course Title Marketing Principles Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives 1. Introduce the basic marketing principles and concepts. 2. Demonstrate the effects of environmental and organisational forces on a firm’s marketing activities. 3. Teach relevant skills and techniques in formulating a marketing plan to support the implementation of a marketing mix. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Analyse the business environment to identify marketing opportunities and Learning challenges. Outcomes (b) Assess the impact of ethical issues in business from a marketing (CILOs) perspective and suggest appropriate actions and responses. (c) Describe the marketing planning process and explain its importance to the formulation of an effective marketing plan. (d) Apply marketing concepts and theories to select the marketing mix for for-profit and non-profit organisations. (e) Construct a marketing plan to support the implementation of marketing mix in the context of China and global markets. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)   (b)   (c)  (d)     (e)  

AC-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) 

FN-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)   (e) 

261

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)   (b)  (c)    (d)   (e)   

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)    (e) 

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course introduces the basic marketing principles and concepts for for- Indicative profit and non-profit organisations. It provides students a solid foundation for Syllabus taking advanced marketing courses and helps students develop a good marketing sense for the study of other courses in the BBA (Hons) Programme. The marketing planning process is taught to equip students with necessary skills in formulating a marketing plan to support the implementation of a marketing mix in the context of China and global markets.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Relationships and value 2. Strategy and Marketing environment 3. Ethics and Consumer behavior 4. Marketing Research 5. Identifying Market Segments and Targets 6. New product and service development 7. Managing products, brands and services 8. Price and price development 9. Managing distribution 10. Integrated marketing communications Learning & Lectures Teaching The course contents are systematically delivered in the form of lectures. As Methodology one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the lecture is designed to introduce the basic marketing principles and concepts and illustrate with examples the opportunities and challenges in today marketplaces.

Tutorials A small class in a form of tutorial is organized to facilitate an in-depth discussion and intellectual exchange among students on contemporary marketing issues. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the tutorial is designed to setup an interactive learning environment for students’ presentation on the group project and provide ample learning opportunities to

262

share, discuss, and analyse marketing issues in a small group using presentation and project.

Reading A list of reading materials is given to students. Students are required to read the assigned materials before coming to class. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the reading is designed to encourage self and proactive learning, develop student’s inquisitive mind, and broaden student’s horizon on the subject area of marketing.

Consultations A number of consultation sessions outside the normal class time are opened for all students, who will like to seek further advices from the instructor on the subject area of marketing. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the consultation is designed to supplement the regular class with an informal causal meeting and attend learning difficulties of students in this course.

Assessment Specific assessment % Course intended learning Methods in methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed Alignment with Course (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Intended 1. Class participation and 10%     Learning discussion Outcomes 2. Group project & 30%    Presentation 3. Mid-term test 10%     4. Final Examination 50%     Total 100 %

Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Class Participation and Discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, work on exercises and present their idea during the tutorials. This will help students become aware of their learning progress, develop the skills required to improve their performance.

Group Project and Presentation This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired in this course to a real-life market issues. In this project, students have to define a particular marketing issue to be examined, collect appropriate data, analyse the data, and present their findings in class. The group project can be used to assess students’ learning progress. In particular, their ability in applying theories to solve marketing issue can be assessed.

263

Mid-term test Students will be required to attempt a mid-term test which will allow them aware of their learning progress, and their strengths and weaknesses in different topics of the course

Final Examination There will be a final examination to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve market problems as well as to analyse real-world market issues.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Kerin, R.A., Lau, G.T., Hartley, S.W., and Rudelius, W. (2015). Marketing References in Asia, 3rd edition. McGraw-Hill References

1. McLeish, B. (2010). Successful Marketing Strategies for Nonprofit Organizations: Winning in the Age of the Elusive Donor, 2nd edition. NJ: Wiley. 2. Kotler, P. And G. Armstrong (2016). Principles of Marketing, 16th edition. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. 3. Wood, M. B. (2013). The Marketing Plan Handbook, 5rd edition. Boston: Pearson. 4. McDaniel, C. D., C.W. Lamb, and J. F. Hair (2012). Introduction to Marketing, 12th edition. Southern-Western/Cengage Learning (updated on 11 July 2017)

264

63 Course Description Form 1 Course Code MKT3221 Course Title Consumer Behavior Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles Objectives 1. Introduce the consumer decision making process and its implications on marketing decisions. 2. Discuss the effects of individual and environmental factors on consumer decision making process. 3. Teach relevant skills and techniques in formulating marketing strategies to influence the choice and behavior of consumers. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Describe the consumer decision making process that underlines choice Learning and behavior of consumers. Outcomes (b) Identify the major individual, social, and cultural factors that affect (CILOs) consumer choice and behavior. (c) Explain and analyse consumer decision making process from concepts and theories in Psychology, Sociology, and Anthropology. (d) Evaluate the impacts of consumer behavior on the development of marketing strategies within for-profit and non-profit organisations. (e) Formulate marketing strategies that can influence the choice and behavior of consumers in the context of China and global markets. CILOs in

Alignment with PILOs PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)  (b)   (c)    (d)     (e)    

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)   (d)  (e)   

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)  

265

(d)    (e)  

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course aims to develop students’ conceptual, theoretical, and practical Indicative understanding of the behavioral aspects of consumers and their marketing Syllabus implications. It draws on concepts and theories from psychology, sociology, and anthropology to explain consumer needs, buying motives, choices, and behaviors. The consumer decision making process is taught to provide skills and knowledge in formulating marketing strategies that influence the choice and behavior of consumers in the context of China and global markets.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Course Introduction: Understanding Consumer Behavior 2. Market Segmentation and Strategic Targeting 3. Consumer Motivation 4. Personality and Consumer Behavior 5. Consumer Perception 6. Consumer Learning 7. Consumer Attitude Formation and Change 8. Group Influences on Consumer Behavior 9. The Family and Its Social Class Standing 10. Cultural Influences on Consumer Behavior 11. Consumer Decision Making and Beyond Learning & Lectures Teaching The course contents are systematically delivered in the form of lectures. As Methodology one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the lecture is designed to discuss the effects of individual and environmental factors on consumer decision making process and to demonstrate how marketing strategies can influence choice and behavior of consumers.

Tutorials A small class in a form of tutorial is organized to facilitate an in-depth discussion and intellectual exchange among students on consumer behavior from marketing. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the tutorial is designed to setup an interactive learning environment for students’ presentation on the group project and provide ample learning opportunities to share, discuss, and analyse consumer behavior from marketing in a small group using presentation and project.

266

Consultations A number of consultation sessions outside the normal class time are opened for all students, who will like to seek further advices from the instructor on the subject area of consumer behavior. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the consultation is designed to supplement the regular class with an informal causal meeting and attend learning difficulties of students in this course.

Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Intended 1. Class participation and 10%    Learning discussion Outcomes 2. Group project: Case 20% analysis and   presentations 3. Mid-term test 20%     4. Final Examination 50%     Total 100 %

Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Class participation and discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, work on exercises, and present their idea during the tutorials. This will help students become aware of their learning progress, develop the skills required to improve their performance.

Group project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired to real-life consumption issues. In this project, students have to collect appropriate data, analyse the data, and present their findings in class. The group project can be used to assess students’ learning progress. In particular, their ability in applying theories to solve real-life consumption issue can be assessed.

Mid-term test Students will be required to attempt a mid-term test which will allow them aware of their learning progress, and their strengths and weaknesses in different topics of the course.

Final Examination A final examination will be conducted to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses the extent of the students’ ability to apply the subject knowledge to analyse relevant issues and provide solutions accordingly.

267

References 1. Schiffman, L.G., and Wisenblit, J., (2015). Consumer Behaviour, 11th edition. Harlow: Pearson Education 2. Hawkins, D. I. and D. L. Mothersbaugh (2012). Consumer Behavior: Building Marketing Strategy, 12th edition. Boston: McGraw-Hill/Irwin. 3. Peter, P. J. and J. C. Olson (2010). Consumer Behavior and Marketing Strategy, 9th edition. Boston: McGraw-Hill/Irwin. 4. Solomon, M. R. (2015). Consumer Behavior: Buying, Having, and Being, 11th edition. Boston: Pearson Education. (updated on 11 July 2017)

268

64 Course Description Form 1 Course Code MKT3222 Course Title Marketing Research Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles GEN1007 College Mathematics BUS2202 Business Statistics Objectives 1. Develop students’ skills for systematic problem analysis and to translate management problems into the appropriate marketing research problems. 2. Gain working “hands-on” experience with the full process of marketing research from the formulation of the research problem through the research design, the data collection and sampling methods, the questionnaire design, and the data analysis. 3. Train students to critically evaluate and appreciate the potential contributions and limitations of marketing research. 4. Familiarise students with the use of SPSS as a tool to perform data coding and analyses. 5. Strengthen students’ ability to disseminate and communicate the marketing research findings to managers and/or clients. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Explain the roles, importance and limitations of marketing research in Learning making business decisions. Outcomes (b) Define marketing research problems and develop suitable approaches to (CILOs) tackle these problems. (c) Evaluate the different steps in marketing research process (e.g., research design, coding, data analysis and interpretation, reporting and presentation). (d) Apply and evaluate various techniques of data collection and statistical analyses. (e) Conduct elementary hypothesis testing using statistical analysis software such as SPSS. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)   (b)     (c)   (d)    (e)   

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)    (b)   (c)   (d)    (e)    

IL HSM-ILOs

269

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

(a)   (b)  (c)    (d)  (e)   

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course covers the theoretical and practical concepts of marketing Indicative research process. Specifically, the course focuses on different types of Syllabus research designs, ethical issues, sampling methods and data collection with attention also paid to data analytical techniques that are commonly used. One important aim is to develop students’ understanding in research method evaluations and their skills in data analyses, interpretations and presentation. The course will also encourage students to question the limitations of marketing research and to consider the relationship between marketing research and management decisions. Students will be introduced to the statistical package that is widely used by marketing research firms.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to Marketing Research (Chapter 1) 1.1. Definition of marketing research 1.2. The process of marketing research 1.3. The industry of marketing research 1.4. Ethical issues in marketing research 2. Marketing research – defining the problem and approach (Chapter 2) 2.1. The importance of defining the problem 2.2. The process of defining the problem and developing an approach 2.3. Components of the approach 3. Research design formulation (Chapter 3-4) 3.1. Basic research designs 3.2. Introduction to exploratory research, descriptive research and causal research 3.3. Relationship among exploratory, descriptive and causal research 4. Exploratory research design (Chapter 6) 4.1. Primary vs. secondary data 4.2. Focus-group interviews 5. Descriptive research design (Chapter 7) 5.1. Survey methods 5.2. Observation methods 5.3. Other methods of descriptive research 6. Causal research design (Chapter 8) 6.1. The concept of causality 6.2. The role of evidence 6.3. Validity of experimentation 6.4. Extraneous variables 6.5. Laboratory vs. field experiments 6.6. Limitations of experimentations 7. Measurement and scaling (Chapter 9-10) 7.1. Levels of measurement 7.2. A classification of scaling techniques 7.3. Comparative scaling techniques

270

7.4. Non-comparative scaling techniques 7.5. Itemized rating scales 8. Questionnaire and form design (Chapter 11) 8.1. Questionnaire design process 8.2. Specify the information needed 8.3. Design questions to overcome respondents’ inability to answer 8.4. Pretest the questionnaire 8.5. Response rate 9. Sampling techniques (Chapter 12) 9.1. Nonprobability samples 9.2. Probability samples 9.3. Combining sample types 9.4. Determining sample size 10. Data analysis (Chapter 13, 16, 17, 18) 10.1. Data preparation: editing, coding and cleansing 10.2. Non-parametric hypothesis testing 10.3. Hypothesis testing related to differences 10.4. Correlations and regression 11. Report and presentation (Chapter 19) Learning & Discussion Teaching Students are expected to contribute to the class discussion on what they have Methodology learnt by sharing with others their views and opinions. To actively participate in the discussions, students are required to prepare and read the assigned book chapters, articles and SPSS manuals prior to the class. Group Project and Presentation This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired in this course to a real-life situation. In this project, students have to 1) identify the marketing problem(s) for the organisation and define the research objective(s), 2) develop a thorough research design that helps address the identified research problem(s), 3) select an appropriate data collection method given the research problem(s) defined and constraints, 4) collect and analyse the data, 5) perform appropriate statistical analyses and interpret the results, and 6) discuss the limitations of the research project and direction for future studies. The overall assessment of the project consists of 3 components: a final report (20%), and presentation (10%) and confidential peer evaluation (5%) Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Discussion 10%  Outcomes 2. Group Project and 35%     Presentation 3. Final Examination 55%    Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Final Examination In order for the responsible lecturer to address issues regarding students’ learning in an early stage, a mid-term examination will be conducted. A three- hour, unseen examination is given at the end of semester. Students are

271

expected to answer multiple-choice questions and essay questions. It accounts for 40% of the subject mark.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and 1. Malhotra, N.K. (2010), Marketing Research: An Applied Orientation (6th References Edition), New Jersey: Prentice Hall Pearson.

References 1. Burns, A.C. & Bush R.F., (2013). Marketing Research, 7th edition. Prentice Hall. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

272

65 Course Description Form 1 Course Code MKT3223 Course Title Integrated Marketing Communication Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles Objectives 1. Understand how aspects of communication mix interface to produce a powerful, synergistic IMC campaign. 2. Acquire the skills in analyzing and evaluating the effectiveness of advertising campaigns. 3. Investigate the creative tools required to stimulate desire and impact. 4. Identify, implement and evaluate strategies for resolution of problems. 5. Understand practical IMC strategies and their corresponding limitations. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Discuss the dynamics of marketing communication environment. Learning (b) Analyse the characteristics of different forms of marketing Outcomes communications such as advertising, sales promotions, public relations, (CILOs) direct-response marketing and point-of-purchase communications. (c) Formulate an integrated marketing communication campaign for organisations. (d) Evaluate the effectiveness of an integrated marketing communication campaign. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)    (b)    (c)     (d)   

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)     (d)  

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ The course is designed to provide students with an understanding of the Indicative theoretical foundations, practical aspects of marketing communications and Syllabus to develop professional skills in planning, implementing and evaluating communications strategies that follow an integrated marketing communication approach. Corporate communication for organisation will be illustrated and how a synergy can be achieved through the proper management of various integrated marketing communications mix elements will be taught.

Indicative Syllabus 1. An Introduction to Integrated Marketing Communications (Chapter 1) 2. The Role of IMC in the Marketing Process (Chapter 2) 3. The Communication Process (Chapter 5)

273

4. Source, Message, and Channel Factors (Chapter 6) 5. Setting Objectives and budgeting for IMC Programmes (Chapter 7) 6. Advertising (1): Media planning, broadcast media (Chapter 10 & 11) 7. Advertising (2): Print and support media (Chapter 12 & 13) 8. Using digital media for achieving communication and behavioral objectives (1) Definitions and concepts (Chapter 15) 9. Using digital media for achieving communication and behavioral objectives (2) Word of mouth and social networks (Chapter 15) 10. Sales Promotion (Chapter 16) 11. Public Relations (Chapter 17) 12. Direct marketing and personal selling (Chapter 14 & 21) 13. Organizing for IMC (Chapter 3 & 18) 14. Measuring the Effectiveness of IMC 15. A critique of marketing communication, social responsibility in marketing communication. Learning & Lectures Teaching The course contents are systematically delivered in a form of lecture. As one Methodology of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the lecture is designed to introduce the integrated marketing communication principles and concepts and illustrate with examples the opportunities and challenges in the business environment contexts. Tutorials A small class in a form of tutorial is organized to facilitate an in-depth discussion and intellectual exchange among students on integrated marketing communication issues. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the tutorial is designed to setup an interactive learning environment for students to share, discuss, and analyse integrated marketing communication issues in a small group using case studies. Reading A list of reading materials that specifies the relevant chapters in the required text in each and every lecture/tutorial is given to students at the first class. Students are required to read the assigned materials before coming to the class. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the reading is designed to encourage self and proactive learning, develop student’s inquisitive mind, and broaden student’s horizon on the subject area of integrated marketing communication. Consultations A number of consultation sessions outside the normal class time are opened for all students, who will like to seek further advices from the instructor on the subject area of integrated marketing communication. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the consultation is designed to supplement the regular class with an informal causal meeting and attend learning difficulties of students in this course.

274

Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) Learning 1. Class participation and 20%     Outcomes discussion 2. Group project – 25% Marketing Communication Audit     & Marketing Communication Plan 3. Mid-term exam 25%     4. Final Examination 30%     Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Class participation and discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials. Group project Students apply advertising principles to selected cases and present arguments and conclusions. Mid-term Examination Mid-term examination may be in the form of short essay questions and multiple choice questions. Final Examination It assesses the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve promotion problems as well as to analyse real-world marketing promotion issues. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and 1. Belch, G. & Belch, M. (2014). Advertising and Promotion: An Integrated References Marketing Communications Perspective, 10th edition. Irwin: McGraw- Hill. References 1. Shrimp, T. & Andrews, J. (2013). Advertising, Promotion & other Aspects of Integrated Marketing Communications, 9th edition. Thomson South- Western. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

275

66 Course Description Form 1 Course Code MKT3231 Course Title Management and Marketing of Services Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles Objectives 1. Introduce the concepts and theories underlying services marketing. 2. Discuss the opportunities and challenges in managing services at the marketplace. 3. Teach relevant skills and techniques in designing and delivering quality services, and in formulating effective service strategies. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Describe the unique nature and characteristics of service and values to Learning consumers. Outcomes (b) Identify opportunities and challenges in marketing services to consumers (CILOs) and managing service encounters. (c) Explain key concepts of service marketing including various service quality models and the service marketing mix. (d) Formulate effective service strategies for designing and delivering quality services in the context of China and global markets. (e) Apply various service research tools to measure, evaluate, and control service quality in supporting the implementation of service strategies at for-profit and non-profit organisations. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)  (b)   (c)   (d)    (e)     

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)  (d)    (e)  

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course aims to develop students’ ability in appraising the importance of Indicative managing and marketing services for for-profit and non-profit organisations. Syllabus It provides students with key concepts of services marketing including roles of service providers, consumer behavior in service encounters, and the service marketing mix. The course equips students with essential service marketing skills in designing and delivering quality services, and in formulating effective service strategies in the context of China and global markets.

Indicative Syllabus

276

1. New Perspectives on Marketing in the Service Economy (Lovelock 1) 2. Consumer Behavior in a Service Context (Lovelock 2) 3. Customer Satisfaction: Service Quality (Zeithaml 2 & 6) 4. Managing People for Service Delivery (Zeithaml 12) 5. Product (Lovelock 4) 6. Physical Evidence (Lovelock 10) 7. Understanding Customer Expectation & Perception via Market Research (Extra notes) 8. Placing, process & pricing Decision (Lovelock 5, 6 & 8) 9. Integrated Marketing Communications (Extra notes) 10. Building Customer Relationship & Loyalty Recovering from Service Failures (Lovelock 12 & 13) Learning & Lectures Teaching The course contents are systematically delivered in a form of lecture. As one Methodology of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the lecture is designed to introduce the management and marketing of services principles and concepts and illustrate with examples the opportunities and challenges in the business environment contexts. Tutorials A small class in a form of tutorial is organized to facilitate an in-depth discussion and intellectual exchange among students on management and marketing of service issues. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the tutorial is designed to setup an interactive learning environment for students to share, discuss, and analyse management and marketing of service issues in a small group using case studies. Reading A list of reading materials that specifies the relevant chapters in the required text in each and every lecture/tutorial is given to students at the first class. Students are required to read the assigned materials before coming to the class. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the reading is designed to encourage self and proactive learning, develop student’s inquisitive mind, and broaden student’s horizon on the subject area of management and marketing of services. Consultations A number of consultation sessions outside the normal class time are opened for all students, who will like to seek further advices from the instructor on the subject area of management and marketing of services. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the consultation is designed to supplement the regular class with an informal causal meeting and attend learning difficulties of students in this course.

277

Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Class participation and 10%      Outcomes discussion 2. Group projects & 40%      presentation 3. Mid-term exam 10%      4. Final Examination 40%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Class participation and discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials. Group project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired to real-life service marketing issues. In this project, students have to collect appropriate data, analyse the data, and present their findings in class. Mid-term test Mid-term Test may be in the form of short essay and multiple choice questions. Final Examination Final examination covers all chapters and materials being discussed in the class. The questions can be in the format of multiple choice, case studies and essay. It accounts for 40% of the total course marks. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and 1. Lovelock, C. H. and J. Wirtz (2011). Services Marketing: People, References Technology, Strategy, 7th edition. Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson/ Prentice Hall.

References 1. Zeithaml, V. A., M. J. Bitner, and D. D. Gremler (2012). Services Marketing: Integrating Customer Focus across the Firm, 6th edition. Boston: McGraw-Hill/Irwin.

278

2. Fitzsimmons, J. A. and M. J. Fitzsimmons (2008). Service Management: Operations, Strategy, Information Technology, 6th edition. Boston: McGraw-Hill/Irwin. 3. Grönroos, C. (2007). Service Management and Marketing: Customer Management in Service Competition, 3rd edition. Hoboken, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

279

67 Course Description Form 1 Course Code MKT4201 Course Title Innovation Management and New Product Development Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles MGT3131 Operations Management Objectives New products and services are vital to all firms in today’s dynamic economy. The success of new products and services drive growth and shareholder value, lead to significant competitive advantage, and create opportunities for the firm to leapfrog ahead of competitors. On the other hand, innovation is risky and many new products fail in the marketplace. Since failure is often due to ineffective management, expertise in the design and marketing of new products is a critical skill for all managers, both inside and outside of the marketing department. In this course, we focus on the management of knowledge and its applications to product innovation within the context of the firm operating in the dynamic global economy. First, the concepts, tools, and techniques which can be applied to analyse market opportunities are studied. The lectures then focus on designing, testing, and introducing new products and services. Qualitative and quantitative approaches are adopted and applied to new product development processes, strategic opportunity identification, generation of innovative product concepts and ideas, mapping customer perceptions, segmentation, product positioning, forecasting market demand, matching product design, market entry strategies, and the testing of such strategies. Particular emphasis is placed on ways and means to lead the organisation, incorporate consumers, customers, and competitors into the different aspects of new product development and its commercialization. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Understand why new products fail in the marketplace. Learning (b) Understand the crucial role of management in the firm’s innovation and Outcomes new product development activities. (CILOs) (c) Know the cutting-edge theories underlying the concepts, tools, and techniques applied to analyse market opportunities and the design, testing, and commercialization of new products and services. (d) Apply different qualitative and quantitative approaches to new product development processes, strategic opportunity identification, generation of innovative product concepts and ideas, mapping customer perceptions, segmentation, product positioning, forecasting market demand, matching product design, market entry strategies, and the testing of such strategies. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)    

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)   (b)   (c)    (d)     

280

Course Part I. Innovation Management and Knowledge Management Synopsis/ 1. How knowledge works: Purposes, processes, and contexts Indicative 2. Organisational forms to support knowledge work: The role of Syllabus information-communications technology 3. Managing knowledge creation in teams 4. Managing knowledge and knowledge creation for product innovation Part II. Discovery - opportunity identification 5. The new product development process: Principles of success 6. Strategic planning and opportunity identification for new products 7. Discovering and reifying insights 8. Brand strategy in new product development Part III. Design - concept and product design, development and evaluation 9. Concept and idea generation 10. Idea generation, innovation, and new product development 11. Concept development 12. Concept evaluation techniques 13. New products and positioning 14. Optimizing product design 15. Testing and forecasting Part IV. Delivery and commercialization – effective approaches to product launch and introduction. 16. Preparing a new product launch plan 17. Market testing 18. Pricing and packaging 19. Innovation marketing 20. New product development management - Inspiring the organisation Learning & Lectures Teaching The course content will be delivered primarily through lectures. These Methodology sessions aim to present and explain the management of knowledge and its applications to product innovation within the context of the firm operating in the dynamic global economy. Concepts, tools, and techniques which can be applied to analyse market opportunities and the designing, testing, and commercialization of new products and services. Case studies and business applications will also be discussed. Guest speakers will be invited to share real-world experience in innovation management and new product development, especially with regard to challenges, opportunities, planning, and development in the Hong Kong context. Seminars and tutorials These sessions are introduced to help students gain better understanding of the topics covered in the lectures, and to discuss and explain practical applications. Workshop and practice questions will be introduced to enable a better grasp of the real-world relevance of concepts, ideas, and skills and where appropriate, short cases will be assigned for students to study real-world problems in innovation management and new product development. There will also be group work and discussions, where students would be able to exchange ideas and discuss problems.

281

Group projects and presentation Students will be grouped and required to submit a long case study, with detailed discussion of problem choice, data collection, hypotheses formulation, and empirical relevance. In addition to academic knowledge, this exercise will test the individual’s ability to work co-operatively and to communicate and argue effectively. Written examination There will be a 2-3-hour final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve problems as well as to analyse practical issues. Assessment Specific assessment % Course intended learning Methods in methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed Alignment (Please tick as appropriate) with Course (a) (b) (c) (d) Intended 1. Written 40%    Learning examination Outcomes 2. Assignments 10%    3. Test 10%    4. Group project 40%    

Total 100 %

Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Assignments Students apply innovation theories and frameworks to business cases.

Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired to innovation and new product development.

Test A test will be given around week 7 or 8. It covers chapters and materials being discussed in the class from weeks 1 to 7. The questions can be in the format of case studies, essay or both. It accounts for 10% of the total course marks.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs.

282

Reading List Textbook and Trott, P. Innovation Management and New Product Development, 5th edition. References New York: Pearson, 2012. References 1. Crawford, M. and DiBendetto, A. New Products Management, 11th edition. New York: McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2014. 2. Newell, S., Robertson, M. Scarbrough, H. and Swan, J. Managing Knowledge Work and Innovation. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2009. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

283

68 Course Description Form 1 Course Code MKT4202 Course Title Introduction to Public Relations Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles Objectives The course aims to supply the knowledge necessary for the student to evaluate the roles and functions of public relations management in the context of marketing, and to understand how to effectively apply conceptual understanding of public relations to marketing problems in the modern consumer-oriented economy. In particular, the lectures will seek to create a knowledge base of the main ideas and principles of the public relations discipline, and to demonstrate how these concepts are reified in practice by the marketing manager in real-world situations. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Understand the roles and functions of public relations management in the Learning context of marketing. Outcomes (b) Know how to effectively apply conceptual understanding of public (CILOs) relations to marketing problems in the modern consumer-oriented

economy. (c) Reify public relations ideas and concepts in practice, especially on the part of the marketing manager in real-world situations. (d) Demonstrate the above knowledge in presentations, especially in the context of simulated job interviews.

CILOs in Alignment

with PILOs PILOs and Major-

ILOs CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)   (b)     (c)      (d)  

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)     (b)     (c)     (d) 

Course Part I. Foundations of Public Relations Synopsis/ 1. Models of public relations, with special reference to marketing Indicative 2. Public relations research, with special reference to marketing Syllabus 3. Public relations processes, with special reference to marketing Part II. Public Relations and Communication

4. Internal communication, with special reference to marketing

284

5. External communication, with special reference to marketing 6. Cross-cultural and international communication, with special reference to marketing Part III. Public Relations and Media 7. Understanding media needs with special reference to marketing: Preparing news releases and publicity messages 8. Using radio, television, and electronic technologies, with special reference to marketing 9. Planning press conferences and other special media events, with special reference to marketing Part IV. Developing Public Relations Programs and Campaigns 10. Determining public relations requirements and objectives, with special reference to marketing 11. Planning and implementing public relations programs and campaigns, with special reference to marketing 12. Developing budget evaluation of public relations programs and campaigns, with special reference to marketing 13. Public relations in different settings – corporate, academic, government, non-profit, trade associations and unions – with special reference to marketing Part V. Public Relations and Crisis Management 14. Developing public relations crisis plans, with special reference to marketing 15. Crisis public relations communications, with special reference to marketing 16. Anticipating public relations crisis situations, with special reference to marketing Part VI. Public Relations and Legal and Ethical Issues 17. Legal and ethical practice of public relations, with special reference to marketing Learning & Lectures Teaching The course content will be delivered primarily through lectures. These Methodology sessions aim to present and explain the fundamental concepts of public relations management and their applications to marketing. Case studies and business applications will also be discussed. Guest speakers will be invited to share real-world experience in public relations and marketing, especially with regard to challenges, opportunities, planning, and development in the Hong Kong context. Seminars and tutorials These sessions are introduced to help students gain better understanding of the topics covered in the lectures, and to discuss and explain practical applications. Workshop and practice questions will be introduced to enable a better grasp of the real-world relevance of concepts, ideas, and skills and where appropriate, short cases will be assigned for students to study real-world problems in innovation management and new product development. There

285

will also be group work and discussions, where students would be able to exchange ideas and discuss problems.

Assignments and tests Assignment and tests help inform the learning curve. The student’s academic strengths and weaknesses can be readily identified with regular feedback on learning progress, particularly with regard to areas for improvement. In this way, students can adjust study skills and approaches as appropriate. Group projects and presentation Students will be grouped and required to submit a long case study, with detailed discussion of problem choice, data collection, hypotheses formulation, and empirical relevance. In addition to academic knowledge, this exercise will test the individual’s ability to work co-operatively and to communicate and argue effectively. Written examination There will be a 2-3-hour final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve problems as well as to analyse practical issues. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weightin outcomes to be assessed with Course g (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Learning 1. Written 40%     Outcomes examination 2. Assignments and 20% tests 3. Group project 40% Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

286

Reading List Textbook and Wilcox, D.L. Public Relations: Strategies and Tactics, 10th edition. New References York: Pearson, 2014. References 1. Fill, C. and Roper, S. Corporate Reputation: Brand and Communication. New York: Pearson, 2012. 2. Theaker, A. The Public Relations Handbook, 4th edition. London: Routledge, 2012.

(updated as at 29 July 2015)

287

69 Course Description Form 1 Course Code MKT4203 Course Title Retail Merchandising and Retail Operations Management Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT4204 Strategic Retail Management Objectives The primary objective of the course is to instruct students in the latest knowledge of merchandising management and retail operations management theory and practice. As a result, students would be able to understand and apply the four major topics in retail merchandising and retail operations management: management of merchandising, management of the store, management of merchandising personnel, and management of point-of-sales systems. In particular, students would learn how to optimally buy goods and merchandise, use earmarked funding more efficiently, and enhance the marketing firm’s profit opportunities. Students would then be able to adopt and apply appropriate methods to optimally operate and manage the store, and contribute maximally to the marketing firm’s commercial success in the short and long run. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Know the cutting-edge theory of merchandising management and retail Learning operations management. Outcomes (b) Know the best practices of merchandising management and retail (CILOs) operations management.

(c) Understand the four major topics in retail merchandising and retail operations management: management of merchandising, management of the store, management of merchandising personnel, and management of point-of-sales systems. (d) Apply this understanding to problems of merchandising management and retail operations management in the real world. CILOs in Alignment

with PILOs PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)  (b)   (c)   (d)    

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILO s (a)     (b)      (c)     (d)     

288

Course Part I. Merchandising Management Synopsis/ 1. Managing the merchandising process Indicative 2. Buying and planning merchandise Syllabus 3. Retail inventory management 4. Retail pricing 5. Retail communication mix Part II. Retail Store Management 6. The know-how of retail stores management and maintenance 7. Managing and maintaining retail stores 8. Retail store layout, design and visual environment 9. Retail customer service Part III. Managing the performance of personnel 10. Human resources management in retail stores 11. Managing performance in selling Part IV. Managing retail point-of-sales systems 12. Point-of-sales system in retail store management 13. Setting up a point-of-sales system and operating procedure

Learning & Lectures Teaching The course content will be delivered primarily through lectures. These Methodology sessions aim to present and explain the fundamental concepts of retail merchandising and retail operations management and their applications in the dynamic global economy. Case studies and business applications will also be discussed. Guest speakers will be invited to share real-world experience in retail merchandising and retail operations management, especially with regard to challenges, opportunities, planning, and development in the Hong Kong context. Seminars and tutorials These sessions are introduced to help students gain better understanding of the topics covered in the lectures, and to discuss and explain practical applications. Workshop and practice questions will be introduced to enable a better grasp of the real-world relevance of concepts, ideas, and skills and where appropriate, short cases will be assigned for students to study real-world problems in innovation management and new product development. There will also be group work and discussions, where students would be able to exchange ideas and discuss problems.

289

Assessment Specific assessment % Course intended learning Methods in methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed Alignment (Please tick as appropriate) with Course (a) (b) (c) (d) Intended 1. Written examination 40%     Learning 2. Assignments 10%    Outcomes 3. Test 10%    4. Group project 40%     Total 100 %

Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired to real-life retail problems.

Assignments Students apply retailing principles and techniques to business cases.

Test The test may be in the form of short essay questions, or multiple choice questions.

Written examination Student’s ability in comprehending English texts, presenting ideas and writing effectively can be assessed by examination. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Rabolt, N.J. and Miler, J.K. Concepts and Cases in Retail and References Merchandise Management, 2nd edition. New York: Fairchild Books, 2009. Reference

290

Levy, M. and Weitz, B. Retail Management, 9th edition. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2014.

(updated as at 29 July 2015)

291

Course Description Form Course Code MKT4204 Course Title Strategic Retail Management Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles Objectives This course aims in the first place to equip students with an in-depth understanding of the theory and practice of managing retail organisations, with particular reference to marketing strategy. A second objective focuses on the optimal solution of strategic and tactical/operational problems and issues faced by marketing managers in the real world. The course therefore seeks to combine instruction in retailing to optimally meet consumer preferences and business, financial, communication, and operational skills, especially with reference to consistency and integration with the marketing firm’s strategy. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Know the theory of managing retail organisations, especially with Learning reference to marketing strategy. Outcomes (b) Know the practice of managing retail organisations, especially with (CILOs) reference to marketing strategy.

(c) Apply this knowledge to the solution of real-world strategic and tactical problems and issues faced by marketing managers. (d) Understand the relationships between retailing to optimally meet consumer preferences and business, financial, communication, and operational skills, especially with reference to the marketing firm’s strategy. CILOs in

Alignment PILOs with PILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CILOs (a)   (b)   (c)     (d)    

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)    (d)      

Course Synopsis/ 1. Introduction to retailing Indicative 2. Types of retailers in the modern market economy Syllabus 3. Multi-channel retailing 4. Consumer retail buying behavior 5. Retail market strategy and retail mix

292

6. Financial strategy in retail marketing 7. Retail location and retail site location 8. Human resource management in retailing 9. Information systems in retail management 10. Supply chain management in retailing 11. Customer relationship management in retailing Learning & Lectures Teaching The course content will be delivered primarily through lectures. These Methodology sessions aim to present and explain the fundamental concepts of strategic retail management and their applications in the dynamic global economy. Case studies and business applications will also be discussed. Guest speakers will be invited to share real-world experience in strategic retail management, especially with regard to challenges, opportunities, planning, and development in the Hong Kong context. Seminars and tutorials These sessions are introduced to help students gain better understanding of the topics covered in the lectures, and to discuss and explain practical applications. Workshop and practice questions will be introduced to enable a better grasp of the real-world relevance of concepts, ideas, and skills and where appropriate, short cases will be assigned for students to study real-world problems in innovation management and new product development. There will also be group work and discussions, where students would be able to exchange ideas and discuss problems.

Assignments and tests Assignment and tests help inform the learning curve. The student’s academic strengths and weaknesses can be readily identified with regular feedback on learning progress, particularly with regard to areas for improvement. In this way, students can adjust study skills and approaches as appropriate. Group projects and presentation Students will be grouped and required to submit a long case study, with detailed discussion of problem choice, data collection, hypotheses formulation, and empirical relevance. In addition to academic knowledge, this exercise will test the individual’s ability to work co-operatively and to communicate and argue effectively. Written examination There will be a 2-3-hour final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve problems as well as to analyse practical issues. Assessment Specific % weighting Course intended learning Methods in assessment outcomes to be assessed Alignment methods/tasks (Please tick as appropriate) with Course (a) (b) (c) (d) Intended 1. Written 40%     examination Learning 2. Assignments 10%     Outcomes 3. Test 10%    4. Group project 40%     Total 100 %

293

Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired to strategic retail management issues. Assignments Students apply strategic retail management principles and frameworks to business cases. Test The test may be in the form of short essay questions, or multiple choice questions. Written examination There will be a 2-3-hour final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve problems as well as to analyse practical issues. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Levy, M. and Weitz, B. Retail Management, 9th edition. New York: References McGraw-Hill 2014. Reference Berman, B. and Evans, J. Retail Management: A Strategic Approach, 12th edition. New York: Pearson, 2013. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

294

71 Course Description Form Course Code MKT4205 Course Title Strategic Sales Management Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles Objectives The main objective of this course is to prepare students to function effectively in the real world of selling and sales management, especially in the part of junior managers in a sales force. The second objective is to instruct students in the social, legal, and ethical aspects of today’s technically sophisticated and globalized selling environment. This course is also designed to instill an understanding of the functions and social, ethical, and personal responsibilities of a sales force in typical marketing case-situations. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Know the meaning and ambit of strategic factors and considerations in Learning sales management. Outcomes (b) Apply this above knowledge to real world situations, especially in a (CILOs) strategic-managerial context. (c) Understand the social, legal, and ethical aspects of the selling environment in modern technology-oriented economies, especially in a strategic-managerial context. (d) Execute the functions and responsibilities of junior-level managers in a sales force, especially with a view towards consistency and integration with the firm’s marketing strategy. CILOs in Alignment PILOs with PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)    (b)     (c)  (d)   

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)   (b)   (c)  (d)   

Course Part I. Introduction to Sales Force Management Synopsis/ 1. The ambit of sales force management Indicative 2. Sales force management: strategy and tactics Part II. Organizing, Staffing and Training a Sale Force Syllabus 3. Sales force organisation 4. Profiling and recruiting sales personnel 5. Selecting sales force applicants 6. Hiring and socializing the new sales force 7. Developing and conducting sales training programmes Part III. Directing Sales Force Operations 8. Motivating a sales force

295

9. Sales force compensation 10. Managing sales force expenses and transportation 11. Leadership and supervision of a sales force 12. Sales force morale Part IV. Sales Planning 13. Estimating market potential and forecasting sales 14. Sales department budgeting 15. Managing sales territories 16. Sales Quotas and their management Part V. Evaluating Sales Performance 17. Measurement and analysis of sales volume 18. Marketing cost and profitability 19. Evaluating the individual's sales performance 20. Ethical responsibilities of a sales force

Learning & Lectures Teaching The course content will be delivered primarily through lectures. These Methodology sessions aim to present and explain the fundamental concepts of strategic retail management and their applications in the dynamic global economy. Case studies and business applications will also be discussed. Guest speakers will be invited to share real-world experience in strategic retail management, especially with regard to challenges, opportunities, planning, and development in the Hong Kong context. Seminars and tutorials These sessions are introduced to help students gain better understanding of the topics covered in the lectures, and to discuss and explain practical applications. Workshop and practice questions will be introduced to enable a better grasp of the real-world relevance of concepts, ideas, and skills and where appropriate, short cases will be assigned for students to study real-world problems in innovation management and new product development. There will also be group work and discussions, where students would be able to exchange ideas and discuss problems.

296

Assessment Methods in Specific % Course intended learning Alignment assessment weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course methods/tasks (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) Learning 1. Written 40%    Outcomes examination 2. Assignments 10%    3. Test 10%    4. Group project 40%    

Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired to strategic sales force management.

Assignments Students apply sales management principles and strategic thinking to business cases.

Test The test may be in the form of short essay questions, or multiple choice questions.

Written examination There will be a 2-3-hour final exam to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses among other things the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve problems as well as to analyse practical issues. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and Spiro, R., Stanton, W. and Rich, G. Management of a Sales Force, 12th References edition. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2007.

Reference

297

Merk, M. Luxury Sales Force Management: Strategies for Winning Over Your Brand Ambassadors. New York: Macmillan, 2014. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

298

72 Course Description Form Course Code MKT4206 Course Title Marketing and Fund-raising for Non-Profit Organizations Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles Objectives 1. To understand the use of marketing concepts, theories and practices as applied to non-profit organisations (NPOs). 2. To acquire knowledge concerning the characteristics of social cause ideas that make the tasks of marketing substantial different than that for products or service. 3. To analyse the environment faced by the NPO in the context of external opportunities and threats. 4. To develop analytical, problem-solving and communication skills necessary for the marketing of NPOs. 5. To develop appropriate marketing and fund-raising strategies for the NPO including the marketing of social cause ideas and fund-raising.

Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) evaluate the marketing and fund-raising strategies of NPOs; Learning (b) design and propose a successful marketing and fund-raising programme Outcomes for a NPO; (CILOs) (c) understand different stakeholders' roles in the non-profit marketing process; and (d) differentiate the marketing strategies of for-profit and non-profit organisations.

CILOs in

Alignment with PILOs PILOs and Major- ILOs CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)    (b)      (c)     (d)     

MKT-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILO s (a)    (b)    (c)  (d)  

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course focuses on building marketing strategy for NPOs. The course will Indicative encourage a broad view of marketing and will present a framework for growing Syllabus the NPO efficiently. The course experience focuses on creating compelling unique value for clients/customers as a means to growth.

299

Indicative Syllabus 1. Definitions and the historical development of NPOs. 2. Characteristics of non-profit organisations, public and private non-profit organisations, classification of non-profit organisations. 3. Importance and significance of the financing and fund-raising for non-profit organisations. 4. Values and culturological issues in NPOs, ethical and law issues. 5. The importance of organisational environment, analysis of micro and macro- environment. 6. Analysis of advantages, disadvantages, threats and opportunities of different types of NPOs. 7. The marketing mix of NPOs, market segmentation, positioning and the role of marketers in non-profit organisations. 8. The fund-raising strategies and processes of NPOs. 9. The vision, mission and goals of a NPO. 10. The marketing plan in NPO. 11. Social marketing. 12. Volunteering.

Learning & Lecture Teaching The course contents are systematically delivered in a form of lecture. As one of the Methodology adopted teaching methods in this course, the lecture is designed to introduce the marketing principles and concepts and illustrate with examples the opportunities and challenges in the business environment contexts.

Tutorial A small class in a form of tutorial is organized to facilitate an in-depth discussion and intellectual exchange among students on marketing for NPOs issues. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the tutorial is designed to set up an interactive learning environment for students to share, discuss, and analyse marketing for NPOs issues in a small group using case studies.

Reading A list of reading materials that specifies the relevant chapters in the required text in each and every lecture/tutorial is given to students at the first class. Students are required to read the assigned materials before coming to the class. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the reading is designed to encourage self and proactive learning, develop student’s inquisitive mind, and broaden student’s horizon on the subject area of marketing for NPOs.

Consultation A number of consultation sessions outside the normal class time are opened for all students, who will like to seek further advices from the instructor on the subject area of marketing for NPOs. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the consultation is designed to supplement the regular class with an informal causal meeting and attend learning difficulties of students in this course.

300

Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning outcomes to Alignment methods/tasks weighting be assessed with Course (a) (b) (c) (d) Intended 1. Class participation 20%     Learning and discussion Outcomes 2. Group project 30%     3. Mid-term 20%     examination 4. Final Examination 30%     Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Group project Students apply advertising principles to selected cases and present arguments and conclusions.

Mid-term Examination Mid-term examination may be in the form of short essay questions and multiple choice questions.

Final Examination It assesses the students’ grasp of the concepts and analytical skills, and their capability to apply them to resolve promotion problems as well as to analyse real-world marketing promotion issues.

Student Class contact: Study Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and Alan R. Andreasen, Philip Kotler (2014) Strategic Marketing of Non-Profit References Organisations, Prentice Hall, NJ (international edition).

References

301

1. Nancy R. Lee, Philip Kotler (2008) Social Marketing: Influencing Behaviors for Good, 4th Edition. Sage Publications: Thousand Oaks, CA. 2. Adrian Sargeant (2009) Marketing Management for Nonprofit Organisations, 3rd Edition, Oxford University Press. 3. Walter Wymer, Patricia Knowles, Roger Gomes (2012) Nonprofit Marketing: Marketing Management for Charitable and Nongovernmental Organisations, Sage. 4. W. Chan Kim and Renée Mauborgne (2005) Blue Ocean Strategy: How to Crete Uncontested Market Space and make Competition Irrelevant, Harvard Business School Press. 5. Michael E. Porter (1998) Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analyzing Industries and Competitors, Harvard Business School Press. 6. Mario Pricken (2004) Creative Advertising: Ideas and Techniques from the World’s Best Campaigns, Thames and Hudson. 7. Bernd H. Schmitt and Bernd Schmitt (2003) Customer Experience Management: A Revolutionary Approach to Connecting With Your Customer, Wiley. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

302

73 Course Description Form Course Code MKT4221 Course Title International Marketing Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles Objectives 1. Demonstrate the effects of environmental and organisational forces on a firm’s global marketing activities. 2. Discuss the characteristics of different entry strategies in global marketing. 3. Teach relevant skills and techniques in formulating marketing strategies to compete in the global marketplace. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Recognize the effects of political, economic, social and cultural, and Learning organisational factors on the practices of marketing in the global Outcomes marketplace. (CILOs) (b) Analyse the impacts of global marketing environment on firm’s marketing activities. (c) Identify and evaluate market opportunities for overseas expansion and the associated risks and challenges. (d) Utilize relevant skills and techniques to synthesize and analyse data and information in making marketing decisions from a global perspective. (e) Formulate appropriate marketing strategies to compete in the global marketplace. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)   (b)    (c)    (d)     (e)    

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)   (b)   (c)    (d)   (e)  

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course provides students rigorous theoretical groundings against which Indicative marketing problems and issues are systematically synthesized, analysed, and Syllabus managed in the global marketplace. It focuses on the analysis of global marketing environment and management of marketing activities around the world. It equips students with relevant skills and techniques to formulate strategy for marketing a firm’s products and services overseas.

Indicative Syllabus 1. The global marketing imperative (Chapter 1) 2. Trade institutions and trade policy (Chapter 2) 3. The culture environment (Chapter 3) 4. The economic environment (Chapter 4) 5. The political and legal environment (Chapter 5)

303

6. Strategic planning (Chapter 6) 7. Marketing organisation, implementation and control (Chapter 7) 8. Market Research (Chapter 8) 9. Market entry and expansion (Chapter 9) 10. Global product management and branding (Chapter 14) 11. Global Services (Chapter 15) 12. Global logistics and materials management (Chapter 16) 13. Global Pricing (Chapter 17) 14. Global promotional strategies (Chapter 18) Learning & Lectures Teaching The course contents are systematically delivered in a form of lecture. As one Methodology of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the lecture is designed to introduce international marketing principles and concepts and illustrate with examples the opportunities and challenges in the business environment contexts. Tutorials A small class in a form of tutorial is organized to facilitate an in-depth discussion and intellectual exchange among students on international marketing issues. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the tutorial is designed to setup an interactive learning environment for students to share, discuss, and analyse international marketing issues in a small group using case studies. Reading A list of reading materials that specifies the relevant chapters in the required text in each and every lecture/tutorial is given to students at the first class. Students are required to read the assigned materials before coming to the class. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the reading is designed to encourage self and proactive learning, develop student’s inquisitive mind, and broaden student’s horizon on the subject area of international marketing. Consultations A number of consultation sessions outside the normal class time are opened for all students, who will like to seek further advices from the instructor on the subject area of international marketing. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the consultation is designed to supplement the regular class with an informal causal meeting and attend learning difficulties of students in this course. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Class participation and 20%      Outcomes discussion 2. Group projects 40%      3. Final Examination 40%      Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Class participation and discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials. Group project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired to real-life international marketing issues. In this project, students have to collect foreign market information and data, analyse the data, and present their findings in class.

304

Final Examination Final examination covers all chapters and materials being discussed in the class. The questions may be in the format of multiple choice, case studies or essay. It accounts for 40% of the total course marks.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and 1. Wild, J.J. and Wild, K.L. (2015). International Business: The Challenges References of Globalization, 8th edition. Prentice Hall

References 1. Onkvisit, S. and J. J. Shaw (2009). International Marketing: Strategy and Theory, 5th edition. New York: Routledge. 2. Keegan, W. and M. C. Green (2014). Global Marketing, 8th edition. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson/Prentice-Hall. 3. Gillespie, K. and H. D. Hennessey (2015). Global Marketing, 4rd edition. Mason, Ohio: South-Western/Cengage Learning. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

305

74 Course Description Form Course Code MKT4222 Course Title Strategic Marketing Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles Objectives 1. Provide an integration of marketing concepts and theories at a strategic level. 2. Develop a strategic thinking when making and implementing marketing decisions. 3. Teach relevant skills and techniques in formulating a strategic marketing plan to sustain a long-term business growth and attain competitive advantages. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Analyse market and organisational performance with various analytical Learning tools. Outcomes (b) Synthesize marketing theories learned in foundation courses in an (CILOs) integrated approach to make strategic marketing decisions. (c) Evaluate and identify key success factors & issues in periodic marketing plan. (d) Construct a comprehensive strategic marketing plan for an organisation. CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs

and Major- CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ILOs (a)    (b)    (c)   (d)  

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)   (b)    (c)    (d)  

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course aims to enhance students’ ability to integrate fundamental Indicative marketing theories and analytical tools to formulate and implement Syllabus performance-driven marketing strategies that can sustain a long-term business growth and attain competitive advantages. Students will learn the marketing strategies that combine product development, promotion, distribution, pricing, relationship management and other elements. Students will also learn to determine and evaluate the strategic choice of target market segments, positioning, marketing mix, and allocation of resources.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Imperatives for Market Driven Strategy (Chapter 1) 2. Markets and Competitive Space (Chapter 2) 3. Strategic Market Segmentation (Chapter 3) 4. Strategic Customer Relationship (Chapter 4)

306

5. Capabilities for learning about Customers and Markets (Chapter 5) 6. Market Targeting and Strategic Positioning (Chapter 6) 7. Strategic Relationships (Chapter 7) 8. Innovation and New Product Strategy (Chapter 8) 9. Strategic Brand Management (Chapter 9) 10. Value Chain Strategy (Chapter 10) 11. Pricing Strategy (Chapter 11) 12. Promotion, Advertising and Sales Promotion Strategies (Chapter 12) 13. Sales Force, Internet and Direct Marketing Strategies (Chapter 13) 14. Marketing Strategy Implementation and Control (Chapter 15) Learning & Lectures Teaching The course contents are systematically delivered in a form of lecture. As one Methodology of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the lecture is designed to introduce strategic marketing principles and concepts and illustrate with examples the opportunities and challenges in the business environment contexts. Tutorials A small class in a form of tutorial is organized to facilitate an in-depth discussion and intellectual exchange among students on strategic marketing issues. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the tutorial is designed to setup an interactive learning environment for students to share, discuss, and analyse strategic marketing issues in a small group using case studies. Reading A list of reading materials that specifies the relevant chapters in the required text in each and every lecture/tutorial is given to students at the first class. Students are required to read the assigned materials before coming to the class. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the reading is designed to encourage self and proactive learning, develop student’s inquisitive mind, and broaden student’s horizon on the subject area of strategic marketing. Consultations A number of consultation sessions outside the normal class time are opened for all students, who will like to seek further advices from the instructor on the subject area of strategic marketing. As one of the adopted teaching methods in this course, the consultation is designed to supplement the regular class with an informal causal meeting and attend learning difficulties of students in this course. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) Learning 1. Class participation and 20%     Outcomes discussion 2. Group projects 40%     3. Final Examination 40%     Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Class participation and discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials.

307

Group project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired to strategic marketing issues. In this project, students have to collect firm, industry and market information for selected case, analyse the strategy and positioning of the case company, and present their findings in class. Final Examination Final examination covers all chapters and materials being discussed in the class. The questions may be in the format of multiple choice, case studies or essay. It accounts for 40% of the total course marks.

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and 1. Cravens, D. W. and N. F. Piercy (2012). Strategic Marketing, 10th References edition. Boston: McGraw-Hill/Irwin.

References 1. Chernev, A. and Kotler, P. (2014). Strategic Marketing Management, 8th Edition. Cerebellum Press 2. Gilligan, C. and R. M.S. Wilson (2009). Strategic Marketing Planning, 2nd edition. Burlington, MA: Elsevier/Butterworth-Heinemann. 3. Reed, P. W. (2010). Strategic Marketing: Decision Making and Planning, 3rd edition. South Melbourne, Victoria: Cengage Learning.

308

75 Course Description Form Course Code MKT4223 Course Title Sales and Retail Management Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles Objectives 1. Explain how a sales concept reflects and aids the marketing goals of an organisation. 2. Identify key ways to develop good sales relationships with customers and others. 3. Explain the role of a developed customer strategy and how to create one. 4. Explain the stages of a sale and how to achieve results. 5. Identify and explain key methods for managing a sales team. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Explain the critical components of sales force management and retail Learning management. Outcomes (b) Identify the imperatives of organizing, staffing, and training a sales (CILOs) force as well as managing sales force operations. (c) Use analytical tools such as situation analysis and trading-area analysis to enhance sales management decision. (d) Discuss the important elements of managing retail business (e) Evaluate sales performance in different dimensions such as financial and operational dimensions. CILOs in Alignment

with PILOs PILOs and Major-

ILOs CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)    (b)    (c)    (d)    (e)    

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)   (d)     (e)  

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ This course aims to enhance students’ ability to attain an organisation's sales Indicative goals in an effective and efficient manner through planning, staffing, Syllabus training, leading and controlling organisational resources. Students will learn the concepts of retail management and to use strategic tools such as retail performance metrics, situation analysis, trading-area analysis, promotional and store location strategies.

309

Indicative Syllabus 1. Overview of Sales force management and retail management 1.1. Strategic sales force management 1.2. Personal selling process 1.3. Building and sustaining relationships in retailing 1.4. Strategic planning in retailing 2. Organizing, staffing and training a sales force 2.1. Sales force organisation 2.2. Recruiting of salespeople 2.3. Sales training program 3. Directing and planning sales force operations 3.1. Motivating and leading a sales force 3.2. Sales force compensation, quota and expenses 3.3. Sales forecasting and budgets 4. Situation analysis and Store location strategies 4.1. Store-based strategy mix 4.2. Traditional and non-traditional retailing 4.3. Trading-area analysis and site selection 5. Managing a retail business 5.1. Retail organisation 5.2. Retail operations management 5.3. Merchandise management and pricing 6. Evaluating sales performance 6.1. Sales volume, marketing cost and profitability analysis 6.2. Sales force compensation, quota and expenses 6.3. Sales forecasting and budgets Learning & Lectures Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited. Tutorials Students are divided into smaller groups of 15 students each. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Case Studies and Presentations Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. They also provide an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Test and Quizzes Tests and quizzes help inform the students’ learning progress. They identify students’ strengths and weaknesses, and provide regular feedbacks on students’ learning progress, particularly on areas for improvement so that students could adjust their study skills/approaches as fit.

310

Project Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills to analyse real-world issues. Students will select a current issue relating to this course with the instructor’s approval, and discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as well as the related matters. Students are expected to conduct the relevant literature review, statistics and practical material, write a paper, and present the findings in class. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Learning 1. Class participation and 15%      Outcomes discussion 2. Assignments 10%    3. Test 10%      4. Project and Presentation 25%      5. Examination 40%      Total 100 %

Class participation and discussion Students are expected to attend both lectures and tutorials, stay focused during classes, ask questions when the need arises, actively participate in and contribute to discussion, and work on in-class exercises during the tutorials. Assignment Students will be required to finish assignments and tutorial exercises which cover sales force management problems. Test A 1 hour test will be given around week 7. It covers chapters and materials being discussed in the class from weeks 1 to 7. The questions can be in the format of case studies, essay or both. It accounts for 10% of the total course marks. Project This group project provides students with an opportunity to apply the subject knowledge and skills acquired to sales force management issues. In this project, students have to collect data on sales force in retailing industry, analyse the data, and present their findings in class. Final Examination Final examination covers all chapters and materials being discussed in the class. The questions may be in the format of multiple choice, case studies or essay. It accounts for 40% of the total course marks. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs.

311

Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and 1. Johnston, M. and Marshall G. (2013). Sales Force Management: References Leadership, Innovation, Technology, 11th edition. Routledge. 2. Rosanna Spiro, William J Stanton and Gregory A. Rich (2007). Management of a Sales Force, 12th edition. McGraw-Hill.

(updated as at 29 July 2015)

312

76 Course Description Form Course Code MKT4231 Course Title Brand Management Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles Objectives 1. Introduce the concepts and theories pertaining to brand management and marketing. 2. Demonstrate the use of promotion tools in supporting the brand development. 3. Teach relevant skills and techniques in formulating marketing strategies to create and build a successful brand in the market. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Comprehend the importance of branding and its positioning within the Learning consumer mindset. Outcomes (b) Formulate strategies to effectively manage a brand. (CILOs) (c) Evaluate brand equity in terms of assets that eventually strengthen a product brand. (d) Synchronize branding with other marketing mixes to produce effective marketing campaign. CILOs in

Alignment with PILOs PILOs and Major-

ILOs CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)   

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILO s (a)  (b)   (c)    (d)  

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ Brand management is an application of marketing techniques to a specific Indicative product or product line. The course will teach students to devise marketing Syllabus strategies to establish brands in the market, including detailed analysis of the competitive brands in the market, identifying the needs of the consumer and devising the promotional tools required to highlight the unique selling propositions of the brand.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Brands and Brand Management 1.1. Branding & brands 1.2. The components of brand 1.3. Corporate, product & own label branding 2. Customer-based brand equity 2.1. Sources of brand equity

313

2.2. Creating customer value 2.3. Relationship of customer equity 2.4. To brand equity 3. Brand Positioning 3.1. Identifying & establishing brand positioning 3.2. Positioning guidelines 3.3. Defining the establishing brand mantras 4. Choosing brand elements to build brand equity 4.1. The benefits of the chosen elements 4.2. Criteria for choosing brand elements 4.3. Options & tactics for brand elements 5. Designing marketing campaigns to build brand equity 5.1. New perspectives on marketing 5.2. Product strategy 5.3. Pricing & channel strategy 6. IMC to build brand equity 6.1. The new media environment 6.2. Overview of marketing communication options 6.3. Developing integrated marketing communication programs 7. Developing a brand equity mgt and measurement system 7.1. The new accountability 7.2. Designing brand tracking studies 7.3. Establishing a brand equity management system 8. Capturing the customer mindset and market performance 8.1. Comparative methods 8.2. Holistic methods 8.3. Qualitative & quantitative research techniques 9. Designing and implementing brand strategies 9.1. Brand architecture & hierarchy 9.2. Designing a branding strategy 9.3. Using cause marketing to build 9.4. Brand equity 10. Managing brand over time 10.1. Reinforcing brands 10.2. Revitalizing brands 10.3. Adjustments to brand portfolio Learning & Lectures Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of Methodology the fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited. Tutorials Students are divided into smaller groups of 15 students each. During the tutorials, tutor uses relevant examples to illustrate the concepts and techniques learned from the lecturer. Students are encouraged to practice exercises problems along with the tutor, raise questions, and participate in discussion of conceptual issues or small cases. Case Studies and Presentations Mini-cases at the end of chapters will be selected for in-class group discussion and presentation. The case studies allow students to work as a team to discuss and debate theories and applications covered in the lecture. They also provide an opportunity to sharpen students’ presentation skills. Project

314

Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills to analyse real-world issues. Students will select a current issue relating to this course with the instructor’s approval, and discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications, as well as the related matters. Students are expected to conduct the relevant literature review, statistics and practical material, write a paper, and present the findings in class. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed with Course (Please tick as appropriate) Intended (a) (b) (c) (d) Learning 1. Class participation and 20%    Outcomes discussion 2. Group Project 30%     3. Test and Examination 50%     Total 100 %

Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs.

. Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs. Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and 1. Keller, K. L. (2012). Strategic Brand Management: Building, Measuring, References and Managing Brand Equity, 4rd edition. Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson/Prentice Hall.

References 1. Temporal, P. (2010). Advanced Brand Management: Managing Brands in a Changing World, 2nd edition. Hoboken, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons. (updated as at 29 July 2015)

315

77 Course Description Form Course Code MKT4232 Course Title Advertising and Event Management Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite MKT2001 Marketing Principles Objectives 1. Identify the elements, process and resources requirement of advertising program and event development. 2. Distinguish different types of advertising programs and events developed for both for-profit and non-profit organisations. 3. Develop the integrated marketing strategy for event especially how to manage advertising and public relations. Course Upon completion of the course, students should be able to: Intended (a) Explain and discuss the key concepts and strategies of advertising and Learning event management. Outcomes (b) Develop advertising campaign and event for both for-profit and non- (CILOs) profit organisations. (c) Evaluate the overall effectiveness of advertising campaign and event. (d) Discuss the major trends and issues in the advertising and event industry and the factors affecting the growth of them. CILOs in

Alignment PILOs with PILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)     (b)     (c)    (d)  

MK-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6

CILO s (a)   (b)   (c)   (d)    

Course Course Synopsis Synopsis/ The course is designed to provide students with a comprehensive Indicative understanding of the principles and practices of advertising and event Syllabus management. Students will learn about foundations of advertising and event management, planning and strategy, selecting effective advertising media, creating effective messages, as well as how to evaluate the advertising effectiveness. The course also covers event marketing strategy; aspects of event sponsorship and operations.

Indicative Syllabus 1. Foundation of advertising management 1.1. Advertising functions 1.2. Advertising management process 1.3. Ad-Investment considerations

316

2. Advertising planning and strategy 2.1. Creating effective advertising 2.2. Alternative styles of creative advertising 2.3. Advertising formulation 2.4. Corporate image and issue advertising

3. Effective advertising media 3.1. Media planning process 3.2. Specifying media objectives 3.3. Traditional advertising media 3.4. Internet advertising 3.5. Other advertising media

4. Effective advertising messages 4.1. The role of humor in advertising 4.2. Appeals to consumer fears 4.3. Appeals to consumer guilt 4.4. Subliminal messages

5. Evaluation of advertising effectiveness 5.1. Measures of emotional reactions 5.2. Measures of persuasion 5.3. Measures of sales response

6. Event industry knowledge and concept 6.1. Pioneers of event marketing 6.2. Evolution of conventions and conferences 6.3. The 5 Ps of event marketing 6.4. Trends in event management

7. Event marketing strategy and sponsorship 7.1. The 5 Ws of event marketing 7.2. Internal and external event marketing 7.3. Electronic event marketing strategies

8. Event operations management 8.1. Develop the event marketing budget 8.2. Identify resources to fund the budget 8.3. Identify potential sponsors to support the budget 8.4. Calculate the rate of return on event marketing Learning & Lectures Teaching Lectures will be delivered to assist students’ understanding and learning of the Methodology fundamental concepts and skills as well as their practical applications of such concepts and skills. Guest speaker from the industry will be invited.

Tutorials During the tutorials, students are required to work on application questions relevant to real world issues. Students are encouraged to raise questions, and

317

to participate in discussions, and idea exchange. Students will be able to identify their learning process and thus enhance their learning capabilities. Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % weighting Course intended learning Alignment methods/tasks outcomes to be assessed with Course (a) (b) (c) (d)

Intended 1. Class participation and 10%    Learning discussion Outcomes 2. Project and Presentation 30%     3. Mid-term Test 20%    4. Examination 40%    Total 100 % Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:

Project and Presentation Projects provide the opportunity for students to integrate and apply concepts and skills to analyse real-world issues. Students will select a current issue relating to this course with the instructor’s approval, and discuss the underlying theoretical concepts and practical implications. Students are expected to analyse the issue and provide recommendation, write a paper, and present the findings in class.

Mid-term test Students will be required to attempt a mid-term test which will allow them aware of their learning progress, and their strengths and weaknesses in different topics of the course.

Final Examination A final exam will be conducted to assess students’ overall achievement for the course. It assesses the extent of the students’ ability to apply the subject knowledge to analyse relevant issues and provide solutions accordingly. Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 28 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Assessment Hours: . Examination 3 Hrs. Outside study: . Self-study 90 Hrs.

318

Total student study time 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbook and 1. Moriarty, S., Mitchell, N. and Wells, W. (2015) Advertising & IMC: References Principles and Practice, 10th edition, global edition, Boston: Pearson.

References 1. Belch, G.E., and Belch, M.A. (2015). Advertising and Promotion: An Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective, 10th edition. McGraw-Hill Education. 2. Fenich, G.G. (2015). Planning and Management of Meetings, Expositions, Events and Conventions. Pearson. 3. Mallen, C. and Adams, L.J. (2017) Event Management in Sport, Recreation and Tourism: Theoretical and Practical Dimensions, 3rd edition. Abingdon, Oxon : Routledge. 4. Van Der Wagen, Lynn. (2011) Event Management, 4th edition. Prentice Hall.

(updated on 11 July 2017)

319

Course Description Form

Course Code NUR1022 Course Title Public Health Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Prerequisite Nil Objectives This course will provide students with opportunities to understand the development of health policies in disease prevention and health promotion in Eastern and Western societies. It will also introduce the essential concepts in promoting and nurturing health Intended Learning Upon completion of the course, students will be able to: Outcomes (a) describe the concepts of public health. (b) define the main areas of public health including health services, epidemiology, social/behavioral sciences, environmental health and biostatistics. (c) understand the development of cross-disciplinary collaboration in public health development. (d) relate knowledge in health education and health promotion to protect and promote population health

CILOs in Alignment with PILOs 9 PILOs and Major- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10

ILOs CILOs (a)  (b)   (c)     (d)   

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)   (b)    (c)     (d)   

Indicative Syllabus 2. Overview of public health 1.1. Concepts of health 1.2. Determinants of health 1.3. Health care delivery system 3. Main areas in public health development 2.1. Health services 2.2. Epidemiology of health and illness 2.3. Social/behavioral sciences 2.4. Environmental health 2.5. Health policy and management 4. Health education and Health promotion 3.1. Theories and models of health education and health promotion

320

3.2. Strategies for health education and health promotion 3.3. Health education and health promotion in nursing practice 3.4. Contemporary issues in health education and health promotion 5. Ethics in public health research and professionalism

Teaching/Learning Lecture Methodology Course content will be primarily delivered through lectures.

Seminar/Problem-based learning Seminars broaden and deepen the students’ knowledge gained in the lecture through oral presentations and class discussions. Problem- based learning helps the students to integrate what they have learnt from the course into clinical practice by applying the knowledge into a well-designed real-life scenario.

Tutorial Tutorials provide opportunities for students to ask questions, clarify ambiguities, and discuss problems. In addition, students will be required to work in small groups to critically analyse a selected topic or health issue, and case scenarios are provided to facilitate students tackling with current issues.

Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Intended subject learning Alignment with methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed Intended Learning (Please tick as appropriate) Outcomes (a) (b) (c) (d) 1. Oral presentation 50   2. Written Test 50     Total 100

Oral Presentation Oral presentations encourage students to do research and to explore various sources for understanding local and international development of public health and evaluate students’ ability to analyse the current public health policy. It will be in the form of poster, pamphlet or case studies, etc. (PILO 2, 6, 13)

Written Test Written test will be used to evaluate students’ application of concepts and approaches of public health development in synthesizing the critiques of the local health care system. (PILO 2, 6, 13) Student Study Class contact: Effort Required . Lecture 16 Hrs. . Seminar/Problem-based learning 15 Hrs. . Tutorial 14 Hrs. Other student study effort: . Pre-reading 45 Hrs.

321

. Preparation of presentation and written assignment 45 Hrs. Total student study effort 135 Hrs. Reading List and Reading lists References 1. Goldsteen, R. L., Goldsteen, K., Dwelle, T. (2014). Introduction to public health: Promises and practice. New York: Springer Publishing Co Inc. 2. Gordois, L. (2014). Epidemiology. (5th ed.). Philadelphia: Saunders. 3. Schneider, M.J. (2013). Introduction to public health. (4th ed.). Sudbury: jones and Bartlett Publishers Inc. Journals 1. American Journal of Public Health 2. Annual Review of Public Health 3. Journal of Public Health 4. Public Health

Useful website 1. American Public Health Association: http://www.apha.org/ 2. Centre for Diastase Control and Prevention: http://www.cdc.gov/phin/ 3. Centre for Health Protection, Hong Kong: http://www.chp.gov.hk/ 4. Department of Health, Hong Kong: http://www.dh.gov.hk/eindex.html 5. HealthyPeople 2020 https://www.healthypeople.gov/ 6. National Institute for Health: http://www.nih.gov 7. Public Health Europe: http://ec.europa.eu/health/index_en.htm 8. Society for Public Health Education: http://www.sophe.org/ 9. World Association of Chinese Public Health Professionals: http://www.antitb.org.hk/hpc/cph/en/content_foreward.asp 10. World Health Organization: http://www.who.int/en/

(updated as at 29 July 2015)

322

79 Course Description Form

Course Code NUR3002 Course Title Ethical and Legal Aspects of Health Care Credit Value 3 QF Level 4 Prerequisites Nil Objectives The course aims to provide students with background knowledge of basic ethical and legal principles which influence clinical decision making. 1. Develop an understanding of the legal and ethical rights, responsibilities, and obligations of health professionals in a changing health environment 2. Appreciate the importance of respecting patient’s right and accepting accountability within the legal framework of health care.

Courses Upon completion of the course, students will be able to: Intended (a) understand the concepts of human value development and their Learning relationships with ethics and law related to health care Outcomes (b) explain patient’s right and professional accountability (CILOs) (c) analyse the complexity of ethical and legal factors which influence clinical decision making (d) demonstrate ability to critically appraise complex ethical practice and its relationship with culture (e) apply ethical principles and ethical decision making framework to their practice

CILOs in Alignment with PILOs PILOs and 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Major-ILOs CILOs (a) (b) (c)  (d)   (e) 

HSM-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CILOs (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e) 

Indicative 1 Theories in ethics Syllabus 1.1 Moral and virtue ethics 1.2 Good will and duty 1.3 Utilitarianism 1.4 Deontological theories 1.5 Human dignity

323

2 Ethical principles in health care 2.1 Beneficence, 2.2 Distributive justice 2.3 Informed consent 2.4 Integrity and totality 2.5 Respect for autonomy and freedom 3 Frameworks of ethical decision-making 4 Legal and ethical issues involved in end of life care 5 Legal issues involved in health care delivering 5.1 Patient’s rights and duty of care 5.2 Consent to receive health services 5.3 Confidentiality 5.4 Public Law 5.5 Malpractice and negligence 5.6 Human subject research 6 Relationship and distinction between ethics and law Teaching/Lear Lecture ning Lectures will be primary means for conveying course content Methodology Seminar/Problem-based learning Seminars are used to strengthen knowledge gained in lectures. Seminars will include oral presentations, discussions, and case studies. Problem-based learning uses a well-designed real-life scenario to initiate student’s active and independent learning of the subject matter, in particular, helps students to consolidate the theories and concepts they have learned and to apply them in real health care situations, thereby improving their ability to make critical decisions.

Tutorial Face-to-face tutorials are used to support lectures and seminar sessions. It provides opportunities for students to ask questions, clarify ambiguities, and discuss problems.

Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Course intended learning Alignment with methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed (Please Intended tick as appropriate) Learning (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Outcomes 1. Group Assignment 10    2. Project Presentation 30      3. Test 60      Total 100

Group Assignment A group assignment is used to evaluate student’s ability and understanding to synthesize the theories, apply ethical principles and ethical decision making to their practice (PILO 4, 5, 8, 9, 11, 13).

Group Project Presentation

324

A group project is used to evaluate students’ ability to apply what they have learned, and to collect and analyse relevant information/data for solving problems in various health care settings (PILO 4, 5, 8, 9, 11, 13, 14).

Test Examination is used to evaluate student’s understanding of ethical principles and legal knowledge related to health care practice (PILO 4, 5, 8, 9, 11, 13, 14).

.Student Study Class contact: Effort . Lecture 26 Hrs. Required . Seminar 9 Hrs. . Tutorial 8 Hrs. . Test 2 Hrs. Other student study effort: . Pre-reading 30 Hrs. . Preparation of project and examination 60 Hrs. Total student study effort 135 Hrs. Reading List Textbooks and References Graham, A. (2013). Law and Ethics in Nursing and Healthcare: An Introduction (1st ed.). London: Sage Publications Ltd. Recommended readings and relevant e-learning resource 1. Banks, S. and Gallagher, A. (2009). Ethics in professional life: virtues for health and social care. Basingstoke. England: Palgrave Macmillan. 2. Beauchamp and Childress (2001). Principles of Biomedical Ethics (6th eds). USA: OUP. 3. Pozga, G.D. (2013). Legal and Ethical Issues for Health Professionals (Third Edition). London: Jones & Bartlett Publishers. 4. Wong, D. (2010). Legal Issues for the Medical Practitioner. Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press. 5. DeGrazia, D., Mappes, T. and Brand-Ballard, J. (2011). Biomedical Ethics. 7th ed., New York: McGraw-Hill, 6. Fremgen B. (2008) Medical Law & Ethics (3rd ed). New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 7. Holstein, M. B., Parks, J. A. and Waymack, M. H. (2011). Ethics, aging, and society: the critical turn. New York: Springer Pub. Co. 8. Husted, J.H. & Husted, G.L. (2008). Ethical Decision Making in Nursing and Health Care: the Symphonological Approach. (4th ed). [electronic resource]. Springer Publishing Company. 9. Lachman, V.D. (2011). Ethical Challenges in Health Care. (Kindle Edition), New York: Springer Publishing Company. 10. MacKinnon, B. (2012). Ethics: theory and contemporary issues (7th ed). Boston, Mass.: Wadsworth Cengage Learning. 11. Sandel, M.J. (2009). Justice: What's the Right Thing to Do? UK: Penguin

325

12. The Medical Council of Hong Kong. Code of Professional Conduct for the Guidance of Registered Medical Practitioners. Retrieved from http://www.mchk.org.hk/Code_of_Professional_Conduct_2009.p df 13. Occupational Therapists Board. Code of Practice for Registered Occupational Therapists. Retrieved from http://www.smp-council.org.hk/ot/file/pdf/ot_practice_e.pdf 14. The Nursing Council of Hong Kong. Code of professional conduct and code of ethics for nurses in Hong Kong. Retrieved from http://www.nchk.org.hk/filemanager/en/pdf/conduct_eng.pdf 15. Tingle, J. & Cribb, A. (2007). Nursing Law and Ethics (3rd ed.) Malden MA: Blackwell Pub. 16. Tong, R. (2007). New perspectives in health care ethics: an interdisciplinary and crosscultural approach. Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Pearson/Prentice Hall. 17. Wesley-Smith P. (1999). An Introduction to The Hong Kong Legal System (3rd edition). Hong Kong: Oxford University Press (China) Ltd. 18. Wheeler, H. (2012). Law, Ethics and Professional Issues for Nursing: A Reflective and Portfolio-building Approach (1st ed.) London: Routledge Taylor & Francis Group

Journals 19. Journal of Nursing Administration's Healthcare Law, Ethics and Regulation 20. Nursing Ethics 21. Nursing Standards 22. Yale Journal of Health Policy, Law, and Ethics

(updated as at 22 June 2016)

326

80 Course Description Form

Course Code NUR3004 Course Title Health Management and Social Care of Older People and Their Families Credit Value 3 QF Level 5 Pre-requisite Nil Objectives 1. To understand concepts of health management of older people 2. To explore social impact of ageing process on older people and their families 3. To understand local regulations and systems regarding social and health care support to older people

Course Upon completion of this course, students will be able to Intended (a) distinguish roles and responsibilities of different disciplines regarding Learning health management and social care of older people and their families Outcomes (b) compare health care delivery and social support system in Hong Kong and China. (c) analyse interactions among cultural, environmental, societal and biological factors in health management and social care (d) discuss impact of lifestyle, health nurturing and preventive health in health management and social care (e) describe and identify government and non-government services and resources for older people and their families

CILOs in Alignment with PILOS PILOs and Major-ILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CILOs (a) (b)  (c)   (d)  (e)

HSM-ILOs

CILOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (a)  (b)  (c)  (d)  (e)  

Indicative 1. Concepts of multidisciplinary approach in health management Syllabus 2. Roles and responsibilities of different disciplines in health management of older people 3. Health care delivery and social support system in Hong Kong and China 4. Effect of cultural, environmental, societal and biological factors in health management and social care.

327

5. Impact of lifestyle, health nurturing and preventive health in health management and social care. 6. Government and non-government services and resources for older people and their families

Learning & Lecture Teaching Lectures are used to deliver key information and materials to provide Methodology updated information on the covered topics and to stimulate students towards further study.

Seminar Seminars are used to help students explore relevant issues so as to strengthen knowledge gained in lectures. Seminar presentation or group discussion activities will take place in seminars.

Tutorial Tutorials are used to help students gain better understanding of the topics covered in lectures. Learning progress of students will be monitored and feedback and support will also be provided as appropriate.

Assessment Methods Specific assessment % Course intended learning in Alignment methods/tasks Weighting outcomes to be assessed with (Please tick as appropriate) Course (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) 1. Debate 40      Intended 2. Individual Report 30   Learning 3. Individual 30      Outcomes Reflection Paper Total 100

Debate Debate is used to evaluate students’ ability to apply what they have learned, and to collect and analyse relevant information. (PILO 2, 4, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15).

Individual Report Students will be asked to submit a comprehensive report related to health and social care for the older people and their families in Hong Kong. (PILO 4, 10, 15).

Individual Reflection Paper Reflection papers after presentations are used to assess students’ abilities to analyse what they have learnt. It should be coherent and refer directly to specific material that inspires them (PILO 2, 4, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15).

Student Study Class contact: Effort . Lecture 20 Hrs. Required . Tutorial 3 Hrs. . Seminar 22 Hrs. Other student study effort:

328

. Self-study 45 Hrs. . Preparation for debate and report 45 Hrs. Total student study effort 135 Hrs. Reading List References and References 1. McInnis-Dittrich, K. (2009). Social work with older adults (3rd ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon. 2. Hooyman, N., & Kiyak, H.A. (2011). Social gerontology: a multidisciplinary perspective (9th ed.). Boston: Prentice Hall. 3. The Bristish Government (2001). The National Service Framework for Older People. https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachm ent_data/file/198033/National_Service_Framework_for_Older_P eople.pdf 4. Care Work with Older People in Sweden. http://www.ttk.ee/public/Sweden_Elders.pdf 5. Care Coordination in US. http://www.americangeriatrics.org/advocacy_public_policy/care_ coordination/ 6. Cox, C.B. (2000). To grandmother’s house we go and stay: perspectives on custodial grandparents. N.Y.: Springer. 7. Tepper, L.M., & Cassidy, T.M. (Eds). (2004). Multidisciplinary perspectives on aging. N.Y.: Springer. 8. Economic and Social Commission for Asia and the Pacific. (2002). National Policies and Programmes on Ageing in Asia and the Pacific: An Overview and Lessons Learned. Social Policy Paper No. 9. [electronic resource]. United Nations Publications. 9. United Nation and World Health Organization. The Right to Health. http://www.ohchr.org/documents/publications/factsheet31.pdf 10. Davis K (2014). Mirror Mirror on the Wall, 2014 Update: How the US Health Care System Compares Internationally. http://www.commonwealthfund.org/publications/fund- reports/2014/jun/mirror-mirror 11. Health System in OECD. http://www.oecd.org/els/health- systems/49105858.pdf 12. Integrated care with self management in COPD http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/23382555 http://thorax.bmj.com/content/66/11/935 13. UK Government. Making sure the health and social care services work together https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/making-sure-health-and- social-care-services-work-together 14. Canadian Government. Integrating care for the old people http://www.crncc.ca/knowledge/related_reports/pdf/MappingtheStat eoftheArt.pdf 15. Interprofessional learning

329

http://www.nursingtimes.net/Journals/2013/05/30/p/q/j/290513- How-interprofessional-learning-improves-care.pdf

Journals 1. Gerontologist 2. Journal of Health Organisation and Management 3. Journal of Gerontological Social Work 4. Families in Society 5. Social Work in Health Care 6. Journal of Aging and Social Policy

Useful Websites 1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention: http://www.cdc.gov/ 2. Centre for Health Protection: http://www.chp.gov.hk/en/index.html 3. Department of Health: Elderly Health Service http://www.info.gov.hk/elderly/english/index.htm 4. Hong Kong Housing Society: http://www.hkhselderly.com/tc/ 5. Hong Kong Alzheimer’s Disease Association: http://www.hkada.org.hk/ecmanage/page49.php 6. Hospital Authority: http://www.ha.org.hk/visitor/ha_index.asp?Lang=CHIB5 7. The Hong Kong Society for the Aged : http://www.sage.org.hk/eng/refer.html 8. World Health Organization http://www.who.int/ageing/en/ 9. The Scottish Governement. Free Personal and Nursing Care. http://www.scotland.gov.uk/Topics/Health/Support-Social- Care/Support/Older-People/Free-Personal-Nursing-Care 10. The Age UK. http://www.ageuk.org.uk/ (updated as at 22 June 2016)

330